Home

Fileman 22.2 Advanced User Manual

1. 195 2 K O de E wan acne eetea tala desist sale tata hal dta au othe 198 e EE E 201 EXPrESSIODS T M Eeer 57 EXTRACT T lee deet 247 248 250 258 259 260 261 266 Extract Folie 247 AIC EIVADAGTIVEDE EE 202 Destination Fleege 248 Important Items to IN te s asciende tno de eit efe dado ies 247 Ee eene ere EE 250 OVETVICW ee 247 Source PIES M 248 vcn 253 EE 255 KEE 257 e E T 258 EE 209 eur ates 261 vij CEN 264 DL epo Osce ta to bI An NP toe 265 ir AE 266 sor T EI 253 Extract IDOL Men aieo AUG oo Pr DA E ESO DW EDD PN ecg 253 IER E 248 252 253 FIELD DELIMITER EE 217 328 March 2013 Index Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Field or Record bevel Execution sis coeno ise ede etie nente nevis hio cu EE Eed 167 lj ES Chabeine Aber ULES ic o eere EE 138 Changing DATA TYPE Values ecespe teretes bete Sees eet boo ee ob dgei 141 IRC 121 IR aeterne ocaeca He Deae tte aat ob vA Bote 142 e e 29 KEY MICAS E 29 Making a Field Mandatory eoo ee o aae NOSE ee Ate 136 INutiber cs A D ae estu tede veu ei tate attt tabes e 26 137 EE ee Ee 136 Tequited sos aeta t E 23 Screen Mode Eeer E EE 122 PILE PIE ADDER Pelea eser eaten tide ta nectit e ave E Sue Ms 224 FILE TRAILER Fields soie eto IRA be essen en bred 224 FILEGRAM HISTORY File iuo torret retro re
2. If you answer NO to this question the vertical bar 1 character will be ignored No is the default TIP When it is important that lines of text be printed exactly as they were entered answer NO to the prompt SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE question and e YES to the prompt SHALL I CHARACTERS IN THIS TEXT BE TREATED LIKE ANY OTHER CHARACTERS 150 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual COMPUTED Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the JUST RELEASED field 1000 in the ORDER file 2100 has a value of COMPUTED Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES lt Enter gt MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER lt Enter gt Select FIELD JUST RELEASED You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 1000 in File 100 FIELD LABEL JUST RELEASED DATA TYPE COMPUTED EE ee et ee ae 1 COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION 68 2 gt TODAY A TYPE OF RESULT BOOLEAN NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT SHOULD VALUE ALWAYS BE ROUNDED WHEN TOTALLING SHOULD SUMS BE SUMS OF COMPONENT FIELDS LENGTH OF FIELD IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containin
3. The template for your filegram is now set up Edit this template just like you would any other PRINT template NOTE You do not have to include the 01 field because it is automatically included for use as a lookup value To send logical records in a filegram simply use file navigation to and from existing files at the SEND FIELD prompts o REF For a discussion of relational navigation using forward and backward pointers see the Relational Navigation section Display Filegram Template Option The Display Filegram Template option displays the FILEGRAM type template in a two column format like the Inquire to File Entries option Multiple type fields are shown last in the display no matter what their field number Here is an example of the output produced by the Display Filegram Template option Select FILEGRAM OPTION DISPLAY FILEGRAM TEMPLATE SELECT FILEGRAM TEMPLATE ZZTEST FILEGRAM NAME ZZTEST FILEGRAM DATE CREATED AUG 24 1989 READ ACCESS amp FILE 1001 USER 29 WRITE ACCESS H DATE LAST USED AUG 24 1989 ORDER 1 FILEGRAM FILE 1001 LEVEL 1 DATE LAST STORED AUG 24 1989 FIELD ORDER 1 FIELD NUMBER 01 272 March 2013 Chapter 13 Filegrams Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual CAPTION c NAME FIELD ORDER 2 FIELD NUMBER 1 CAPTION c VERSION FIELD ORDER 3 FIELD NUMBER 3 CAPTION c ROUTINE FIELD ORDER 4 FIELD NUMBER 4 CAPTION c CHANGE FIELD ORDER 5 FI
4. You next indicate the disposition of the merge from entry You can choose to delete it or retain it unmodified You can also redirect pointers that point to the merged from entry to point to the merge to entry Free text pointers will not be redirected DO YOU WANT TO DELETE THE MERGED FROM ENTRY AFTER MERGING YES DO YOU WANT TO REPOINT ENTRIES POINTING TO THIS ENTRY YES ENTER FILE TO EXCLUDE FROM REPOINT MERGE lt Enter gt eo NOTE You can also choose to exclude pointers from specified files in the repointing process In this example Error Reference source not found all pointers will be repointed DO YOU WANT TO DISPLAY ONLY THE DISCREPANT FIELDS NO Enter DEVICE Enter Press the Enter key at the DEVICE prompt so that you can continue to control how the merge is to proceed Since the merge is interactive it is not appropriate to release control to a printer or other output device While working at a keyboard printer is possible it is not recommended because you will not be able to monitor the selection of data values that is described below Fileman will display the data from the entries being merged Brackets indicate the values that will be used to create the final merged entry If the data values in both entries are the same no brackets are shown To start the values for FMPATIENT 23 A are bracketed because that entry was chosen as the default entry To switch the value tha
5. 224 Verity Fields TEE 141 161 View Filegram ODLUOD soiree efe ote td en e i b eiie dd tibns 269 275 VMS CONVERT DE 215 KEEN 204 288 Vpfield M LE 58 ER e backward POMC rerni ariii AE ETT a RP rA R lati nal Nayigati N EE 66 et e Relational E E e EE 65 Relational De EE 65 WORD PROCESSING Field Stu fin ucc eth e peek eo Ve ne rtr Heri d Advanced Edit Techniques s adetee to terre hc rere b eer sites 296 W RIFE EEN 5 67 174 232 Write Entries to Temporary Storage Option 279 283 285 286 X ET EE 169 A MODEL eiecit ag ee 204 336 March 2013
6. BEGIN REPORTER 1001 0582 END REPORTER 1001 05 REPORTER 01 FMEMPLOYEE 10 SEND DAT Enter message action in IN basket IGNORE F Forward mail to S DIFG SRV HISTORY SENDING A MESSAGE View Filegram Option Entries are made into the FILEGRAM HISTORY file 41 12 at the sending site when the filegram is generated and at the receiving site by the S DIFG SRV HISTORY server The View Filegram option allows the filegram sender or recipient to inspect the filegram Select this option and answer the Select FILEGRAM HISTORY prompt with a question mark to get a listing of available filegram histories You can see the filegram history just created by using the lt Spacebar gt lt Enter gt or another filegram history by entering its internal entry number or date time The following example shows you what a simple without pointers filegram looks like The View Filegram option will show this information to a filegram s sender The receiver sees additional information about the transmission of the mail message including the network mail path taken to the target system FILEGRAM for entry 334 in CHANGE FILE 1001 Sent on 25 AUG 1989 09 00 by FMUSER FOUR SDAT CHANGE 1001 N CHANGE 1001 L 334 BEGIN CHANGE 1001 1 SPECIFIER VERSION 1 17 4 END CHANGE 1001 VERSION 1 17 4 ROUTINE 3 DICATT5 CHANGE 4 Changed DIED to DIEO DATE CHANGED 6 APR 13 1987 DESCRIPTION 11 wp 276 March 2013 Chapter 13 Filegrams Fi
7. March 2013 75 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions WR REF For a description on how to add functions see the Fileman Functions Creating chapter in the Fileman Programmer Manual Some functions require an argument or arguments others are argumentless The arguments of the function can be any element including field name field number preceded with the quoted literal or even other functions The SOUAREROOT function for example would take an argument of 64 and return 8 Thus if the AGE field of a patient has the value 64 the expression SOUAREROOT AGE would equal 8 o REF For information on the syntax and description of the functions exported with Fileman see the Fileman Functions section Where to Use Using Computed Expressions in COMPUTED Fields One important place where you can use a computed expression is in a field that is computed The DATA TYPE field value of COMPUTED allows a computed expression to be stored in the data dictionary To define a field as COMPUTED use the Modify File Attributes option and reply to the DATA TYPE prompt with COMPUTED Select OPTION MODIFY FILE ATTRIBUTES DO YOU WANT TO USER THE SCREEN MODE VERSION Yes NO MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD AGE Are you adding AGE as a new FIELD the 13TH Y FIELD NUMBER 13 Enter DATA TYPE OF AGE COMPUTED You now enter the computed expression that will be stored in the
8. 78 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual A A B A B YES Total from NO Total from totals of component results for each entry Total Ci l 112 5612 2 2 2 6 To summarize if you want your total to be the ratio or product of the total of the component fields then answer this question YES Otherwise a NO answer is appropriate o NOTE The answer to this prompt only affects the Total produced by the Print File Entries option When defining a COMPUTED field you will also be asked LENGTH OF FIELD 8 Enter Here you can enter the maximum number of character positions that the field should occupy in output The default value is eight even if the COMPUTED field involves FREE TEXT type fields Be sure to allocate enough space to accommodate the results If the COMPUTED field s value is numeric the entire result is displayed regardless of the requested length Another type of result of a Computed Field is Multiple Pointer A Computed Multiple Pointer occurs when your computed expression relies on a backwards relational jump to another file to retrieve data from that file Because more than one entry in the pointing file might point to your file the computed expression can return more than one piece of data Hence its result type multiple pointer Following is an example of the creation of a Computed Multiple Pointer In March 2013 79 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User
9. DDXP EXPORT MENU Print Format Documentation DDXP FORMAT DOCUMENTATION You can list the available FOREIGN FORMAT file entries on the system using the Print Format Documentation option When you use this option you are given the choice of specifying individual formats or of printing all of the formats on your system Since your system can contain many formats try to select individual ones A typical dialogue for choosing formats and the resulting output looks like this Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION PRINT FORMAT DOCUMENTATION Select one of the following 1 Only print selected foreign formats 2 Print all foreign formats Enter response 1 lt Enter gt Only print selected foreign formats Select FOREIGN FORMAT 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Select FOREIGN FORMAT EXCEL COMMA Select FOREIGN FORMAT lt Enter gt DEVICE lt Enter gt AVAILABLE FOREIGN FORMATS NOV 2 1992 15 34 Page 1 NAME 123 IMPORT NUMBERS DESCRIPTION This format exports data for use with LOTUS 1 2 3 spreadsheets Non numeric fields will be in quotes Each field will be separated by a space USAGE NOTE To import into 1 2 3 choose FILE gt IMPORT gt NUMBERS 226 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual OTHER NAME LOTUS 123 NUMBERS DESCRIPTION NAME EXCEL COMMA DESCRIPTION Use this format to export data to the EXCEL spreadsheet on the Macintosh The exported data will have a
10. If you press the Enter key at the DEVICE prompt the export output will be displayed on your screen Sending the formatted export data to the screen allows you to use a PC based screen capture to put the data into a file This file would be a readable ASCII file on that computer This method of transferring the data into a file is a simple one that will often be successful and convenient especially if the importing application is on the same PC When using a screen capture to create a file from the exported data you must consider the peculiarities of your communication and terminal emulation software Your communication application for example may intercept certain control characters like the TAB ASCII 9 and convert them into something else This may cause the import to fail Also your terminal emulation may automatically break lines at 80 characters by inserting an unwanted carriage return or line feed When emulating VT 100 and other ANSI terminals you can avoid this last problem by turning wraparound mode off March 2013 203 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Ze CAUTION When exporting data to your terminal s screen there will be no page breaks Therefore there is no graceful way to interrupt the export once it has begun Sending Export Data to a Host File Having data printed on screen is of little use if you are using a terminal with no screen capture capabilities An alternati
11. comma between each field s value The user will be asked to specify the data type of each exported field Those fields that are not numeric will be surrounded by quotes Commas are allowed in the non numeric data but quotes are not USAGE NOTE OTHER NAME COMMA DELIMITED DESCRIPTION Exported data is delimited by commas Non numeric data is surrounded by quotes OTHER NAME CSV DESCRIPTION Comma Separated Values Define Foreign File Format Option Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Data Export to Foreign Format DDXP EXPORT MENU Define Foreign File Format DDXP DEFINE FORMAT gt Locked with DDXP DEFINE All exports depend on a Foreign Format In addition you can use Foreign Formats for imports as well Usually you will be able to use an existing format to properly format your data for export or import To find out what formats exist on your system see the Print Format Documentation section If no existing format meets your needs use the Define Foreign File Format option to create a new one You can use the Define Foreign File Format option to Define a new Foreign Format from scratch March 2013 227 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Modify a Foreign Format that has not been used to create an EXPORT template Copy an existing format in order to create a similar modified one If you are using the Export Tool through K
12. gt fMPATIENT fORTY ONE UPPERCASE UPPERCASE string string is an expression with alphabetic characters This function will change lowercase characters in string to uppercase String cannot be a word processing field the contents of a word processing field will be unaffected If the user s language is not English and if that language has code in the Language File 85 to change lowercase characters to uppercase this function will change the characters according to the language specific instructions UPPERCASE VISTA gt VISTA Temporary Data Storage Functions PARAM Format PARAM parameter Parameters parameter has been assigned a value by the SETPARAM function Use This function works with the SETPARAM function It returns the value that has been given to parameter by use March 2013 110 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual p of the SETPARAM function PARAM AGE gt 45 SETPARAM SETPARAM value parameter Parameters value is an expression to be evaluated parameter is a string 1 to 30 characters long identifying a storage location to hold value Use This function works with the PARAM function It returns nothing Value is stored in parameter for later reference Example SETPARAM TODAY DATE OF BIRTH 365 AGE gt no output result of the expression put into AGE VAR VAR variable variable is a variable in the local symbo
13. 2 MATCHES FOUND Another example for using DUPLICATED this time using Option PRINT FILE ENTRIES would be if you wanted to print the name with three asterisks in front of it if it were a duplicated name FIRST PRINT FIELD S DUPLICATED NAME 1 NAME March 2013 99 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions FILE FILE vpointer vpointer is the label or field number of a variable pointer field Use This function returns the name of the file to which a variable pointer points for a particular entry FILE PROVIDER STAFF PROVIDERS INTERNAL INTERNAL field SEH is the label of a field or a field number preceded by This function returns the internally stored value of the field for a particular entry It is useful in obtaining the internally stored instead of displayed DATA TYPE field value of any of the following POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER DATE TIME SET OF CODES Examples INTERNAL PROVIDER gt 136 VA 200 INTERNAL SEX gt m LAST Format LAST fname LAST fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple valued field in your current file In the second format 100 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual MAXIMUM Format Parameters March 2013 fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a fiel
14. 2 gt lt Enter gt The description appears in a standard DD listing TIP It is important to describe cross references that are unusual or especially critical Consider describing all MUMPS trigger and bulletin cross references Create a Traditional Cross reference If you d like to create a Traditional cross reference for a field proceed in the following manner Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select FIELD 1 Enter DATE NO CURRENT CROSS REFERENCE March 2013 165 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities WANT TO CREATE A NEW CROSS REFERENCE FOR THIS FIELD NO YES CROSS REFERENCE NUMBER 1 Enter Select TYPE OF INDEXING REGULAR Enter WANT CROSS REFERENCE TO BE USED FOR LOOKUP AS WELL AS FOR SORTING YES Enter NO DELETION MESSAGE Enter DESCRIPTION 1 gt Lookup and sorting can be done by date using this Regular 2 gt cross reference 3 gt lt Enter gt Delete a Traditional Cross reference The following dialogue shows how to delete a Traditional cross reference Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Se
15. C 99 100 101 cde SE XTRACT 112 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Format E string n1 n2 E string n E string Parameters string is a string expression n n1 and n2 are positive integers or expressions yielding positive integers Use This function returns a substring from string If you use only string as a argument the first character is returned If you specify one n the character in that position in the string is returned If you specify n1 and n2 a string starting at n1 and ending at n2 is returned Examples E NAME 3 7 gt ith A NAME is FMPATIENT 21 E NAME 2 gt m E NAME gt S F IND Format F string target F string target n Parameters string is a string expression target is the character s or an expression yielding the character s to be searched for nis a positive integer or an expression yielding a positive integer Use This function returns the character position in string following the target If n is specified as a third argument the search for target is begun after character position n If target is not found 0 is returned Examples SF FMPATIENT 21 gt 7 SF NAME 7 gt 0 NAME has value of FMPATIENT 21 SHLOROLOG March 2013 113 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Eme KC system variable returns the date and time in internal M format The format
16. FIRST PRINT FIELD WARD LOCA THEN PRINT FIELD ROOM BED THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT STATISTICS Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter Use print qualifiers for these two fields xxxxxxxx which will be used for the scattergram e SORRY JUST A MOMENT PLEASE Output is generated here March 2013 13 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 2 Statistics Generating the Scattergram Select Fileman Option OTHER Options Filegrams Audit Menu Screenman Statistics Fileman Management Data Export to Foreign Format Extract Data To Fileman File Import Data Browser Select Other Options Option STATistics Select STATISTICAL ROUTINE SCATTERGRAM DEVICE HOME Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter PATIENT STATISTICST TOTAL 47 0 2 4 PR ae DE E 4 12 12 2 3 2 8 2 8 2 3 3 4 3 4 2 2 5 3 0 0 14 March 2013 Chapter 2 Statistics Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual E es ei ee are a ces i eee ae ee 1 3 X AXIS WARD LOCATION Y AXIS ROOM BED Histogram If you subtotal by one or more fields in a sort you can get Histograms for the fields that are preceded by amp or qualifiers in the corresponding print The Histograms that you can produce depend on which print qualifier is used
17. March 2013 229 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools FILE HEADER FILE TRAILER DATE FORMAT SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL O QUOTE NON NUMERIC YES PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE YES Go to next page to document format COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert The meaning of the fields on this page of the form is described in the FOREIGN FORMAT File Attributes Reference section You are presented with the same form whether you are modifying an existing format or creating one from scratch TIP It is important to always create and edit formats using the Data Export options because validity checks on the relationships between the various fields are built into the Screenman form If you enter inconsistent data you will be alerted when you try to exit the form There is a second page of the form that contains documenting information about the format The second page allows you to enter a description and usage notes for the format You can also enter other names for the format in a Multiple these other names can then be used to reference the format anywhere in the Export or Import Tools Here is what the second page looks like with the Multiple s popup window opened FOREIGN FILE FORMAT CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Page 2 DESCRIPTION WP USAGE NOTES WP 230 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Select OTHER NAME FOR FORMAT LO
18. substituted for numeric nulls put them into this field Null values for DATA TYPE field values of NUMERIC in the primary file including its Multiples will have this character exported If you want quotes in your substitute string enter two quote marks for each quote you want o NOTE Do not put anything in this field when defining a fixed length format A CAUTION There will be no substitution for null values if the field being exported is not in the primary file that is if it is reached using relational navigation DATE FORMAT The native or default format for dates varies from application to application Fileman uses two formats nternal or Storage format YYYMMDD Where YYY is the year minus 1700 External or Default display format MON DD YYYY When data from a DATA TYPE field of DATE TIME is exported it is in the external format Since the importing application may recognize a different format you can March 2013 223 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools change the exported value by placing M code in this field only those with programmer access can enter code in this field When this M code is executed the local variable X will contain the date in Fileman internal format Your M code should result in the local variable Y containing the date in the format you want exported If your format will be used with Kernel it is recommended that you make use of the date extri
19. A LESS THAN 900 B SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD Enter IF A Enter NO LESS THAN 900 STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE ZZTEST TEMPLATE Are you adding ZZTEST TEMPLATE as a new SORT TEMPLATE No Y SORT BY VERSION START WITH VERSION FIRST Enter March 2013 255 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool WITHIN VERSION SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD 01 Enter NO THEN PRINT FIELD VERSION THEN PRINT FIELD PROGRAMMER THEN PRINT FIELD Enter HEADING CHANGE EXTRACT SEARCH Replace Enter DEVICE Enter The resulting output looks like CHANGE EXTRACT SEARCH AUG 30 1992 10 59 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 3 MATCHES FOUND After you use this option Fileman marks the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file entry with a status of SELECTED If an unfinished extract activity exists for a file and you select this same file for a subsequent extract activity you will see the following message There is already an outstanding extract activity Please finish it or CANCEL it Since the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file maintains a record of both your extract and archiving activities you will see the italicized word archiving whenever the outstanding file activity is an archiving one To add or delete entries from the SEARCH SORT template you just created use the Add Delete Selecte
20. Enter HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 0 and 100 0 Decimal Digits Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter A default help prompt is automatically written for you with the DATA TYPE field value of NUMERIC You can change this prompt using the Replace With syntax e NOTE This help information is displayed when the user inputs a single question mark when editing this field March 2013 125 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields WR NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of NUMERIC in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section SET OF CODES Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as a SET OF CODES can be used to restrict a user to just a few possible values e g YES or NO When defining a DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES enter a valid code and a translation of what each code means The user can enter the code the full meaning or a portion of the full meaning If the field is set up to require only a one character response this data type can simplify the user s data entry Fileman has only a limited amount of space to store the codes and their external values If the limit is exceeded you are told TOO MUCH SHOULD BE A POINTER NOT SET The DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES is someti
21. FIRST Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD TEST NUMBER THEN PRINT FIELD EXAMINEE DIAGNOSIS THEN PRINT FIELD Enter HEADING RADIOLOGY EXAM LIST Enter STORE PRINT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE Exam Diagnoses For each entry in the RADIOLOGY EXAM file EXAMINEE points to an entry in the PATIENT file The diagnoses associated with that patient are returned as the Multiline output of the expression EXAMINEE DIAGNOSIS Backward Pointer The following example shows how you can use the cross referenced Backward Pointer that yields a Multiline response in an INPUT template INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NAME THEN EDIT FIELD RADIOLOGY EXAM By RADIOLOGY EXAM do you mean the RADIOLOGY EXAM File pointing via its EXAMINEE Field YES Enter WILL TERMINAL USER BE ALLOWED TO SELECT PROPER ENTRY IN RADIOLOGY EXAM FILE YES Enter YES DO YOU WANT TO PERMIT ADDING A NEW RADIOLOGY EXAM ENTRY NO Enter 66 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual EDIT WHICH RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD DATE OF EXAM THEN EDIT WHICH RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD RESULTS THEN EDIT WHICH RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD Enter THEN EDIT FIELD ATTENDING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD Enter STORE THESE FIELDS IN TEMPLATE PATIENT EXAM To use this template you Specify the patient s name to edit Select one of the RADIOLOGY EXAM file s entries that point back to t
22. L X gt 30 L X lt 3 X 1P E MAR 29 1991 Answer must be 3 30 characters DEMOG 16026 B 1 S DIZ 16026 B 2 K DIZ 16026 B Automatically created regular x look up and sort entries based the 01 NAME field 0 2 SET Required m FOR MALE f FOR FEMALE MAR 22 1991 DEMOG 0 3 DATE Required S DT E D DT S X Y X MAR 22 1991 TYPE A DATE BETWEEN 1 1 1860 AND DEMOG March 2013 39 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities 16026 3 RELIGION 0 4 POINTER TO RELIGION FILE 13 LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 16026 4 DIAGNOSIS 1 0 Multiple 716026 04 Add New Entry without Asking STANDARD DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 2 STORED IN DIZ 16026 1 ENTRY SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX DATA NAME GLOBAL DATA ELEMENT TITLE LOCATION TYPE 16026 04 01 DIAGNOSIS 0 1 FREE TEXT Multiply asked INPUT TRANSFORM K L X gt 30 S L X lt 3 X LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 HELP PROMPT Answer must be 3 30 characters in length CROSS REFERENCE 16026 04 B 1 S DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B E X 1 30 DA 2 K DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B E X 1 30 DA 16026 04 1 AGE AT ONSET 0 2 NUMBER INPUT TRANSFORM K X X X gt 100 xX lt 0 X E1 1N N X LAST EDITED APR 29 1991 HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 0 and 100 0 Decimal Digits 16026 04 2 HISTORY 1 0 WORD PROCESSING 16026 42 16026 5 PROVIDER 2 1 VARIABLE POINTER FILE ORDER PREFIX L
23. S SUMMARIZE the modifications before proceeding E EDIT the data again before proceeding PROCEED March 2013 243 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries If you enter P or PROCEED at the ACTION prompt then Fileman will proceed to merge the data specified ACTION PROCEED to merge the data I will now merge all subfiles in this file This may take some time please be patient I will now repoint all files that point to this entry This may take some time please be patient Gathering files and checking PT nodes Merging entries Merge complete Deleting From entry The merging of the data is now complete Be careful when using this option because the merge from entry can be deleted and data could be lost SUMMARIZE To review the changes that will be made to the merge to entry enter an S or SUMMARIZE at the ACTION prompt before proceeding to merge The following will be shown ACTION SUMMARIZE the modifications before proceeding SUMMARY OF MODIFICATIONS TO FMPATIENT 23 A FIELD OLD VALUE NEW VALUE 2 SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 4 DATE OF BIRTH 1872 NOTE Multiples will be merged into the target record Enter RETURN to continue lt Enter gt 244 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual EDIT Enter an E or EDIT at the ACTION prompt to change the decisions made earlier If you choose this ac
24. SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE YES SHOULD USER SEE AN ADDING A NEW ENTRY MESSAGE NO HAVING ENTERED OR EDITED ONE MULTIPLE HSOULD USER BE ASKED ANOTEHR L COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert A Multiple field is created just as any other except that the I5 THIS FIELD March 2013 155 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields MULTIPLE question is answered YES In Screen Mode after answering YES to this question a popup window appears containing editable attributes pertinent to a Multiple field With Multiple type fields Fileman asks if you want users to be notified when they are adding new entries and if users should be asked if they want to make another entry In this case we answered NO to both questions Subfields To create or edit Subfields of a Multiple field select a Multiple valued field e g the RESPONSES Multiple field previously created Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD RESPONSES You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Multiple Field 4 5 in File 100 MULTIPLE FIELD LABEL Ise READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode after entering a Multi
25. XREF 3220801 D index 1051 not properly set 11310003 04 FIELD 04 SET SET OF CODES 160 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual 4 BAD SET U not in Set 11310003 05 FIELD 72 05 NUMBER NUMERIC 5 BAD NUMBER ABCDEF fails Input Transform 11310003 06 FIELD 2 06 LOOPY OUTPUT TRANSFORM DATE If more than one discrepancy is found between the current definition and the data on file you will be asked STORE THESE ENTRY ID S IN TEMPLATE If you identify a template name at this prompt the list of those entries containing the inconsistent data will be saved in the template Later you would be able to SORT BY the entries in this template to display or edit them eo REF For information on how to execute or avoid executing any part of the INPUT transform when the Verify Fields option is being run see the Input Transform section in the Advanced File Definition chapter in the Fileman Programmer Manual NOTE Some parts of a field s INPUT transform whose main purpose is to validate data as a user enters it may be inappropriate when being executed in the context of the Verify Fields option Cross Reference a Field or File Traditional Cross references Types of Traditional Cross references Edit a Traditional Cross reference Create a Traditional Cross reference Delete a Traditional Cross reference March 2013 161 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manua
26. after the Select FIELD prompt you are presented with a Screenman form screen that can be reviewed and edited like any other In this example the most important field on this screen is the DATA TYPE field in the upper right corner it is a required entry In this example required entries in Screen Mode are indicated by a caption with a different color and an underline o NOTE Screen Mode highlights the captions for required fields with an underline However depending on your terminal or terminal emulator software and your personal preferences the form of the highlight can vary e g some emulators will highlight required field captions in reverse video a different color with an underline or any combination of highlights REF For more information on Screenman forms and Screen Mode see the Screenman chapter in the Fileman User Manual In this case the DATA TYPE field has been defined as NUMERIC and is not editable as indicated by the message displayed near the bottom of the screen i e NOTE THAT THIS FIELD S DEFINITION IS NOT EDITABLE this is because a programmer has previously edited the definition in a special way However unlike the DATA TYPE field the value of the HELP PROMPT field i e Enter the Order number which is the message that is displayed to users when they enter a single question mark while editing the ORDER field can be edited The DESCRIPTION and TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION fields are multi
27. and variable pointers are a good example of the kind of data whose internal value is different from its external value Internally pointers are stored as record numbers Externally they show up as the value of the 01 field This is important information to have if you ever need to deal with dangling pointers And you probably will Dangling Pointers As you can imagine it s not usually a good idea to move or delete a pointed to record It tends to break other records in other files A pointer or variable pointer that no longer points to anything is called a dangling pointer And dangling pointers are trouble They are a form of database corruption You can spot a dangling pointer because instead of showing the 01 field it shows the record number For example if someone foolishly eliminated Alaska from the STATE file then every address pointing to Alaska would instead show the name of the state as 2 If you ever encounter a dangling pointer it needs to be fixed as soon as possible If you do not have the right permissions or the know how to fix it yourself then enlist the help of the IT department Don t let it go It s causing problems even if you can t see them all Although you may need the IT department s help in fixing a dangling pointer it s rare that the IT person can fix it all on their own Figuring out where the pointer is supposed to be pointing requires knowledge of the subject matter And it s likely that a pro
28. backward Extended Egger ee Relational Navigation E 60 Binary EHNEN 72 Boolean e E 72 EIERE EE 164 324 March 2013 Index Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Cancel Archival Selection Option eet orbe tenen itorort s 280 291 Cancel Extract Selection ODPOto cicer pue peine obs 265 CAPTIONED PRINT Etude ee 301 Check Fix DD Stf chitteOpHQb soon ee 49 Code to Kill fhi Entire Eege CIOSSSeI eC HICOS us esteso iue utto ome Es 167 EE Cross references A ceo EE e 168 Et epu 215 Compare Merge File Entries Option 231 237 239 242 EE EE 237 ee 166 Computed ouo stet oput preset sdb ede utei enfe te EXpIeSSIDISQ enia coded bae teat atid e iato M e aa rupe ec hoa let Dad 70 Ett 73 Data TY Pes T E 74 Se aaee E 70 Field Value Stuffing E 83 RE 81 EE 71 OUTPUT Transform Sisera pP Ie TED A NOE EHE 84 DV LEAK C 70 Usi g Functions as Elemente sve estet tret eos di an tU i mius 75 Where RE 76 Word Processing Mee EE 84 KEE KEE eer 168 COMPE Ee geed e e EE EE 57 Create Export Template Option ane tth ar en nee egentes 198 Create Extract Template ODOEP ois sa yan tetaserareledeiek dones deis eee Ee 209 Create Filegram Archiving Template Option 285 Create Edit Filegram Template Option 268 269 cien ICTS eebe eege 120 March 2013 325 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Index Files and el Eeer io RED POE Ee poi poni a eene 119 Cross Reference a Field or File OD
29. fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple valued field in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname Use This function returns the smallest value from the file s 01 field or from the Multiple identified by fname The second format returns the smallest value from field See MAXIMUM for limits of use Examples MINIMUM APPOINTMENT gt MAR 1 1979 APPOINTMENT is a Multiple valued DATE TIME field MINIMUM PATIENT AGE gt 18 TH n The syntax of this function is different because the function s name is defined by the user The name is a number followed by an ordinal number suffix nTH fname nTH fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple in your current file 102 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname This function returns the n entry in a file or ina Multiple identified by fname If the second format is used the value of the specified field associated with the nth entry in fname is returned The n entry is determined by the internal entry number the function does not analyze the values of the entries When used with the second format the nth subentry
30. format Quoted Fields in Delimited Format Now suppose in the previous example that instead of two separate fields for LASTNAME and FIRSTNAME there is only a single NAME field for both Suppose that incoming data you want to place in the single NAME field comes in the form FMPATIENT FOUR but you still want to use commas as your delimiter You can use the Fields Quoted setting in the Import form or the Quote Non Numeric Fields setting in a Foreign Format to ignore the delimiter if it is between quotes in the incoming data Thus if you set Fields Quoted to YES in your import form and you pass in a record that looks like FMPATIENT FOUR 90 123rd St San Francisco CA 94112 For quoted fields like FMPATIENT FOUR the Import Tool will ignore the comma delimiter in between the quotes and treat FMPATIENT FOUR as a single field value Fixed Length Data Format In fixed length data format a standard width is expected for each field in the record Suppose for example you have a record with LASTNAME FMPATIENT FIRSTNAME ONE AGE 36 25 characters might be set aside for LASTNAME 20 characters for FIRSTNAME and 3 characters for AGE The resulting record exported in fixed length format would look like FMPATIENT ONE 36 Groups of records are exported line by line one line after another A file of records in fixed length format might look like 192 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Ex
31. number should mean So what files have a 001 field Many of them do but one example is file 50 the DRUG file Users can look up drugs by entering their record number That seems counter intuitive at first wouldn t most users prefer to look up drugs by their name Most human users would However file 50 is also used by barcode medication administration or BCMA BCMA is increasingly popular because it allows clinicians to administer drugs with a much lower error rate And what is a barcode It s a number Basically barcodes are really really reliable ways of entering a long number into a computer But that number needs to mean something to the computer Like for example the record number of a type of medication Therefore file 50 has a 001 field to accommodate BCMA Did You Just Say Dye Numbing The 001 field is a way of exposing the record number to the user This is March 2013 27 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure done if the record number is somehow useful to the user in finding the record they need Sometimes the record number is useful because the file designer made it that way It is possible to set up a file in such a way that the record number is derived from the value in the 01 field For example IHS collects more information on patients than is contained in the PATIENT file They have in effect a supplementary PATIENT file that holds this additional information The
32. the same search specifications 4 Adjust the extract list to match the list of entries on the exception report by using the Add Delete Selected Entries option 5 Proceed as before For exceptions caused by INPUT transforms keep in mind that the value of each field in an extracted record is tested against the INPUT transform of its destination field If any value fails its destination field s INPUT transform the extract for the entire record will fail Make sure the INPUT transforms on the destination fields are appropriate for the data you will be extracting 264 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual W NOTE If you are extracting a Subrecord using the EXTRACT DIAXU entry point and its FILING LEVEL parameter and a value fails the INPUT transform only the extract of the Subrecord will fail Purge Extracted Entries Option 7 of 9 If you have DELETE access to the primary file you can use the Purge Stored Entries option to delete extracted data from the primary file our example is the CHANGE file After you have purged your entries Fileman will update the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file If you attempt to purge an extract activity that lacks the status UPDATED DESTINATION FILE you will encounter the following message Data has NOT YET been moved to the destination file When purging extracted data you will encounter a dialogue much like the one that follows Select EXTRACT OPTION PU
33. the status of your archiving activity is ARCHIVED TEMPORARY In the dialogue below the entries in Archiving Activity 3 are being sent to temporary storage using the ZZTESTFILEGRAM FILEGRAM type template The task is being queued with output sent to PRINTER The resulting report contains a header dots and archiving totals as shown below Select ARCHIVE OPTION WRITE Enter ENTRIES TO TEMPORARY STORAGE Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING You MUST enter a FILEGRAM template name This FILEGRAM template will be used to actually build the archive message PRINT TEMPLATE ZZTESTFILEGRAM Enter FILEGRAM AUG 30 288 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual 1992 USER 60 FILE 16000 DEVICE Q lt Enter gt UEUE TO PRINT ON DEVICE PRINTER CHANGE ARCHIVING ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 15 01 PAGE 1 4 ITEMS HAVE BEEN ARCHIVED Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage Once you have written an archiving activity to temporary storage you can use the Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage option If you choose an archiving activity that has not yet been written to temporary storage a warning is issued This option will do several things not necessarily in the order listed here 1 It will print an Archive Activity report which prints information from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 1 11 such as the archiver De th
34. 42 1 0 01 HISTORY W 0 1 5 PROVIDER V 2 1 6 SSN RFa 2 2 GG GA Fa The codes in parentheses following the field names in the Condensed data dictionary contain information regarding the specifications of the field Here is a complete list of those codes and their meanings EC The field has been marked for auditing all the time Ec The auditing is only on edit or delete For Multiples new subentries can be added without being asked BC The data is Boolean computed true or false and C the data is computed 36 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual the dataisdatevalued O To specify printing n characters with d decimals O The field ras an OUTPUT ansora The data is a POINTER TO A FILE reference to file n VW the dataisa VARIABLEPONNTER U V WL The WORD PROCESSING data is normally printed in line mode De without word wrap X Editing is not allowed under the Modify File Attributes option because the INPUT transform has been modified under the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY March 2013 37 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities There is a screen associated with a DATA TYPE field value of any of the following POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER SET OF CODES For example the SSN field is required R is FREE TEXT E and is audited a Standard and Modi
35. AGE field In this case a function TODAY a field name DATE OF BIRTH and 76 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual a numeric literal are combined with two arithmetic binary operators to give a numeric result COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION TODAY DATE OF BIRTH 365 25 TRANSLATES TO THE FOLLOWING CODE S Y 16033 13 1 S D DIZ 16033 D0 0 0 1 X DT S X X X1 X X2 P Y 16033 13 1 U 3 X2 D X2 DTC X1 S X X 365 25 NOTE You will only see the generated code if you have programmer access When creating a COMPUTED field you are given the opportunity to specify the type of result of the computed expression Note the list of choices available The the following dialogue is presented TYPE OF RESULT STRING Enter a code from the list Select one of the following STRING NUMERIC BOOLEAN DATE MULTIPLE POINTER p MULTIPLE POINTER H oHUOuUZU TYPE OF RESULT STRING NUMERIC For numeric results you have other questions to answer First you are asked to how many decimal places to round the result In this case you want the result rounded to a whole number NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT ONLY ANSWER IF NUMBER VALUED O March 2013 77 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Then you must indicate when you want the rounding to occur SHOULD VALUE ALWAYS BE INTERNALLY ROUNDED TO 0 DE
36. Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving Please finish it or CANCEL it This message means that the file you identified has already been selected for archiving and that archiving activity has not been completed a second one cannot be started yet Since the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file is being shared by both archiving and extract activities the italicized word in the message will say extract if the outstanding activity on the file identified is an extract Add Delete Selected Entries Use the Add Delete Selected Entries option to add entries to or delete them from the archiving activity This is an easy way to clear out unwanted entries or add needed ones before archiving This option uses the Inquire to File Entries option to display the selected entries and then allows you to add or delete an entry If you add or delete an entry to an established archiving activity then the status of the activity will change to EDITED The Add Delete Selected Entries option will not allow you to edit an archiving activity list after the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option has been done If you need to change the archiving activity list after writing to temporary storage you must cancel that archiving activity and start a new one When using this option you first select the archiving activity number that you want to modify You can also identify the archiving activity by its file number or file name Then choose the entry that you want
37. Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Screen Mode Field Editing When using the Modify File Attributes option you can make your field entries in the traditional Scrolling Mode or choose to create modify or review a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode To make your entries in Screen Mode simply press the Enter key to accept the default response at the Do you want to use the screen mode version YES prompt The following example illustrates using Screen Mode when editing the 01 field of the ORDER file 100 Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Select FIELD 01 Enter ORDER You will then be taken into Screen Mode where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 01 in File 100 FIELD LABEL IC DATA TYPE NUMERIC TITLE AUDIT AUDIT CONDITION READ ACCESS DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY YES HELP PROMPT Enter the order number XECUTABLE HELP 122 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual NOTE THAT THIS FIELD S DEFINITION IS NOT EDITABLE Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Using the Screen Mode version of this option after entering the field name or number e g 01 field
38. Create Extract Template Option 5 of 9 sss 259 Update Destination File Option 6 of 9 sss 261 Purse Extracted Entries Option 7 of 9 dede oe eo at 264 Cancel Extract Selection Option 8 Of 9 sss 265 Validate Extract Template Option 9 of 9 sss 266 Chapter EE 267 FILEGRAM type Iemplalegs sete m tee mor eee pb tete 267 Filegram and Archiving Relattonzhup sss 268 Using leguerten 268 PIGS PAM Steps KR 269 Create Edit Filegram Template Option eee 269 Display Filegram Template Option sse 271 Re E EE 272 Generate Filegram Optoma utes tete eL Dudes alites iste eupalius tee dps 273 Receiving Filegrams with MailMan sese 274 View Prl etain CODUOR E 275 EE ee EE 276 Deleting a Filegraqmuuiienoneierhenite st ter exilii Ee 276 Chapter AACN VND enses Cota r tipico ibd saa aia Qi ME 278 Considerations Before Archiving tio tiere ceti 278 Archiving Process including Archiving Options 1 9 280 Select Entries EE 280 Add Delete Selected Entries nnne 283 Print Selected Entries e Ee etre oer ees 284 Create Filegram Archiving Template 285 Write Entries to Temporary 9EoFapeuine qieeestisum iv eto eU 286 Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage sss 288 P rtge Stored te oo mr repere ree en ehe Content 290 Cancel Archival Selection neon be tete aeter ape taste dr REO lentes 291 Fi
39. EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 Enter 08 30 92 SELECTED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Select CHANGE NO 330 NO 330 VERSION 17 09 PROGRAMMER FMPROGRAMMER 27 ROUTINE DIL2 DATE CHANGED OCT 24 1995 ADD this entry TO the EXTRACT SELECTION YES Enter March 2013 257 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool amp NOTE Entering two question marks at the Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY prompt displays a list of file entries e The phrase on EXTRACT list appears next to those entries that are currently part of the extract activity The question DELETE this entry appears whenever you select an entry that is currently on the extract list ADD this entry appears whenever you select an entry that is not among the items on the list Print Selected Entries Option 3 of 9 To display the list of entries you have selected use the Print Selected Entries option This option uses the standard Fileman interface for printing i REF For guidance on printing entries see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the Fileman User Manual The example that follows depicts the type of dialogue you will encounter when printing a list of entries to be extracted Select EXTRACT OPTION PRINT SELECTED ENTRIES Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 lt Enter gt CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Enter a regular Print Template name or fields you wish to see printed on th
40. Examples MAX 54 23 gt 54 MAX DATE OF BIRTH TODAY gt AUG 23 1991 March 2013 105 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions MIN MIN nl and n2 are numbers or numeric expressions This function returns the smaller of n1 and n2 Date time field values can be used resulting in the earliest date time being returned Examples MIN 54 23 gt 23 MIN DATE OF BIRTH TODAY gt NOV 1 1938 MODULO Format MODULO n1 n2 Parameters nl n2 are numbers or numeric expressions n1 is the dividend n2 is the divisor This mathematical function returns the remainder when n2 is divided into n1 it performs modulo division MODULO 54 5 gt 4 SQUAREROOT SQUAREROOT S nis a numeric expression greater than 0 This mathematical function returns the square root of n SQUAREROOT 9 gt 3 Printing Related Functions IOM 106 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Use This argumentless function returns the number of columns for the present output device PAGE Use This argumentless function returns the current page number when output is being printed Page PAGE Page 23 the 23rd page of output String Functions DUP Fumar ses Parameters string is any string of characters or an expression yielding a string of characters n is a positive integer or a numeric expression This function returns a string of characters n
41. Export Tools use ASCII data exchange It is the oldest and most widely supported way of exchanging data between applications Data for a particular record or group of records can be transported in one of two standard formats Delimited e Fixed length To export data from a Fileman file use the Export Tool to create an ASCII data file containing exported records The exported data is formatted in such a way that it can be recognized by the particular foreign application The ASCII data file can then be imported into the foreign application To import data to a Fileman file use your foreign application to generate an ASCII data file containing records in either delimited or fixed length formats Then use the Import Tool to load those records into the Fileman file you specify Dependency on Correct Data Communication For import or export of data to succeed the data must be passed correctly on all communication pathways between Fileman and the foreign application A glitch in the communication of data can cause data exchange to fail 190 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual For example suppose the foreign application expects the fields in records you are exporting to be separated or delimited by the Tab character TAB The Export Tool can output a TAB between each field s data value However if you use a communication program s screen capture facility to create a file of the e
42. SHALL ADDING A NEW FILE ENTRY LAYGO BE ALLPOWED NO WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Enter the name of the person who entered this 152 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual order XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With POINTER TO A FILE type fields Fileman asks you to enter the pointed to file name in the popup window The file that is pointed to in this case the NEW PERSON file 200 must already exist on your system If you enter a single question mark at this prompt you will be presented with a list of the available files from which you can choose By answering NO to the LAYGO question you insure that users who are editing the WHO ENTERED data are not able to add a new entry on the fly to the NEW PERSON file VARIABLE POINTER Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the ITEM ORDERED field 7 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of VARIABLE POINTER Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD ITEM ORDERED Yo
43. Suppose for example that you want to use Microsoft Word s Print Merge utility to print a form letter to a list of recipients that is maintained in a Fileman file You can use Fileman s Export Tool to export the list of recipients from the Fileman file to Microsoft Word Once you have done this you can use Word to generate your form letters based on the exported list What Applications Can You Exchange Data With In theory you can exchange data with any application that supports delimited or fixed length ASCII data exchange Many applications do using a variety of formats Typically you can expect the ability to import and export data with the following types of applications Databases Spreadsheets Statistical and Analysis Programs SAS SPSS etc Vertical Applications Word Processor data records not word processing text W NOTE You can export data records to a word processor which often uses data records for functions such as print merges You cannot use the March 2013 189 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Import or Export Tools to exchange word processing fields from Fileman files however How Data is Moved between Applications Movement of data between applications that do not speak the same language is a complex process because it involves coordinating activities in different computer applications and often in multiple computing environments Fileman s Import and
44. User Manual First choose the file to display information about you can use either its file number or name When you select the file you have the option of requesting a range of files If you select a range of files the file number of the go to file must be higher than the file number of the start with file If you are prompted Select SUB FILE this indicates that the file you are working with has Subfiles If you want information only about a Subfile specify the Subfile at this prompt If you do not choose a Subfile your listing usually will include information about all fields in the file including those in all Subfiles Next choose a format for the listing Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD ANSWER WITH LISTING FORMAT NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM 1 STANDARD 2 BRIEF 3 CUSTOM TAILORED 4 MODIFIED STANDARD 5 TEMPLATES ONLY 6 GLOBAL MAP 7 CONDENSED 8 INDEXES AND CROSS REFERENCES ONLY 9 KEYS ONLY Brief Data Dictionary When you choose Brief as the data dictionary format a brief listing will be produced the Brief format is more readable but less complete than the default of a Standard listing Next you are asked for a destination for the listing s output at the DEVICE prompt You can specify any valid printer or press the Enter key to send output to your screen as illustrated below Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD BRIEF ALPHABETICALLY BY LABEL NO Enter DEVICE Enter Ma
45. a WORD PROCESSING type field For example the PATIENT file contains the AGE AT ONSET subfield in the DIAGNOSIS Multiple If you create a regular cross reference for a field in a Multiple you can choose in what context the cross reference will be used You might want to cross reference the whole file by AGE AT ONSET so that a report sorted by AGE AT ONSET could be produced efficiently Alternately you might want to cross reference only an individual patient s 162 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual diagnoses by onset age so that a lookup of diagnosis could be done using AGE AT ONSET Types of Traditional Cross references Cross Description reference REGULAR The field value is sorted and stored in the cross reference The regular cross reference is used for sorting If you wish it will be used when looking up entries also The cross reference that is automatically created on the NAME field 4 01 field when a file is created is a regular cross reference this is the B cross reference punctuation marks except quotation marks e g KING LEAR KING LEAR etc will be found with LEAR A list of punctuation marks is presented for your selection MNEMONIC The field s values are cross referenced along with the NAME 01 field cross reference so that for example the MAIDEN NAME field s values are found along with NAME values in any lookup Typically the cross reference on the N
46. a new MOZART WORK No YES KOECHEL NUMBER 525 More importantly with a 001 field defined an entry in the file can always be looked up by the Internal Entry Number IEN irrespective of any other cross referencing that exists for the file Thus Select MOZART WORK 525 Enter EINE KLEINE NACHTMUSIK Record Numbers must always be positive and canonic that is they cannot contain alpha suffixes leading zeros or trailing fractional zeros Forced Lookups Using Numbers Number meaningful lookups can be forced by prefixing the numeric input with the accent grave If 55 FMPATIENT s Internal Entry Number in the PATIENT file is 355 he could be identified as follows Select PATIENT NAME 355 Enter FMPATIENT 5 Incidentally the 001 field example above illustrates how using the Modify File Attributes option can force a field to have a particular number 001 in this case It is done just by entering the new Number first and then the new Label Changing and Deleting Fields Changing Field Attributes After creating a field in a file you can return to change or delete the field within the Modify File Attributes option simply by entering the field name or number when asked Select FIELD 138 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual When you return to the field in this option you are able to change a field s Label Name T
47. a point at which subordinate items of data originate An M array element is characterized by a name and a unique subscript Thus the terms node array element and subscripted variable are synonymous In a global array each node might have specific fields or pieces reserved for data attributes such as name A number with either leading zeros or trailing zeros after a decimal point M treats non canonic numbers as text instead of as numbers A value other than null A space and zero are non null values Empty A field or variable that has no value associated with it is null When replying to a prompt pressing only the Enter key abbreviated as Enter to enter nothing An expression whose value is a number Compare to string expression March 2013 Glossary NUMERIC FIELD OPERATOR OPTION OPTION NAME PACKAGE SOFTWARE PATTERN MATCH POINTER TO A FILE March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Response that is limited to a restricted number of digits It can be dollar valued or a decimal figure of specified precision One of the processes done to the elements in an expression to create a value A computing activity that you can select usually a choice from a menu Name field in the OPTION file e g XUMAINT for the option that has the menu text Menu Management Options are namespaced according to VISTA conventions monitored by the DBA The set of programs files documentation
48. be entered and stored as nine digits but you may want it to always be displayed with punctuating hyphens The Output Transform option allows you to make this kind of specification by associating with any field a computed expression that operates on the value of that field REF For details about using M code in an OUTPUT transform see the OUTPUT Transform topic in the Advanced File Definition chapters in the Developer Tools section in the Fileman Programmer Manual In the dialogue that follows you ll encounter the responses that you would enter if you want your SSN field to always appear with inserted dashes Select OPTION UTILITIES Select UTILITY OPTION OUTPUT TRANSFORM MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD SSN SSN OUTPUT TRANSFORM E SSN 1 3 S E SSN 4 5 SE SSN 6 9 A Remember the following March 2013 181 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities The transform does rot apply when you are inputting data thus do not enter the dashes when using the Enter or Edit File Entries option To retrieve the internal stored value of a field that has an OUTPUT transform you can refer to the INTERNAL SSN function The internal form of the date is automatically invoked when you are sorting by a DATE TIME valued field Uneditable Data The Uneditable Data option allows you to specify that a field s data value cannot be edited or deleted by a user This restriction can be applied
49. cause an Answerback Message to be returned by your terminal instead of the ASCII value 5 being inserted between field values o NOTE The importing application will find the delimiting character if it occurs in the data This will cause an incorrect determination of the boundary between fields For example if a comma is the field delimiter and the data for a field was FMPATIENT 10 the importing application would put FMPATIENT into the first field and 10 into the second field You can avoid this problem by specifying that data in non numeric fields be surrounded by quotes e g FMPATIENT 10 Most importing applications will ignore delimiters if they occur within a quoted string See the discussion of Quote Non numeric Fields below SEND LAST FIELD DELIMITER Some importing applications expect a field delimiter following every field including the final field in a record Other applications only expect delimiters between fields nothing follows the final field This field allows 218 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual you to specify whether or not a field delimiter should be exported after the last field A YES answer sends the delimiter a NO answer does not The contents of this field does not affect whether or not a delimiter is sent after each record RECORD DELIMITER Applications that import delimited fields need to know when one record ends and a new one begins In most cas
50. code The code entered into this kind of field is verified to be valid M code that conforms to VA programming standards MUMPS valued fields are usually used in files that are part of developer tools systems For example the OPTION file 19 is part of the MENU MANAGEMENT system used in the VA for assigning menus and associated actions to each computer user The ENTRY ACTION field on the OPTION file 19 is defined as a MUMPS type field This field allows a developer who is creating an option to enter M code to do any setup and initialization that is needed before the end user can do the action allowed by the option Multiple Valued Field Multiples When you create a DATA TYPE field value of any of the following DATE TIME NUMERIC SET OF CODES FREE TEXT POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER After entering type specific information you are asked the following WILL FIELD BE MULTIPLE NO Answering YES to this prompt means that There can be more than one occurrence of a data value for this field in the entry e g more than one DIAGNOSIS in a PATIENT file entry Subfields can later be associated with this field e g each DIAGNOSIS could have a DATE OF ONSET e The MULTIPLE prompt is not asked for DATA TYPE field values of March 2013 135 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields WORD PROCESSING since by definition such types take Multiline values Two special qu
51. data dictionary Any data dictionary changes may invalidate the archived data NO or null There are no restrictions on the file If you need to update an archive file s data dictionary you must convert the old data to the new data dictionary format Updates to an archive file will be allowed only through the extract option Update Destination File option or through the programmer entry point EXTRACT DIAXU REF For more information on the Extract Tool API EXTRACT DIAXU see the Fileman Programmer Manual Only Regular KWIC and Soundex type cross references are recommended for archive files No other types of cross references should be created If you are building a destination file that will store archived data set the 250 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual ARCHIVE FILE flag to YES do this with the Modify Destination File option Setting the ARCHIVE FILE flag to YES prevents users from modifying or deleting the data in the file or the file s data dictionary while using Fileman options or programmer calls Users are also prevented from deleting file entries while using Fileman options or programmer calls Mapping Information Mapping information identifies the relationship between the data in the source file and the data in the destination file When you create your EXTRACT template you will enter the name of the field in the source file and identify its intended location in the d
52. data to permanent storage The FILEGRAM type template used to transport an archive activity can be created during the archiving session in the Archiving menu options or an existing FILEGRAM type template created using the Filegram options can be used Considerations Before Archiving The following summarizes some of the important items to note regarding the archiving facility Consider them before you begin archiving Westrongly encourage you to have a current backup of your files before archiving March 2013 279 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving 280 Archiving is not user specific In other words archiving is attached to a file not a user For your own protection please be aware that someone other than yourself can complete or change an existing archiving activity Data from logical and physical files can be archived but only the data from the physical primary file can be purged removed Fileman must be able to collect and print the data using the search criteria before you can create an archiving activity That is the Select Entries to Archive option must be run to completion such that the selected entries are printed and can thus be stored in the DIBT SORT TEMPLATE global If you plan to keep a hard copy of the printed entries for future reference design your PRINT template to facilitate review You do not need to print all of the fields values that will be archived but you may want to in
53. e g a printer the data will be forever irretrievable Depending on what devices are selected and whether queueing was requested for either device different warnings will be issued informing the user of either steps he need to take or steps that the program will take as a result of the queueing request Here is an example of an archive activity report ARCHIVE ACTIVITY REPORT AUG 30 1992 PAGE 1 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 ARCHIVE DEVICE LABEL INFORMATION ISC6V3 MUA0O ARCHIVE 083092 3 PRIMARY ARCHIVED FILE CHANGE 16000 ARCHIVER FMEMPLOYEE J SEARCH CRITERIA 01 LESS THAN 900 INDEX INFORMATION NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 PLEASE KEEP THIS FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Purge Stored Entries Before running the Purge Stored Entries option use the Find Archived Entries option to verify that the archive medium contains the complete archived data for an archiving activity by searching for the last record listed on the index March 2013 291 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving This option is used to remove archived data from both the archived file our example is the CHANGE file and the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file A brief history of who performed the various archiving steps and when is saved in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file If you select an archiving activity for purging that has not been sent t
54. eeh C 209 DPCP Lis M 208 DIG eaaet tete Niue nan tee mM 208 cp M 210 Ste pA e 212 V Prelate Pesca peo fente hs oder tis d beatis ir oe ed negantes 209 INDEX EI Asp eun otio edi eee Mosi lebe Deeds atat s 168 170 172 ITV ONES cenit Secs Eeer 23 INPUT Hen EE Brotchine eege 297 INPUT Ae endet mati be dee tb Seen 65 66 67 167 297 INPUT ue EE SA 177 Inquire to File Entries Option 233 234 252 253 255 271 283 294 301 Install Verity Filegram TEE 269 276 Internal Entry CEET 137 138 Jom Extended Ee March 2013 331 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Index Relational Navicat Onedin EE 63 Ee Ee oerte end kn ia ike nte ddr Gane ER Pit Pus had 64 SEET eent 204 Key Definitions osre Ou AO e EAD AN SP eerta eds Create aKey seater 184 TNC dri c 186 Edita EE 185 Venty Hl EROR 187 CM E E EE 187 E GE EE EE 169 EE eege 163 LANGUAGE EE 17 I Suc RM rug NETS 131 Line Editor s Transfer Optionen tet vastes ctas bloc ie hsec i ME Tani 65 List Pile Attributes ene cote eim vn tatit a eor d eae drain 32 Brick Data DiClondfy siio et ege 33 Check Fix DEEG EE 49 Condensed Data Dictionary ooo a pep ene aen eontra ener 35 Custom Tailored Data Dictionaries sies deed eer 42 Glopa E den nati eae stu peu uie cie dedere aie ame 45 Indexes and Cross References Only accetta e ec 46 Key S ON Dm 47 Map Pointe
55. exit the form Fileman will prompt you for a name for the Uniqueness Index and then create the index automatically for you I m going to create a new Uniqueness Index to support Key A of File 716026 Index Name C Enter One moment please Building new index DONE Press RETURN to continue Alternatively you can leave the information in the KEY FIELDS section blank and select an existing Uniqueness Index When you exit the form Fileman checks that the information in the KEY FIELDS section is consistent with the selected Uniqueness Index If there is a conflict you are asked for a method to resolve the conflict In this case select Option 2 Make Key match Uniqueness Index as shown below The Key fields and the fields in the Uniqueness Index don t match Select one of the following 1 Re Edit the Key 2 Make Key match Uniqueness Index also selected on up arrow Enter response 2 Enter Make Key match Uniqueness Index also selected on up arrow March 2013 185 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities Modifying fields in Key DONE Edit a Key To edit a key identify the file or subfile you wish to edit Fileman will display the cross references on the file and offer you the choices of Edit Delete or Create Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILITY OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT Enter Select Subfil
56. export if you want Because there is a Multiple involved you are told that you will not have the opportunity to sort Then you are given the opportunity to search the file for entries to export Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION EXPORT DATA OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter Choose an EXPORT template PATIENT TO 123 Enter Do you want to delete the PATIENT TO 123 template after the data export is complete Enter Yes or No NO Enter Since you are exporting fields from multiples a sort will be done automatically You will not have the opportunity to sort the data before export Do you want to SEARCH for entries to be exported NO YES A SEARCH FOR PATIENT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH A CONDITION lt Enter LESS THAN 202 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual A LESS THAN DATE 1980 Enter B SEARCH FOR PATIENT FIELD Enter IF A Enter DATE OF BIRTH LESS THAN 1980 STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE Enter If Multiples had not been involved you would now be able to respond to the SORT BY dialogue You can do the same things with sort here that you can do when using the Print File Entries option What Device to Send Export Data To After you complete the sort dialogue you are immediately given the DEVICE prompt Choose what device the exported data should be sent to DEVICE Enter
57. field a v VARIABLE POINTER points to the PERSON and PROVIDER files If the target file points to a file that is not in the account the map shows NONEXISTENT FILE e REF For a more elaborate example of a pointer map see the Pointer Map section in the Fileman Technical Manual Check Fix DD Structure Option In order to ensure that the internal structure of your files and subfiles is consistent use the Check Fix DD Structure option from the Data Dictionary Utilities submenu You must have READ access to the files being analyzed In addition you need DD access for this option to correct erroneous nodes March 2013 49 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities This utility looks at a file s identifiers cross references POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER and COMPUTED fields If there are inconsistencies or conflicts between the information in the data dictionary and the structure of the file s global nodes the Check Fix DD Structure option will note them If you want the Check Fix DD Structure option will correct inconsistencies found in the data dictionary The process will not change any file structures it only removes or corrects unnecessary or incorrect DD nodes Data is not affected The dialogue for running this option is simple You specify the file or files you want to check and indicate whether you want to delete incorrect nodes Then the progress of the checking
58. global arrays The term global may refer either to a global variable or a global array A special variable is defined by systems operations e g TEST Veterans Health Administration Veterans Integrated Service Network Veterans Administration Personal Identifier 323 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Index Index PROBES cio MD mn 174 LOREM rob bad Dese ub EE CIOSSSEGTO PO TI OS a scotch ve pce eva e ibt Neid rta deer 167 Add Delete Selected Entries Option 255 256 263 281 283 Advanced Edit Techi gues EE 295 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY File 248 252 253 255 256 264 265 278 279 280 282 286 288 290 291 294 ARCHIVE E E File Level le EE 249 258 jr e 250 258 EE 278 Add Delete Selected Entries Option 283 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY File rte dere 294 Atchivitie POSES Sy ege neu erer Greechen 280 Cancel Archival Selection Option eere 291 Considerations Before Archiving eee tetetetetetntatatetes 278 Create Filegram Archiving Template Option sss 285 Find Archived Entries OpEHOER eie nomen e ennt er een bte tee 292 Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage Option 288 Print Selected Entries ODDO eie aao etr ege dnte rere 284 Purse Stored Entries Ee 290 Select Friebel 280 Write Entries to Temporary Storage Option see eed 286 AXChivibe MEDI que eegen 278 280 285 294 EE 190 203 204 208 Backward Extended Dontersg 61 196 252
59. help prompts and installation procedures required for a given application e g Laboratory Pharmacy and PIMS A VISTA software environment is composed of elements specified via the PACKAGE file 49 4 Elements include files associated templates namespaced routines and namespaced file entries from the OPTION HELP FRAME BULLETIN and FUNCTION files As public domain software VISTA software can be requested through the Freedom of Information Act FOIA In M an operator that compares the contents of a variable or literal to a specified pattern of characters or kinds of characters A DATA TYPE field value that contains an explicit reference to an entry in a file POINTER TO A FILE type fields are used to relate files to each other 317 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Glossary PREFERRED EDITOR PRIMARY KEY PRINT TEMPLATE PRIVATE INTEGRATION AGREEMENT PROGRAMMER ACCESS RECORD NUMBER RELATIONAL NAVIGATION 318 The editor always entered when you access a WORD PROCESSING type field your default editor Kernel must be present to establish a Preferred Editor A Data Base Management System construct where one or more fields uniquely define a record entry in a file table The fields are required to be populated for every record on the file and are unique in combination for every record on the file The stored specifications of a printed report including fields to be printed and formattin
60. in Step 2 and the EXPORT template created in Step 3 These templates are variations on standard PRINT templates They are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 and are sometimes referred to as PRINT March 2013 207 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools templates in the user dialogue Although similar to PRINT templates they do differ in important respects For example you cannot compile either of the Export Tool s templates You can delete these templates as soon as they are used if you wish Also both kinds of templates can be deleted using the Template Edit option on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY In addition you can delete an EXPORT FIELDS template by choosing the template within the Select Fields for Export option editing it and putting an at sign at the NAME prompt Do not delete an EXPORT template before a queued export has been completed How to Import Data The following menu shows the option used to import data Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Import Data DDMP IMPORT The Import Tool lets you import records stored in an ASCII data file into a Fileman file The Import Tool imports records from an ASCII data file by adding them as new records to the Fileman file in question Existing records in the destination Fileman file are never edited or updated and the Import Tool does not prevent duplicate records from being added Importing d
61. in a Subfile at least one field from every Multiple level above the Subfile must also be extracted If you do not specify a field to extract at a higher level the 01 field at that level will automatically be extracted If you are extracting a Backward Extended Pointer type field create the corresponding field in the destination file as a Multiple The Extract Tool resolves Backward Pointers Thus their values are moved to Multiples in the destination file If the field you are extracting has an OUTPUT transform make sure the INPUT transform of the destination field can receive the data in the format generated by the OUTPUT transform ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY File To learn about the status of an extract activity you can enter a question mark at most of the prompts in the Extract Tool options Using the Inquire to File Entries option on the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 21 11 will yield information about past or pending activities Those activities created by the Extract Tool are referred to as extract activities The amount of information displayed depends on the status of the extract activity The ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains the following information March 2013 The DUZ of the individual performing the extract activity The status of the extract activity e g EDITED or UPDATED The dates on which the activities were performed The number of entries extracted 253 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool Thesourc
62. is discussed throughout this chapter Several types of pointer relationships between files can be exploited to combine information 54 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Simple Extended Pointer most common Backward Extended Pointer Join Extended Pointer A special form of relational navigation called relational jumping uses these pointer relationships to let you jump from one file to another This makes it easier to specify a group of fields from another file when specifying what fields to edit search print or sort by in interactive Fileman Simple Extended Pointer The most common form of relational navigation uses simple extended pointers This type of navigation requires a pointer field to exist from the current file to another file Using a pointer field from an entry in the current file you can easily retrieve information from the pointed to entry in another file For example suppose you are printing a report from the PATIENT file 2 Further suppose that the PATIENT file has a pointer field called ATTENDING PHYSICIAN field to the DOCTOR file Now what if you wanted to include the phone number of the attending physician for each patient in your report from the PATIENT file The attending physician s phone number is stored in the DOCTOR file not the PATIENT file You can include the attending physician s phone number for each patient in your report by using a s
63. know this patient s Social 2 gt Security Number enter 000000000 to indicate the number is 3 gt unknown EDIT Option lt Enter gt TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 1 Enter The DESCRIPTION and TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION attributes document the use and meaning of the field The information in DESCRIPTION is shown to the user when two question marks are entered at the EDIT Option prompt When initially creating a field you are prompted for the DESCRIPTION field after the HELP PROMPT The TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION is displayed only when the data dictionary is printed NOTE Versions of Fileman prior to Version 21 0 allowed you to also enter a Help Frame for field documentation that attribute is no longer supported DATA TYPE OF SSN FREE TEXT lt Enter gt MINIMUM LENGTH 9 lt Enter gt MAXIMUM LENGTH 9 lt Enter gt OPTIONAL PATTERN MATCH IN X X 9N lt Enter gt IS SSN ENTRY MANDATORY Y N Y lt Enter gt HELP PROMPT ANSWER MUST BE 9 CHARACTERS IN LENGTH Replace With Enter 9 numbers without dashes e g 666456789 Replace lt Enter gt Enter 9 numbers without dashes e g 666456789 To illustrate the use of GROUPs add the NAME DATE OF BIRTH and SEX fields into the DEMOG group Select FIELD NAME 140 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual LABEL NAME GROUP Select GROUP DEMOG DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter TECHNICA
64. merge entries in the same file it is specifically designed for that task You must have READ access for the file you are transferring from and 232 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual WRITE access for the file you are transferring to If you are deleting entries after the transfer you need delete access as well Transferring Data Within the Same File You can use the Transfer File Entries option to merge two entries that are in the same file To do this 1 Identify the input and output file as the same 2 Identify the two entries Data values are then transferred from the FROM entry to the TO entry The following example shows the simple dialogue Select OPTION TRANSFER ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION ANSWER WITH TRANSFER OPTION NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM 1 TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES 2 COMPARE MERGE FILE ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION 1 Enter TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT TRANSFER FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT TRANSFER DATA INTO WHICH PATIENT RECIPIENT ROGER TRANSFER DATA FROM PATIENT FMUSER FIVE WANT TO DELETE THIS ENTRY AFTER IT S BEEN TRANSFERRED NO If the TO entry Roger Recipient in our example already has a value on file for a given field that value will be preserved i e it will not be overwritten by the corresponding field value in the FROM entry This rule applies to word processing data fields also If the recipient
65. name of the field you entered After answering YES to this prompt you are now ready to specify what sort of 120 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual data the new field will contain A field can only be one type of data the choices are listed in the following section Field Data Types There are nine data types DATE TIME Dates with or without time stamps 2 NUMERIC DATA TYPE fields of NUMERIC including dollar values 3 SET OF CODES Codes that represent values e g 12MALE 2 FEMALE 4 FREE TEXT A single alphanumeric string of characters WORD PROCESSING A Multiline document of text 6 COMPUTED A virtual field values not stored POINTER TO AFILE Referencing an entry in some other file i VARIABLE POINTER Referencing an entry in a defined set of files 9 MUMPS Used by programmers to enter M code You are asked for the DATA TYPE field value for any field you are creating You must pick one of these nine choices Data validation checks are then asked depending on the DATA TYPE field value entered For some data types a default HELP prompt is automatically composed eo NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For examples of entering a field attributes in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section March 2013 121 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual
66. oOo o o o Produces a Count Histogram Produces a Sum Histogram Produces Count Sum and Mean Histograms Produces Count Sum and Mean Histograms Here is an example of a using a subtotal in a print and then producing a Count Histogram Select Fileman Option PRINT File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SIGN ON LOG SORT BY DATE TIME NODE NAW num START WITH NODE NAME FIRST Enter Subtotal on a field in WITHIN NODE NAME SORT BY Enter the sort FIRST PRINT FIELD DATE TIME THEN PRINT FIELD NOD THEN PRINT FIELD Enter el Use the print qualifier so you can create a Count Histogram on the NODE NAME field Heading S C SIGN ON LOG STATISTICS Replace Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter HMMM JUST A MOMENT PLEASE March 2013 15 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 2 Statistics j Output is generated here Select Fileman Option OTHER Options Filegrams Audit Menu Screenman Statistics Fileman Management Data Export to Foreign Format Extract Data To Fileman File Import Data Browser Select Other Options Option STATistics Select STATISTICAL ROUTINE HISTOGRAM DEVICE HOME Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter COUNT NODE NAME BY NODE NAME ISC6A1 ockckckckckckck ck kc kckok ISC6A2 Wekckckckckckckckckckckck ck ckck kk ISC6A3 kkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
67. operator is not given precedence over another Use parentheses to control the order in which the operations of a computed expression are performed Expressions within parentheses are evaluated first Thus 3 4 2 is 3 5 whereas 3 4 2 is 5 You can also use parentheses to ensure that the enclosed material is treated as an expression when there might be some ambiguity For example suppose you want to force a numeric interpretation of the SSN field You need to use the unary operator However the following will not yield the desired result SORT BY SSN Is the the unary operator or the sort specifier meaning that you want to subtotal results by SSN In this case it will be interpreted as the sort specifier However if you put the expression in parentheses the will definitely be interpreted as an operator SORT BY SSN Example of Compound Expression The following is an example of a computed expression containing several elements and operators Beds occupied NUMBER OF BEDS OCCUPANCY PERCENTAGE 100 First the part within the parentheses is evaluated NUMBER OF BEDS and OCCUPANCY PERCENTAGE are field names Their contents are March 2013 73 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions multiplied and the result is divided by 100 That result is concatenated with the literal string Beds occupied giving a result like Beds occupied 484 D
68. option for an archiving activity with any status except PURGED The example below illustrates the regular print format Select ARCHIVE OPTION PRINT Enter SELECTED ENTRIES Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMPATIENT 2 ARCHIVING Enter regular Print Template name or fields you wish to see printed on this report of entries to be archived FIRST PRINT FIELD ZZTEST TEMPLATE March 2013 285 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving CHANGE ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 11 09 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 Shown below is an example of a Filegram format produced by naming a FILEGRAM type template to print only a single entry is shown FIRST PRINT FIELD ZZTESTFILEGRAM CHANGE ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 11 09 PAGE 1 NO 330 DAT CHANGE 16000 N CHANGE 16000 L 2330 BEGIN CHANGE 1600081 SPECIFIER VERSION 1 17 09 IDENTIFIER PROGRAMMER 7 FMPROGRAMMER 30 END CHANGE 16000 NO 01 330 VERSION 1 17 09 SEND DAT Create Filegram Archiving Template The Create Filegram Archiving Template option creates a FILEGRAM type template which is the template used in the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option A filegram is the tool used for extracting and transporting archived data to temporary storage Li REF For furthe
69. printed is too short to accommodate the line of text your printer may break the line in the middle of words or otherwise destroy the formatting of the text NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of WORD PROCESSING in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section COMPUTED Data Type When a DATA TYPE field is defined as COMPUTED its value is determined at the time the field is accessed This computation is based on an expression stored in the data dictionary The field value or data itself is not stored in the data dictionary The COMPUTED expression is constructed using field names literals or constants functions and operators o REF For a complete explanation of these elements see the Computed Expressions section March 2013 129 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields W NOTE The functions referred to above are Fileman functions stored in the FUNCTION file 4 5 not M functions A developer with programmer access can also enter M code in a COMPUTED field The M code must set the variable X to the COMPUTED field value For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as COMPUTED you are asked the following questions Select FIELD AGE Are you adding AGE as a new FIELD No X DATA TYPE OF AGE COMPUTED COMPU
70. record number in this supplementary file is derived from the 01 field so that it matches the record number in the PATIENT file To do this to use the 01 field to calculate the record number file designers use a special variable called DINUM When programmers create a file and use DINUM to calculate the record number they call it DINUMming and say that the record number has been DINUMmed If a file has a DINUMmed 01 field Fileman will not let you change or delete its value even if you have write or delete access to the file The reason for this is that in this type of file the value of the 01 field is linked to the record number Messing with one means messing with the other and Fileman doesn t want people messing around with record numbers Pointers and Variable Pointers You know what pointers and variable pointers are And by this time you probably have a pretty good idea that pointers and variable pointers are more than just data types They are links that establish relationships between files between records among all the data in Fileman s database Pointers and variable pointers are the things that make Fileman a database rather than just a big blob of information More than that pointers and variable pointers create pathways which you can use to navigate through files You ll learn more about this in chapter 5 28 March 2013 Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Pointers
71. ree tek 59 Backward Extended POPBIGE eege ee 60 lee Extended Ee EE 63 Ee Et Ten en 64 PATI c 64 Multiine Return Values a neces testet qt hotel re 64 WORD PROCESSING Field ce etteeeecoadr aot degen 65 IVETE NGS ai oa eir Pad shennan innate heat eats eng ubee i 65 Backward POM tensed P 66 Computed field with Multiple Pointer return fype eee 68 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions eene tenant onte tnt tonus 70 Eeer 70 Elements of Computed Bvptesetong sese 70 Operators in Computed e 71 Example of Compound Re 73 Data Types in Computed Bvpresgtong see 74 Using Functions as Elements in Computed Expressions 75 Where EE 76 Using Computed Expressions in COMPUTED Fields 76 Where to Use Computed Expressions On the Fly 81 Chapter 7 Fleman rette teen 86 How to Use Fileman Fanctions ea cupiebat Spon Dor ana 86 Documentation Conventions for Fileman Functions 87 Filema n ee e 87 Date Time DER EE 90 Environmental Funchonsg eese eene eene esent sa stress annis 96 File and File Data ee E CN 98 Mathematica FUNCIONS sc enne e 104 Printing Related PUOHOBS eee te trtotGs iter tente een 106 OEPIN OP UNICHOD Sains tna esie tnn EE 107 Temporary Data Storage Functong sse 110 NE Related P tic otis eee o eio dale a eure ad 112 Lets Make Some EE 119 Chapter 8 Creatine Files and Fields iu Aere ee 119 Ee 119 Nami
72. supported for general use by all VISTA applications The second category is Controlled Subscription API These are callable routines for which you must obtain an Integration Agreement IA formerly referred to as a DBIA to use The third category is Private API where only a single application is granted permission to use an attribute function of another VISTA package These IAs are granted for special cases transitional problems between versions and release coordination An arrangement of elements in one or more dimensions An M array is a set of nodes referenced by subscripts that share the same variable name A Fileman security Access Code that gives the user programmer level access to files and to Fileman s developer features See Programmer Access Also the character i e at sign is used at Fileman field prompts to delete data The record or log of an ongoing audit The monitoring and recording of computer use A pointer to your current file from another file used in the extended pointer syntax 309 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual BOOLEAN EXPRESSION CALLABLE ENTRY POINT CANONIC NUMBER CAPTION CHECKSUM COMMAND AREA CONTROLLED SUBSCRIPTION INTEGRATION AGREEMENT 310 Glossary A logical comparison between values yielding a true or false result In M zero means false and non zero often one means true An authorized programmer call that may be used in any VISTA applicati
73. than FUNCTION NAME FIELD NAME 86 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Documentation Conventions for Fileman Functions While studying this chapter s functions syntax and examples you will encounter the following conventions Convention Description In the format arguments Indicates mandatory quotation marks W NOTE If you enter a literal string as an argument quotation marks are also necessary In examples Indicates the output of the function In examples Indicates information about the outcome of the function gt boldface type Indicates specific reference to an argument FUNCTION argument is the general format You must enter the function s name in uppercase the case of the arguments depends on the circumstances Arguments are always surrounded by parentheses Fileman Functions o REF For a description of each function see the Fileman Functions chapter in the HTML version of the Fileman Advanced Programmer Manual located on the Fileman Home Page at http VISTA med va gov fileman index as March 2013 87 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Date Time Environmental File and File Data 88 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions BETWEEN DATE DAYOFWEEK MID MINUTES MONTH MONTHNAME NOON NOW NUMDATE NUMDATE4 NUMDAY NUMMONTH NUMYEAR NUMYEAR4 RANGEDATE TIME TODAY YEAR BREAKABLE CLOSE SITENUMBER USER COUNT DUPLICATED FILE I
74. the characteristics of the fields constitute an entry in the DD Let s take a closer look at fields and how they are defined Field Characteristics A file can have many fields The DD entry for the file lists these fields along with their attributes These attributes include the field name the data type the field number and a field description All fields should have descriptions there is a designated place for them but not all of them do In addition to the normal attributes certain fields can be given special designations in the data dictionary In this section we discuss the 01 field identifiers required fields required identifiers indexes and keys You already know that the 01 field in a file is the most important field in the file as designated by the person who created the file When you create a file and you ll be doing this later in the manual immediately after you name your new file Fileman creates a 01 field for the file and calls it name The person who created the file can go in and change the name of the 01 field to something else but they all start out as name 2 March 2013 Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual And when you think about it a lot of the files you work with have a 01 field that is called name This is partly laziness on the part of the file designers just accepting the default but it is mostly because for much of the inform
75. the file It can be a single field a key field or several fields considered together a compound key A file can even have more than one key although if it does one key is designated as the primary key Eventually just about all Fileman files should have keys At the moment only some of them do because keys are relatively new March 2013 23 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure How relatively Well keys were first introduced to Fileman in 1999 And if that seems like a long time ago remember that most of the files you use have been around for much longer than that The first Fileman files were created in the 1970s and some of them are still in use today They do eventually need to have keys but performing this refit will take some time Internal and External It is worth noting that when Fileman shows you a value in a field the value you see is not necessarily the value that Fileman has stored for the field In many cases the internal value what Fileman stores is different from the external value what Fileman shows you For example all date time values are stored in Fileman as a single number When you enter a date Fileman converts it into a number and stores it that way When you look at the information Fileman converts it from a number back into a date and shows it to you in the format you are expecting to see When using some of Fileman s advanced features it often makes a differ
76. the update of your destination file If you wish to extract data without purging the source entries cancel the extract activity to unlock the selected entries in the source file You will encounter the following dialogue while canceling an extract activity Select EXTRACT OPTION CANCEL EXTRACT SELECTION Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY CHANGE Enter 3 CHANGE 08 31 92 UPDATED DESTINATION FILE SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Are you sure you want to CANCEL this EXTRACT ACTIVITY NO Enter YES to stop this activity and start again from the beginning Are you sure you want to CANCEL this EXTRACT ACTIVITY NO YES This extract activity has already updated the destination file Delete the destination file entries created by this extract activity NO Enter YES to rollback the destination file to its state before the update Delete the destination file entries created by this extract activity NO Enter gt gt gt DONE lt lt lt 266 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual If you wish to cancel an extract selection so that you can start over enter YES at the Delete the destination file entries prompt Entering YES prevents you from sending a duplicate set of entries to the destination file It on the other hand you simply want to cancel the extract selection pressing the Enter key at the prompt unlocks the source entries and retains the destination file entries Va
77. then perform the export First choose which entries to export with a SEARCH dialogue then choose the order of the exported entries with a SORT BY dialogue you are not given the SORT BY dialogue if you are exporting fields from Subfiles Finally specify the device to send the exported data to During either the Search or Sort process you can use previously created SEARCH and SORT templates Those templates need not have been originally made during a data export however SORT templates that contain unacceptable qualifiers should not be used At the SORT BY prompt you can only use the following subset of sort qualifiers To not sort Used when you want to use the FROM TO dialogue to restrict the entries to be exported E To sort in reverse order March 2013 201 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools To sort on the first n characters only To sort following strict ASCII sorting sequence WR REF For more detailed information about searching and sorting see the Print How to Print Reports from Files and Search chapters in the Fileman User Manual Export Example Here is an example of an export using the PATIENT TO 123 EXPORT template created in the previous section You begin by identifying the file and the EXPORT template that you want to use for the export Do not enclose the template s name with brackets Again you can delete the EXPORT template after a successful
78. to add or delete Here is an example in which an entry is being added to the archiving activity Select ARCHIVE OPTION ADD DELETE lt Enter gt SELECTED ENTRIES Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY ANSWER WITH ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY ARCHIVE NUMBER OR FILE CHOOSE FROM 284 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual 1 Fileman CHANGE 08 05 89 ARCHIVED PERMANENT SELECTOR FMUSER FIVE ARCHIVING 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 SELECTED SELECTOR FMUSER SIX ARCHIVING Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Select CHANGE NO 330 NO 330 VERSION 17 09 PROGRAMMER FMPROGRAMMER 27 ROUTINE DIL2 DATE CHANGED OCT 24 1986 ADD this entry TO the ARCHIVAL SELECTION YES Enter If you enter two question marks at the prompt where you select the entry for addition or deletion a list of the file s entries is displayed Those that are already part of the archiving activity are identified by ON ARCHIVE LIST The ADD this entry TO the ARCHIVAL SELECTION YES question appears if you have selected an entry not already on the list for archiving A DELETE question appears if you have selected an entry already on the list Print Selected Entries The Print Selected Entries option displays each entry from a selected archiving activity in a regular print or a filegram format depending on the template you identify The archiving activity entries are printed on whatever device you indicate You can use this
79. to all data types including word processing fields If editing is attempted the field s value along with a No Editing message will be displayed If however the value is part of a subfield the deletion of the entire entry in the Multiple valued field will be allowed unless the 01 field of the Multiple itself is made uneditable You can also use this option to remove the uneditable restriction on a field Mandatory Required Field Check The Mandatory Required Field Check option checks that fields that are key fields or designated as required contain data It can check one a series or all required entries in a file If an entry lacks data in a required or key field a report like the following is furnished Required Field Check File 16026 ZZPATIENT PAGE 1 Entry DD Number Path Field 3 FMPATIENT 25 16026 SSN DIZ 16026 3 182 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual If all required and key fields contain data then the NO REQUIRED FIELD IS MISSING message is displayed You can store the results in a template Key Definition Using the Key Definition option Fileman allows you to define keys on a file or subfile A key is a group of fields that taken collectively uniquely identifies a record AII fields in a key must have values must not be null and those values taken together must be unique across all records in the file or subfile Fileman enforces KEY INTEGRITY whenever r
80. to be archived is contained in a Multiple field the entire entry must be archived 282 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual An example of the dialogue you may encounter follows Notice the sequence of search sort and print ARCHIVE FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE A SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD 01 Enter NO A CONDITION LESS THAN A LESS THAN 900 B SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD Enter IF A Enter NO LESS THAN 900 STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE ZZTEST TEMPLATE Are you adding ZZTEST TEMPLATE as a new SORT TEMPLATE No Y Enter Yes SORT BY VERSION START WITH VERSION FIRST Enter WITHIN VERSION SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD 01 Enter NO THEN PRINT FIELD VERSION THEN PRINT FIELD PROGRAMMER THEN PRINT FIELD Enter HEADING CHANGE ARCHIVE SEARCH Replace Enter DEVICE Enter CHANGE ARCHIVE SEARCH AUG 30 1992 10 59 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 3 MATCHES FOUND After using this option the status of your archiving activity is SELECTED The status of an archiving activity can be SELECTED EDITED ARCHIVED TEMPORARY ARCHIVED PERMANENT or PURGED You may identify a file at the ARCHIVE FROM WHAT FILE prompt and get the response that follows There is already an outstanding archiving activity March 2013 283 Fileman 22 2
81. uniquely identifies a particular record in a file This is all pretty basic Here s where it gets trippy Fileman files are themselves records in a file Wait what Yes this is one of those strange mind expanding concepts they were fond of back in the 1970s when Fileman was being developed The very first file in Fileman File 1 is a list of all the files in Fileman It is variously called File 1 the FILE file and the file of files Each file in Fileman then has an entry in the FILE file And the record 20 March 2013 Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual number of that entry is the file s file number For example the PATIENT file is File 2 its record number in the FILE file is 2 The record number of the NEW PERSON file is 200 And so on In general record numbers in a file are integers There probably isn t a patient number 3 57 in the PATIENT file for example The FILE file is an exception however Fileman s developers try to keep all the files associated with a particular package or area of VISTA together For example all files associated with the Laboratory package have numbers that are close to one another You can probably see where this is heading Programmers create files for a package and number them for example 25 26 and 27 but then they realize they need another file All of the integers close to 25 26 and 27 are already taken so they call the new file 25 1 or something simi
82. usefulness of this kind of default is a case where you are editing two fields that usually have the same value Suppose that for a set of patients you want to enter a NEXT OF KIN field followed by a BENEFICIARY field Once you have typed a patient s NEXT OF KIN you want to see that particular answer as the default value of BENEFICIARY March 2013 297 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques The process would look like this INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NEXT OF KIN THEN EDIT FIELD BENEFICIARY NEXT OF KIN DO YOU MEAN NEXT OF KIN AS A VARIABLE YES Enter THEN EDIT FIELD Enter Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 11 NEXT OF KIN MRS CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT BENEFICIARY MRS CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT Enter Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 14 NEXT OF KIN MR CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT BENEFICIARY MR CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT MISS CLOSERELATIVE 2 FMPATIENT Here Mrs Sarah FMPATIENT ends up as both the NEXT OF KIN and BENEFICIARY for 11 FMPATIENT while 14 FMPATIENT s NEXT OF KIN and BENEFICIARY are two distinct people A variable default value can be any computed expression such as LAST VISIT DATE 365 REF For more information on computed expressions see the Computed Expressions section WORD PROCESSING Field Stuffing The effect of stuffing values in a DATA TYPE field of WORD PROCESSING is similar to defaults for other fields the default val
83. value of X the value of X will not be reliable system variable returns the current Y coordinate row location of the cursor Like X its reliability depends on the controlling application 118 March 2013 Let s Make Some Files Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Let s Make Some Files Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Creating a File To create a new file use the Modify File Attributes option and enter the new file name from 3 to 45 characters in length when asked MODIFY WHAT FILE And respond with YES when asked Are you adding xxxxxxxx as a new FILE where xxxxxxxx represents the new file name Naming a New File File names should be chosen so that they can easily be distinguished from each other i WHAT FILE ENT CLINIC PATIENT TIP If different people are creating files it can be helpful to include their initials nicknames or other identifying phrases within the file name Q NOTE The name for your new file should not contain any arithmetic or string operators like or punctuation like a colon An internal number must be assigned to this new file You are prompted with the next available internal file number You can either simply press the Enter key a null response to accept that number or enter a number not already assigned to a file March 2013 119 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Your new file is now
84. window within the popup window The additional questions pertaining to the VARIABLE POINTER file you are currently entering will appear in this secondary popup window As you can see in this example the OPTION file s MESSAGE is associated with PROTOCOL Since its ORDER is one it is the first file searched The PREFIX MISC can also be used to refer to the OPTION file Just as with the WHO ENTERED POINTER TO A FILE field previously described users cannot add new options to the OPTION file on the fly when they are entering an ITEM ORDERED in the ORDER file because the SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY prompt is NO 154 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Creating a Multiple The following example illustrates creating a Multiple field For this example we will simulate creating the RESPONSES field 44 5 in the ORDER file 4100 It has a DATA TYPE of NUMERIC Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD RESPONSES Are you adding RESPONSES as a new FIELD No Y FIELD NUMBER 4 5 Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 4 5 in File 100 FIELD LABEL RESPONSES DATA TYPE NUMERIC TITLE AUDIT AUDIT CONDITION READ ACCESS DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS
85. your data format source file and destination file and matched source to destination fields exit the Import form press lt F1 gt E After you exit the form you are asked a series of questions 1 Do you want to store the selected fields in an Import Template 2 Do you want to proceed with the import 3 Device for Import Results Report Storing your file and field specifications in an IMPORT template lets you do subsequent imports without having to re enter all of the field information If you proceed with the import enter a device to which the Import Results report should print You can run the Import directly or queue it As the import proceeds if an error occurs updating a field in a particular record the record will not be added and an error message is added to the Import Report saying what the problem was An example of the dialogue after exiting the Import form is shown below 212 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Do you want to store the selected fields in an Import Template YES Name of Import Template ZZIMPORT Are you adding ZZIMPORT as a new Import Template YES Do you want to proceed with the import YES Device for Import Results Report HOME Enter Once the import finishes you can review the Import Results report It lists Thecriteria you chose for your import Any records for which the import failed Theinternal entry numbers o
86. 19 OK YES Enter NAME FMPATIENT 19 DATE OF DISCHARGE DATE OF DISCHARGE 5 9 90 DISCHARGING PHYSICIAN FMPROVIDER 4 FOLLOW UP DATE 6 1 90 BILLING METHOD MEDICARE Enter MEDICARE NUMBER 3093 0393 Enter There is a potential hazard in using branching In this example suppose the BILLING METHOD were changed to P for private insurance The simple branching logic used would not show you the MEDICARE NUMBER field to edit or delete You must ensure that your template can handle this kind of situation In this example if you have programmer access to do so you might add M code to delete the MEDICARE NUMBER if BILLING METHOD were not equal to M Text Formatting in Word Processing Fields Word Wrapping Word wrapping is performed when a WORD PROCESSING type field is printed Two functions occur as part of word wrapping during prints lines are filled to the right margin and lines are broken only at word breaks If word wrap is on a data dictionary setting for the WORD PROCESSING type field in question you can override the word wrapping function and force a line to be printed as it appears in the editor by doing one of the following with the line Starting the line with a space Pressing the Tab key at the end of the line while using the Line Editor or type Tabl at the end of the line while using the Screen Editor Turning wrap off by using the NOWRAP function described below Lines
87. 3 277 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 13 Filegrams INPUT TO WHAT FILE FILEGRAM HISTORY EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL Enter Select FILEGRAM HISTORY 8 24 1994011 10 00 DATE TIME AUG 24 1994 11 10 00 8 SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE THE ENTIRE FILEGRAM HISTORY YES 278 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving NOTE To use Fileman s archiving procedure Kernel 6 5 or later must be installed on your system To use the Find Archived Records option to retrieve records archived with Fileman versions earlier than 20 0 Kernel 7 1 or later must be installed on your system In general computer terms archiving is a procedure that permits you to remove data from an online database and place that data into a low cost storage medium such as magnetic tape for long term retention Archiving in Fileman is a complete purge that simply clears data from your system In other words no data restoration is provided However there is a data retrieval option This facility is a prototype and supported only as a developer s tool You must access your archiving options directly through Fileman from programmer mode e g gt D Q DI Fileman performs the archiving function by searching through file entries using specified criteria extracting and transporting the selected entries by filegrams to temporary storage in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 11 11 and then simply writing the
88. 6 75 COMP index 85 XR202 index 106 H index 116 AC index 141 C index Choose E Edit D Delete C Create EDIT Which Index do you wish to edit C o NOTE The numbers displayed to the left of each cross reference are the Internal Entry Number of the cross reference stored in the INDEX file You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the New Style cross reference as shown below Number 106 EDIT AN INDEX Page 1 of 2 170 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual File 16026 Root File 16026 Index Name H Root Type INDEX FILE Short Description TEST Description wp empty Type REGULAR Activity IR Execution FIELD Alternatively this field can be null blank see Figure 173 Use LOOKUP amp SORTING COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert ER NOTE For additional help enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt Create a New Style Cross reference To create a New Style cross reference proceed in the following manner Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional NEW MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select Subfile Enter Current Indexes on file 16026 75 COMP index 85 XR202 index 106 H index 116 AC index 141
89. 6 Both the sender and the recipient can use the View Filegram option to inspect the filegram 7 Then the recipient of the filegram on the target system uses the Install Verify Filegram option to install the filegram into the destination file 8 Senders and recipients can delete a filegram at any time The recipient can choose to modify the S DIFG SRV HISTORY server or create another server to aid in the installation of filegrams e REF For additional information about setting up servers see the Kernel and MailMan documentation Filegram Steps Create Edit Filegram Template Option Use the Create Edit Filegram Template option to create a FILEGRAM type template or edit an existing FILEGRAM type template A FILEGRAM type template is similar to a regular PRINT template without any formatting instructions You always receive the STORE FILEGRAM LOGIC IN TEMPLATE prompt no matter how many fields you identify eo REF For information about regular PRINT templates see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the Fileman User Manual The Create Edit Filegram Template option is the first step in developing a 270 March 2013 Chapter 13 Filegrams Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual filegram there will not be a filegram without the template This template is also used in the archiving process Before using this option you may wish to familiarize yourself with the file s and fields involved The following dialogu
90. AME field is searched first when doing a lookup KWIC Key Word in Context each word of three or more letters in the field value becomes a separate cross reference A space is considered the primary word separator For example KING LEAR can be looked up under either KING or LEAR Uppercase or lowercase two letter words such as IN AN OR and IS are not considered key text The words THE AND THEN FOR FROM OTHER THAN WITH THEIR SOME and THIS upper or lowercase are not considered key text Quotation marks are also not considered key text You can also specify that KWIC separates words at most March 2013 163 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities Cross Description reference MUMPS Those with programmer access can create special cross references by putting M code into the SET and KILL logic of a cross reference You can use the M code entered to accomplish any task that must be done when the value in a field is entered changed or deleted SOUNDEX The field s value is transformed into a four character string representing its phonetic properties That string becomes the cross reference For example soundex transformation would access GONZALEZ GONZELES Gonzales and Gonsalless as equivalents entry of any one of these forms looks up all the others automatically TRIGGER Whenever the field is updated a different field can be automatically updated at the same time W REF For more details se
91. AYGO MESSAGE 6 1 S n STAFF PROVIDER 16 2 O y OTHER PROVIDER 40 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 16026 6 SSN 2 2 FREE TEXT Required audited Social Security Number INPUT TRANSFORM K L X gt 9 L X lt 9 X 9N X LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 HELP PROMPT Enter 9 numbers without dashes DESCRIPTION An entry is required If you do not know this patient s Social Security Number enter 000000000 to indicate the number is unknown GROUP DEMOG FILES POINTED TO FIELDS PROVIDER 6 PROVIDER 5 PERSON 16 PROVIDER 5 RELIGION 13 RELIGION 3 INPUT TEMPLATE S PRINT TEMPLATE S CAPTIONED USER 0 ZZDIAGPRINT MAR 29 1991 12 18 USER 140 Used to print information from the DIAGNOSIS multiple SORT TEMPLATE S FORM S BLOCKS S Modified Standard Format Another data dictionary format is the Modified Standard format which allows you to suppress printing the M code and to restrict the listing to specified groups of fields For example the following dialogue eliminates the M code from the March 2013 41 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Standard listing and only prints those fields in the DEMOG group NAME SEX DATE OF BIRTH and SSN Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD MODified Standard WANT THE LISTING TO INCLUDE MUMPS CODE N Enter WANT TO RE
92. Ask Users to Confirm Their Entry Selection If you want users who select an entry in a file for any lookup purpose to confirm their entry selection by answering positively at the OK prompt answer YES at the ASK OK WHEN LOOKING UP AN ENTRY prompt If you do not want users to confirm their entry selection answer NO at the ASK OK WHEN LOOKING UP AN ENTRY prompt The default is NO TIP Use this feature on files containing many similar or confusingly named entries e g files for drugs Enter a File Screen A line of MUMPS code can be entered here It should set the T switch TRUE or FALSE At the time of execution Y is the number of a File entry which we want to FILTER for lookup Thus this code is a permanent DIC S for the File Ze Misuse of this can disenable the file For example this is the file screen for the NEW PERSON file I 5CR200 XUSER Enter or Edit a Post Selection Action only available when you have programmer access If you have programmer access you can write M code for a Post Selection Action for entries in this file WR REF Post Selection Action is explained in the Fileman Programmer Manual Enter a Lookup Routine only available when you have programmer access If you have programmer access you also can enter an existing lookup routine To do this enter a routine namespace from three to six characters no at the LOOK UP PROGRAM prompt The name you choose for the looku
93. C index March 2013 171 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities Choose E Edit D Delete C Create CREATE Want to create a new Index for this file No YES Type of index REGULAR Enter Want index to be used for Lookup amp Sorting or Sorting Only LOOKUP amp SORTING Enter Index Name J Enter o NOTE The numbers displayed to the left of each cross reference are the Internal Entry Number of the cross reference stored in the INDEX file You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the New Style cross reference as shown below Number 142 EDIT AN INDEX Page 1 of 2 File 16026 Root File 16026 Index Name J Root Type INDEX FILE Short Description TEST Description wp empty Type REGULAR Activity IR Execution FIELD Alternatively this field can indicate NO RE INDEXING ALLOWED see Figure 171 Use LOOKUP amp SORTI COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert i NOTE For additional help enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt 172 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Delete a New Style Cross reference The following dialogue shows you how to delete a New Style cross reference Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cr
94. CIMAL PLACES No Enter No Since the value of a COMPUTED field can be used in other calculations you need to indicate when rounding should occur If you accept the default De No rounding will not be done when the COMPUTED field is used in other calculations A YES answer to this prompt means that you do want the rounded value used in calculations Usually you do not want values rounded at interim steps in a series of calculations Thus usually you will accept the No default When a COMPUTED field is printed the value will always be rounded to the number of decimal places you specify WHEN TOTALLING THIS FIELD SHOULD THE SUM BE COMPUTED FROM THE SUMS OF THE COMPONENT FIELDS No Enter If your computed expression involves division or multiplication you will be asked how the field should be totaled You can total the values of a field in the Print File Entries option A NO answer to this prompt means that the COMPUTED field s expression will be evaluated for each entry and those results will be added A YES answer means that values of each of the fields in the COMPUTED field s expression will be added first and then the COMPUTED field s expression will be applied to those totals For example suppose A and B are the names of two fields and A B is a computed expression The table below shows the results of printing A B and A B with different answers to the WHEN TOTALLING THIS FIELD question
95. DATE NOW AUG 21 1991 W REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section 90 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual DAYOFWEEK DAYOFWEEK datexp datexp is an expression with date time value Use This function returns the day of the week of the date in datexp DAYOFWEEK DATE OF BIRTH TUESDAY a 24 00 time stamp It represents tonight at midnight WR REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section MINUTES MINUTES datexp1 datexp2 Parameters datexp1 and datexp2 are date time expressions Time stamps are not necessary This function returns the number of minutes that datexp1 is after datexp2 If no time is associated with a date time expression DATE 12 00 A M is used Examples MINUTES MID NOW gt 832 MINUTES MID TODAY gt 1440 March 2013 91 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions MONTH EE datexp is a date time expression Use This function returns the month and year from a date time valued expression MONTH DATE OF BIRTH AUG 1943 MONTHNAME Sot MONTHNAME S Parameters n is an expression that evaluates to
96. DIK or if you select the Re Index File option DIRDEX located on Fileman s Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY to re index all cross references only those New Style cross references that contain an R in Activity will be fired If you explicitly select a cross reference in an EN DIK EN1 DIK or ENALL DIK call or in the Re Index File option DIRDEX on Fileman s Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY that cross reference is fired regardless of its Activity Also when a field is edited Fileman ignores Activity and fires all cross references on that field though you can control whether a cross reference is fired by entering Set and Kill Conditions eo REF For more information on the Re Index File option and limiting re indexing on some files see the Re Index File and Limits on Re indexing Files sections Collation You can specify forwards or backwards collation the direction in which Fileman s lookup utilities loop through a subscript in an index when entries are returned or displayed to the user This is especially useful for dates Developers can store dates in their natural internal Fileman date format and still display entries in the date index in reverse date order Lookup Prompt Each subscript on an index in the new INDEX file can be assigned a LOOKUP PROMPT This prompt will be used as the prompt for entry of the lookup value during classic Fileman lookup DIC calls If not filled in Fileman will default to use the name of t
97. E PATIENT TEST Are you adding PATIENT TEST as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No X Enter Yes Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS templates are sometimes referred to as PRINT templates in the user dialogue This is because they are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 4 NOTE Even though you cannot jump to the RELIGION file 13 using the RELIGION field which is a pointer to the RELIGION file you can retrieve data from that file by using extended pointer syntax REF For more information on pointer syntax see the Relational Navigation section March 2013 197 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools You can edit a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template The editing must occur in the Export Data option not in the standard Print File Entries option To edit one enter the template name at the FIRST EXPORT FIELD prompt preceded by a left bracket If an EXPORT template see the next step has been created based on the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template that you edit the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template will not be updated to reflect the changes You must create a new SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template to make use of the changes Create Export Template Option The next step to export data is to create an EXPORT template with the Create Export Template option The EXPORT template combines the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template created in Step 2 above with a
98. E MERGE FILE ENTRIES COMPARE ENTRIES IN WHAT FILE SCHOLAR COMPARE SCHOLAR RU Fileman responds to this abbreviated response with the matching entries in the list that follows 1 FMPATIENT 23 A 2 FMPATIENT 23 H CHOOSE 1 2 1 WITH SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 H NOTE Use this option ONLY DURING NON PEAK HOURS if merging entries in a file that is pointed to either by many files or by large files MERGE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM No Enter Here you choose whether to simply compare entries or to actually merge them If you are merging the process of repointing entries in other files from the merged from entry to the merged to entry can be time consuming or may create many tasked jobs This is more likely if the file is pointed to by many files or if the files that point to it have many entries In these situations consider merging at times when your system is not busy DO YOU WANT TO DISPLAY ONLY THE DISCREPANT FIELDS NO DEVICE Enter RIGHT MARGIN 80 COMPARISON OF SCHOLAR FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 1 SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H NAME FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY MATHEMATICS March 2013 239 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries DATE OF BIRTH 1872 P Press RETURN to continue or to exit The asterisks appearing in front of
99. EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NAME THEN EDIT FIELD DIAGNOSIS THEN EDIT FIELD ADMITTING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD DATE OF DISCHARGE THEN EDIT FIELD S X Y 1 THEN EDIT FIELD DISCHARGING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD FOLLOW UP DATE THEN EDIT FIELD Q1 THEN EDIT FIELD BILLING METHOD THEN EDIT FIELD Enter STORE THESE FIELDS IN TEMPLATE EDIT ADMISSION Are you adding EDIT ADMISSION as a new INPUT TEMPLATE Y Enter YES This template will branch around the discharge related questions if the DATE OF DISCHARGE is null If you wanted to further enhance the template to ask for MEDICARE NUMBER only if BILLING METHOD is M for Medicare you could change the template like this INPUT TO WHAT FILE ADMISSIONS Enter EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL EDIT ADMISSION USER Z2 FILE 716155 WANT TO EDIT EDIT ADMISSION INPUT TEMPLATE NO Y NAME EDIT ADMISSION Enter READ ACCESS Enter WRITE ACCESS Enter 300 March 2013 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual EDIT WHICH FIELD 01 Enter NAME THEN EDIT FIELD 1 Enter DIAGNOSIS THEN EDIT FIELD 2 Enter ADMITTING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD 3 Enter DATE OF DISCHARGE THEN EDIT FIELD S X Y 1 Enter THEN EDIT FIELD 4 Enter DISCHARGING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD 5 Enter FOLLOW UP DATE THEN EDIT FIELD 1 Enter THEN EDIT FIELD 6 Enter BILLING M
100. EE TEXT MINIMUM LENGTH 3 MAXIMUM LENGTH 30 OPTIONAL PATTERN MATCH IN X Enter The PATTERN MATCH is written in M code If input data violates the PATTERN MATCH or the Minimum Maximum lengths the data is not accepted and the user is shown the help prompt information WILL DIAGNOSIS FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Y IS DIAGNOSIS ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter SHOULD USER SEE AN ADDING A NEW DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE FOR NEW ENTRIES Y N N HAVING ENTERED OR EDITED ONE DIAGNOSIS SHOULD USER BE ASKED ANOTHER Y N Y With these specifications the user is not given a confirming message when new subentries are added to the Multiple The user is allowed to enter several diagnoses in a row for a given patient March 2013 127 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields HELP PROMPT Answer must be 3 30 characters in length Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter A default help prompt is automatically written for you with the DATA TYPE field value of FREE TEXT You can change this prompt using the Replace With syntax NOTE This help information is displayed when the user inputs a single question mark when editing this field eo NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value as FREE TEXT in Screen Mode see t
101. ELD DELIMITER 032 MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH 0 FORMAT USED YES QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS YES PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE YES SEND LAST FIELD DELIMITER YES SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL O0 DESCRIPTION This format exports data for use with LOTUS 1 2 3 spreadsheets Non numeric fields will be in quotes Each field will be separated by a space A 0 will be exported for null valued numeric fields in the primary file USAGE NOTES To import into 1 2 3 choose FILE gt IMPORT gt NUMBERS As this example shows the FORMAT USED field is YES This indicates that the format has been used to create an EXPORT template Whether you ask to see the contents of the format or not you are next given the chance to make a copy of the format in order to modify it You enter a name for the new format that does not yet exist in the FOREIGN FORMAT file Do you want to use 123 IMPORT NUMBERS as the basis for a new format NO YES lt Enter gt Name for new FOREIGN FORMAT CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Are you adding CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS as a new FOREIGN FORMAT the 22ND No Y Enter When the new format has been created you are given the opportunity to modify it The Screenman form that follows is used for editing Foreign Formats FOREIGN FILE FORMAT CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Page 1 FIELD DELIMITER 032 RECORD LENGTH FIXED SEND LAST DELIMITER YES MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH 0 RECORD DELIMITER NEED FOREIGN FIELD NAMES
102. ELD NUMBER 6 CAPTION c DATE CHANGED FIELD ORDER 6 FIELD NUMBER 7 CAPTION c PROGRAMMER FIELD ORDER 7 FIELD NUMBER 11 CAPTION c DESCRIPTION ORDER 2 FILEGRAM FILE 1001 05 LEVEL 2 PARENT 1001 CROSS REFERENCE MULTIPLE USER RESPONSE TO GET HERE REPORTER DATE LAST STORED AUG 24 1989 FIELD ORDER 1 CAPTION c REPORTER FIELD NUMBER 01 FIRST PRINT FIELD COMPILED c N S DIFGT 315 D FG DIFGB X The code in the FIRST PRINT FIELD has special meaning to Fileman Specifiers Option The filegram sender uses the Specifiers option to identify a particular field in the file as a reference point to use when installing the filegram The value of this field in the filegram is compared to values in the entries at the target site The values must match for a filegram to be installed If the specifier has a unique value for every entry in the file and is cross referenced that cross reference is used to locate an entry This reduces the search time and increases accuracy Specifiers can be compared to identifiers unlike identifiers which are used for user interaction purposes specifiers are used for transaction purposes Specifiers are optional The dialogue that follows creates a specifier in a sample PATIENT file Select FILEGRAM OPTION 5 Enter SPECIFIERS March 2013 273 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 13 Filegrams OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD 3 E
103. EMPT From JAN 1 1999 To T WITHIN DATE TIME OF ATTEMPT SORT BY USER From To WITHIN USER SORT BY TYPE OF FAILED ATTEMPT From To lt S SS 355 SSS S355 SSS SS SST SSS SS SST HSS SS SST HSS SSS T HSS The specifications for each successive level of sorting are indented further to the right You can add or insert sort levels however each sort group of lines must be indented further to the right than the sort group above it For each level of sorting except when the sorting is on a Boolean value there should be a From line and a To line You can also have a fourth line March 2013 9 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 1 Templates Revisited that says ASK or DON T ASK for sort ranges other than first to last Remember to indent each line in a sort group by the same number of spaces 10 March 2013 Chapter 2 Statistics Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 2 Statistics How to Generate Statistics from Reports Fileman currently offers three types of statistical processing Descriptive Scattergram Histogram In each case to generate statistics from reports you use a two step process 1 Use the Print File Entries or Search File Entries options to generate a Fileman report Do not queue the report The entries you select in your report are the ones on which statistics will be generated the way you use sort and print qualifiers in the report affects the way statisti
104. ENGTH FIXED E ME 219 REGULAR EE 163 RELA HOT EE Jumps Across PIOS cina on we ire aati caer ti eek ie ed htc Relational Navi Sat E 59 E Ee E 53 Backward Extended Eege ger vraies 60 Sunple Extended Pointer soret eonia e busto teet 55 Simple Extended Polnter5ypibax E 56 REBIGION Tile ee eege 197 RESPONSES dretter 156 EE 13 Search File Entries Option certet ent 11 59 63 82 253 280 SEARCEIITenplates cese sere 201 247 253 254 255 263 281 294 Select Entries to Ee RE E 279 280 Select Entries to Keren 253 254 Select Fields for Export ODUOD c ne eet anion nenerulnadh 194 195 207 SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS Templates 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 334 March 2013 Index Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual SEND LAST FIELD DELIMITER Feld 218 SET and Kill COMI OLS EE EE ee ee Ee 168 el EE 11 201 SORT TSM pats c RE 8 9 201 Sortie WIE Eege Exportitig Data gengt 207 SOUNDEX Cross reterences eene nenne tnnn nennen 164 e COMO T 268 272 Statistical PrutbitOualifiets s vna rw esos sie ODIO POPE ERI ERAS 196 e EE cu er LL etre modo tpm LM MD OLDER E E EI EI E 11 Statistics et E 11 Subscript IrdunstObms oon tabat eie uti mtu vae tee nested e ciens Cross reference S vb edi eebe geed 168 SUBSTITUTE TOR NEE Eleld uoa rere eta eri enda t ene 222 SUMMARIZE ACUO d voto DE EA PF a 243 A C M Computed EE 70 ite E 301 Templ
105. ERIC KEE 1 INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND i AU INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND 9999999 IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT NO MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS 0 SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE YES MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 1 and 9999999 0 Decimal Digits XECUTABLE HELP March 2013 157 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode while editing a sub field of a Multiple you will notice that the heading at the top of the screen reminds you that you are now editing a field within a Multiple e g Field 01 in Sub File 100 045 of File 100 Also whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With NUMERIC type fields Fileman asks you to enter the INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND e g set to 1 and the INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND e g set to 9999999 In addition you are asked if the numeric value is a dollar amount and if decimal digits will be allowed i e the MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS A default help prompt is automatically written for you with the DATA TYPE field of NUMERIC In this case the English message Type a Number between 1 and 9999999 0 Decimal Digits has been built automatically from the specifications As always you can accept the defaul
106. ETHOD THEN EDIT FIELD 7 S X M Y MEDICARE NUMBER THEN EDIT FIELD S Y 0 THEN EDIT FIELD MEDICARE NUMBER THEN EDIT FIELD Enter STORE THESE FIELDS IN TEMPLATE lt Spacebar gt lt Enter gt EDIT ADMISSION OCT 31 1991 14 17 USER Z2 FILE 716155 EDIT ADMISSION TEMPLATE ALREADY EXISTS OK TO REPLACE Y After the BILLING METHOD field is edited a test is made of its contents It is a DATA TYPE field of SET OF CODES thus the test is for the letter M alone the internal value of the field If it is equal to M the template branches to the MEDICARE NUMBER field If it is not equal to M the template proceeds to the next prompt where Y is set unconditionally to zero The template is exited here so that the MEDICARE NUMBER prompt is not shown when it is not needed An editing session using this template to add a new admission might look like this Select ADMISSIONS NAME FMPATIENT 19 Are you adding FMPATIENT 19 as a new ADMISSIONS the ATH No X lt Enter gt Yes DIAGNOSIS MEASLES ADMITTING PHYSICIAN FMPROVIDER 4 DATE OF DISCHARGE Enter BILLING METHOD MEDICARE MEDICARE NUMBER 3093 0393 The discharge related questions were skipped and the MEDICARE NUMBER prompt was given A future editing of this record upon patient discharge could look like this March 2013 301 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Select ADMISSIONS NAME FMPATIENT
107. FMPATIENT 23 A SSN 000 99 9999 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY TOPICS 23 S PARADOX TOPICS PRINCIPLE OF EXCLUDED MIDDLE TOPICS SET THEORY TOPICS THEORY OF TYPES TOPICS LIAR PARADOX SUBJECT AREA MATHEMATICS TOPICS 24 S PARADOX TOPICS SET THEORY TOPICS THEORY OF TYPES TOPICS AXIOM OF INFINITY The transfer is then initiated with the following dialogue Select TRANSFER OPTION TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE SCHOLAR TRANSFER FROM FILE SCHOLAR 234 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual TRANSFER DATA INTO WHICH SCHOLAR RU 1 FMPATIENT 23 A 2 FMPATIENT 23 H CHOOSE 1 2 TRANSFER FROM SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 H WANT TO DELETE THIS ENTRY AFTER IT S TRANSFERRED NO XES EXCUSE ME LET ME THINK ABOUT THAT A MOMENT Data values are then merged such that no pre existing values are overwritten but new values are added The DATE OF BIRTH is added since the pre existing value was null Different subentries in the TOPICS Multiple are added to the pre existing list of topics The Inquire to File Entries option shows the result NAME FMPATIENT 23 A DATE OF BIRTH 1872 SSN 000 99 9999 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY TOPICS 23 S PARADOX TOPICS PRINCIPLE OF EXCLUDED MIDDLE TOPICS SET THEORY TOPICS THEORY OF TYPES TOPICS LIAR PARADOX TOPICS AXIOM OF INFINITY The entry for FMPATIENT 23 H has been deleted Transferring En
108. FOREIGN FORMAT see Step 1 above Besides choosing a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template and a FOREIGN FORMAT you will be asked for any additional information that is needed to fully define the export If you do not supply the requested information the EXPORT template cannot be created Values in the FOREIGN FORMAT entry you choose determine whether or not you will be prompted for more information The following table indicates which values for which FOREIGN FORMAT fields will result in prompts Foreign Format Value Information Required Field FIELD ASK The character or characters to separate fields DELIMITER RECORD ASK The character or characters to separate records DELIMITER 198 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual 1 or The numter of characters in each field to be YES exported The name of each field recognized by the importing application FIELD NAMES The maximum number of characters on each line of output usually the longest possible exported record PROMPT FOR UU or The DATA TYPE field value of each exported DATA TYPE YES field possible choices are FREE TEXT NUMERIC DATE TIME In the example below the file and field specifications in the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template example Error Reference source not found are combined with the 123 Import Numbers FOREIGN FORMAT Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION CREATE EXPORT TEMP
109. FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SORT BY NAME IN PERSONNEL FILE The expression at the SORT BY prompt selects entries in the PERSONNEL file where the value of the NAME field in the PATIENT file matches the PERSONNEL file s 01 field The PATIENT file s NAME field is being used as a lookup in the PERSONNEL file Since we are evaluating the 01 field of the PERSONNEL file the element part of the extended pointer syntax is unnecessary Multiline Return Values When you use extended pointer syntax a lookup is performed in the navigated to file This lookup usually evaluates to a single value However in some situations extended pointer syntax can end up returning a Multiple valued or Multiline result Multiline responses can be generated by 64 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Simple Pointer to a WORD PROCESSING Field Simple Pointer to a Multiple Backward Pointer You cannot use extended pointer syntax that can evaluate to a Multiline value at Fileman s SORT BY and SEARCH FOR FIELD prompts Some of the ways in which you can use extended pointers that evaluate to a Multiline value are As the definition of a COMPUTED field Within word processing Windows so one document can call another document to print inside it For input to word processing data elements so you can use the Enter or Edit File Entries option to stuff one document into another As the name of a tra
110. File Entries and Print File Entries options Here is an example the first screen of a PRINT template using the Template Edit option Select Utility Functions Option TEMPLATE Edit MODIFY WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter Select TEMPLATE File PRINT template Select PRINT TEMPLATE XUFILEINQ 1 XUFILEINO 2 XUFILEINOHDR CHOOSE 1 2 1 Enter XUFILEINO Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the template properties as shown below TEMPLATE NAME XUFILEINQ TEMPLATE TYPE Compiled as XUFILEO routine DATE LAST MODIFIED NOV 4 2004 11 29 DATE LAST USED MAY 17 2012 READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS USER DESCRIPTION HEADER XUFILEINOHDR SUB HEADER SUPPRESSED 6 March 2013 Chapter 1 Templates Revisited Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Print Fields on Next Page Exit Save Next Page Refresh rat Enter a command or specific field followed by a caption to jump to a COMMAND NWE Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert The dates shown following the DATE LAST MODIFIED and DATE LAST USED prompts are for informational purposes only and are not editable Also if a template has been compiled into a set of routines an informational message will be displayed near the top of the screen e g Compiled as XUFILEO routine On the second screen of the form you will see the SORT PRI
111. File Manager 22 2 Advanced User Manual March 2013 Fileman Lab Agile Project Yy X vista Expertise Network 4 T TigerTech Tireless OCopyright 2013 by VISTA Expertise Network Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 3 0 Details are available at http creativecommons ore licenses bv sa 3 0 Revision History Date Description Language Authors March 2013 Version 22 2 English US Donald Creaven Kathy Ice release and Frederick D S Marshall based on the work of Gary Beuschel Susan Strack Jack Schram Skip Ormsby Tami Winn Michael Ogi and Thom Blom Contents TIGR EIERE ege 1 Betore You Begin teuer de rr ere ec 1 e EE 2 Related Manuals and Other References eese 2 Ittre 4 Eeer 4 Getting Starter E 5 Chapter i Templates R visited iara eher decedente tubus 5 Chapter SEHE Sede teret E E uel La eese 11 How to Generate Statistics from Report 11 D scriplive E daas rin teer ou ute sip neto cx heise neal 11 EE 12 Generating the Descriptive Statistics csssssrssesrsrssersssessssorsnsess 12 OCALLE TS LAIN esi ie ostio Eeer 13 mittal EE 13 Generating the Scattere rani ade eo irse oai vu tuii Epoca co ad cadet 14 e Ve e T 15 Introducing the Data DIClohadty user eret rasis ok ove ipeo nuo terit r n 18 Chapter 3 Filemiaty File Structure er eoo i toldos eot pte ndn des 18 Pile EE 18 More About Fil
112. Fileman and access to at least one file in your system This Manual s Structure This manual begins with a section called Getting Started II In this section we build directly on information you learned in the Getting Started Manual This includes new uses for the options you already know plus a few new options you can try The second section Introducing the Data Dictionary shows you how to view data dictionary listings for various files and how to use that information to make your templates and other tools even more powerful In the third section Let s Make Some Files you will learn how to create files add fields define keys and identifiers and set up cross references and indexes You ll also learn what all those terms mean In the last section Moving Data Around you will learn how to import export transfer extract and archive data Related Manuals and Other References The Advanced User Manual is one part of the Fileman 22 2 documentation suite The other manuals are 2 March 2013 Orientation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Fileman 22 2 Release Notes Fileman 22 2 Install Guide Fileman 22 2 Getting Started Manual Fileman 22 2 Security and Privacy Manual Fileman 22 2 Programmers Manual Fileman 22 2 Technical Manual The other manuals are available for download at www osehra org March 2013 3 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Introduction Introduction What is Fileman In discussing wha
113. GION value of CATHOLIC the output would look like PATIENT IS A MALE CATHOLIC WHO HAS NO APPARENT PROBLEMS March 2013 85 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Chapter 7 Fileman Functions How to Use Fileman Functions This chapter lists each Fileman Function including syntax and simple examples of their use You can use them in any computed expression eo REF For more information on computed expressions see the Computed Expressions section A function performs an operation that returns a value Many functions are included with Fileman you can also add functions by making entries in the FUNCTION file 4 5 o REF For a description on how to add functions see the Fileman Functions Creating section in the Fileman Programmer Manual Some functions require an argument or arguments others are argumentless The arguments of the function can be any element including field name field number preceded with the quoted literal or even other functions The SOUAREROOT function for example would take an argument of 64 and return 8 Thus if the AGE field of a patient has the value 64 the expression SQUAREROOT AGE would return 8 eo NOTE If there is an output transform on a field the function code is applied to the field after it has been transformed In most cases if a field has an output transform you should therefore use the syntax FUNCTION NAME INTERNAL FIELD NAME rather
114. IABLE POINTERS when you enter a single question mark at the PROVIDER field prompt you will see the following help message PROVIDER Enter one of the following S EntryName to select a Staff Provider O EntryName to select a Other Provider To see the entries in any particular file type lt Prefix gt In this example if you simply enter a name at the PROVIDER prompt then the system will search each of the VARIABLE POINTER field files for the name you have entered If a match is found the system will ask you if it is the correct entry However if you know the file the entry should be in then you can speed processing by using the following syntax to select an entry PREFIX entry name MESSAGE entry name File Name entry name NOTE You do not need to enter the entire file name or message to direct the lookup Using the first few characters will suffice e NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of VARIABLE POINTER in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section MUMPS Data Type Those with programmer access can define a field with a DATA TYPE field value of MUMPS This MUMPS valued field is designed specifically to 134 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual contain executable M
115. II format for the incoming records The only settings used from the Foreign Format entry are Record Delimiter Record Length Fixed and Quote Non numeric Fields Make sure the settings in the Foreign Format match the format of your incoming data Because some foreign applications export data in a different format than they import it a Foreign Format that works for export may not have the appropriate settings for import As an alternative to specifying a Foreign Format entry you can manually specify the settings for your incoming data in the three provided fields 1 Isthe data fixed length 2 If not what is the field delimiter 3 Are fields quoted March 2013 209 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools SOURCE FILE Enter the path and name of your source file the file containing the records to import Fileman FILE Specify the destination file for the imported records FIELD SELECTION PAGE IMPORT TEMPLATE This is where you match the fields in the incoming records to the fields in the destination file If you do not have an existing IMPORT template that matches incoming to destination fields go to the Field Selection page and specify those fields individually see the Match Source to Destination Fields section A completed page one of the form might look like DATA IMPORT Page 1 DATA FORMAT SOURCE FILE Internal or external EXTERNAL Full path USERS FMPATIENT Host file name IMPOR
116. IT WINDOW 312 Database Administrator oversees software development with respect to VISTA Standards and Conventions SAC such as namespacing Also this term refers to the Database Administration function and staff Database Integration Agreement see Integration Agreements IA Database of specifications of data and information processing resources Fileman s database of data dictionaries is stored in the FILE of files 1 A programmer call that is made when working in direct programmer mode A direct mode utility is entered at the MUMPS prompt e g gt D XUP Calls that are documented as direct mode utilities cannot be used in application software code A site for sending and receiving mail Local variable holding the user number that identifies the signed on user Local variable that holds the File Manager Access Code of the signed on user In Screenman the area in which you enter or edit data It is highlighted with either reverse video or an underline In Screen Editor the area in which you enter and edit text the area between the status bar and the ruler March 2013 Glossary ERROR TRAP EXTENDED POINTERS FIELD NUMBER FORM FREE TEXT GLOBAL VARIABLE HISTOGRAM IDENTIFIER March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual A mechanism to capture system errors and record facts about the computing context such as the local symbol table last global reference and routine in use Operati
117. ITER QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS SEND LAST FIELD DELIMITER PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE RECORD DELIMITER SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL RECORD LENGTH FIXED DATE FORMAT MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH 216 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual FILE HEADER NEED FOREIGN FIELD NAMES FILE TRAILER When exporting records all fields in this file are used in the export process When importing records only three fields are used in the import process FIELD DELIMITER RECORD LENGTH FIXED QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS In this section each format characteristic is described Some combinations of characteristics are unacceptable these situations are mentioned Also some of the fields allow you to enter M code Export specific variables you can use in this M code are described in the section Variables Available for Programmer Use To set up a FOREIGN FORMAT file 4 44 entry use the Define Foreign File Format option to print out a format use the Print Format Documentation option FIELD DELIMITER Many applications can import and export data if the values of fields in each record are separated by a known character or sequence of characters The application puts or expects data before the first delimiter into its first field between the first and second delimiter into the second field and so on Therefore the ability to specify and recognize these field delimiters is a crucial aspect of many data exchan
118. L DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter DATA TYPE OF NAME FREE TEXT DATE OF BIRTH and SEX can be added to the GROUP in the same way Now when using the Enter or Edit File Entries option you could say EDIT WHICH FIELD DEMOG 1 DEMOG NAME 2 DEMOG SEX 3 DEMOG DATE OF BIRTH EDIT WHICH FIELD lt Enter gt Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 55 NAME FMPATIENT ONE lt Enter gt SEX MALE lt Enter gt DATE OF BIRTH JAN 3 1955 lt Enter gt Changing a Field s DATA TYPE Value Within the Modify File Attributes option you can change the DATA TYPE field value itself There are limitations on the sort of changes you can make These are listed below You must be very careful in making such changes if you already have file data entered because there is no guarantee that the old data will match the newly specified criteria e g field length However if you do change a field definition you are asked if you want existing data checked for inconsistencies A list of any discrepancies is printed If more than one discrepancy is found you can save the list of discrepant entries in a template To generate this list later use the Verify Fields option on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY The following restrictions apply to changing the definitions of existing DATA TYPE field values in a file March 2013 141 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Multiple valued fields ca
119. LATE OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS Template PATIENT TEST SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS OCT 30 1992 11 32 USER Z7 FILE 99002 Do you want to see the fields stored in the PATIENT TEST template Enter Yes or No NO YES FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME lt Enter gt THEN PRINT FIELD INTERNAL SEX lt Enter gt THEN PRINT FIELD E RELIGION CLASSIFICATION 1 5 Enter THEN PRINT FIELD DIAGNOSIS Enter March 2013 199 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools THEN PRINT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD DIAGNOSIS Enter THEN PRINT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD AGE AT ONSET Enter THEN PRINT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD Enter THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Do you want to use this template Enter Yes or No YES Enter Do you want to delete the PATIENT TEST template after the export template is created Enter Yes or No NO Enter When asked if you want the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template deleted answer YES only if you know you will not need the template again If an EXPORT template is not successfully created the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template will not be deleted Next identify the FOREIGN FORMAT to use and name the EXPORT template that you are creating You cannot overwrite an existing PRINT template Select FOREIGN FORMAT 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Enter name for EXPORT Template PATIENT TO 123 Are you adding PATIENT TO 123 as a new PRI
120. LE THIS UTILITY TRIES TO FIND ALL ENTRIES IN ALL FILES POINTING TO A CERTAIN FILE Select FILE LANGUAGE Select one of the following 1 One particular LANGUAGE Entry 2 All LANGUAGE Entries 3 Non existent LANGUAGE Entries Find pointers to All LANGUAGE Entries 1 One particular LANGUAGE Entry Find pointers to LANGUAGE Entry GERMAN 1 GERMAN DE DEU 2 GERMAN LOW LOW GERMAN NDS 3 GERMAN MIDDLE HIGH CA 1050 MIDDLE HIGH GERMAN GMH 4 GERMAN OLD HIGH CA 750 1050 OLD HIGH GERMAN GOH 5 GERMAN SWISS SWISS GERMAN GSW CHOOSE 1 5 1 GERMAN DE DEU DEVICE HOME lt Enter gt TELNET LANGUAGE GERMAN FILE 84 DIALOG 820 820 LANGUAGE 7003 7003 LANGUAGE FILE 200 NEW PERSON 31 USER THIRTYONE LANGUAGE FILE 99999 ZZD TEST FILE1 WE SECOND ENTRY LANGUAGE POINTER 52 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Relational navigation gives you a way to reach beyond the current file to reference fields within other files Suppose for example you are doing a printout from the PATIENT file In the PATIENT file there is a pointer to the DOCTOR file This links a given patient to a given doctor But the only information about the doctor available from the point of view of the PATIENT file is the doctor s name What if in your printout you want to print the doctor s name phone number and specialty where phone number and speci
121. LL field for the format being used If a number comes from a source other than a DATA TYPE field of NUMERIC or COMPUTED in the primary file it can be output with leading spaces or trailing insignificant zeros Such a number might originate from a field in a pointed to file reached by the relational syntax a Fileman function or other computed expression In these cases the value of the SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL field will usually have no effect on what is exported March 2013 205 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools BR NOTE Whether exported numbers have leading spaces or trailing insignificant zeros and whether nulls produce special output is controlled by how the field is defined in the Fileman data dictionary The DATA TYPE field input by the user when the PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE field contains YES does not affect these characteristics of the export Special Considerations Multiples Data Flattening Data exported from Multiples is flattened that is data at upper levels is repeated for each subentry For example take the comma delimited export for a top level file s 01 NAME field and a Subfile s 2 01 DATE and 1 TYPE fields The output for an entry with four subentries would look like FMPATIENT 01 JAN 95 SC FMPATIENT 24 JUN 95 NSC FMPATIENT 14 AUG 95 SC FMPATIENT 21 JUL 96 NSC NOTE The top level 01 field is repeated for each Subfile entry No More Than One Multiple at Any
122. LNET ZZD TEST FILE1 List MAR 25 2013 12 57 PAGE 1 NAME TESTERS SECOND ENTRY USER SEVENTEEN USER THIRTY USER THIRTYONE Example Use of Computed Multiple Pointer field In this case three Testers are associated with the selected entry March 2013 69 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Chapter 6 Computed Expressions You can use computed expressions in several places within Fileman to obtain manipulate modify and format data Computed expressions consist of one or more elements linked together with operators Most computed expressions return a value after performing the actions you have requested The way this result is used or displayed depends on where you have used the computed expression Syntax Elements of Computed Expressions You can use any of the following elements in constructing a computed expression Afield name within the current file e g RELIGION The field name can be partially spelled e g REL if the partial spelling is unambiguous e A field number preceded with e g 3 Aliteral number When used as part of a computed expression do not use quotes e g AGE AT ONSET 20 However you must use quotes if the number will stand alone as a constant e g 3 14159265 e A literal text string in quotes e g HELLO e A validly formatted date such as 20 JULY 1969 which is punctuated only by spaces WR NOTE Dashes in a computed expressi
123. Lake City Medical Center is an example of moving a filegram remotely The records you can move by a filegram can be either physical stored in one file or logical related fields stored in different files Logical records are loaded into filegrams by using Fileman s relational navigational syntax For successful filegram installation the recipient system must have the following Kernel 6 5 or later The FILEGRAM HISTORY file 1 12 The Filegram key to the Filegram submenu A file structure that matches the one reflected by the entry in the filegram This is the structure existing on the sender s system FILEGRAM type Templates The Filegram process requires you to create an OUTPUT template which is stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 along with regular PRINT 268 March 2013 Chapter 13 Filegrams Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual templates Fileman recognizes the FILEGRAM type and regular PRINT templates as OUTPUT templates but their similarity ends there e NOTE Since FILEGRAM type templates are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file the dialogues you encounter in the Filegram process will refer to a FILEGRAM type template as a PRINT template Regular PRINT templates already created are screened so that you cannot accidentally replace an existing PRINT template with a FILEGRAM type template Filegram and Archiving Relationship FILEGRAM type templates are the only kind of template allowed in the archiving proce
124. Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions this example the home file is pointed to by a field in the New Person file called ZZD TEST FILE POINTER That pointing field must be cross referenced for the backwards relational navigation to be possible The NAME field is retrieved form the New Person file Select OPTION MODIFY FILE ATTRIBUTES Do you want to use the screen mode version YES NO Modify what File ZZD TEST FILE1 6 entries Select FIELD TESTERS Are you adding TESTERS as a new FIELD the 13TH No Y FIELD NUMBER 12 Enter DATA TYPE OF TESTERS COMPUTED COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION NEW PERSON NAME By NEW PERSON do you mean the NEW PERSON File pointing via its ZZD TEST FILE POINTER field ZZD Cross reference Yes Enter Yes TRANSLATES TO THE FOLLOWING CODE S Y 999991 12 80 G DO X DD 999991 12 9 4 S X S D0 Y 999991 12 80 FIELD IS MULTIPLE VALUED TYPE OF RESULT MULTIPLE POINTER Enter POINT TO WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter You can also use the screen mode version of Modify File Attributes to define Computed Multiple Pointers Now you can use the TESTERS field in Print Templates ScreenMan form definitions or any other place where multiple lines of results are appropriate The COMPUTED type field can be a very useful tool Having set up such a field you can then search or sort by it and also include it in the definition of other COMPUTED type fields In the la
125. NT or INPUT fields themselves Thus you can use this second screen to edit the specific template fields Here is an example of the second screen of a PRINT template using the Template Edit option Editing Print Template XUFILEINQ S 3 Programmer Access to All Files 1 C38 L35 ACCESSIBLE FILE NUMBER C1 L10 FILE ACCESSIBLE FILE C12 L25 DATA DICTIONARY ACCESS R3 DD DELETE ACCESS R5 DELETE LAYGO ACCESS R5 LAYGO READ ACCESS R4 READ WRITE ACCESS R5 WRITE AUDIT ACCESS R5 AUDIT As you can see from this example fields under a Multiple field March 2013 7 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 1 Templates Revisited e g ACCESSIBLE FILE are indented As you edit add and delete subfields here you must preserve the indentation The same holds true for Relational Navigation within the template fields jumped to are in a different file and are indented an extra three spaces each You do not have to indent each new level exactly three spaces however there must be some extra number of spaces Then if necessary un indent the same number of spaces to get back to a previous level If a SORT template has a user number i e USER only that user can use that SORT template in the Fileman Print File Entries option To remove this restriction simply delete the user number by entering an at sign at the USER prompt For SORT templates you can also use the first screen of th
126. NT TEMPLATE the 197TH No Y Enter After you choose the EXPORT template name you are prompted for any additional information needed In this example the format does require additional information the DATA TYPE field value for each field in this situation the defaults derived by the Export Tool are correct and the maximum length of each record Enter the data types of the fields being exported below Do you want to continue Enter Yes or No YES Enter NAME FREE TEXT Enter INTERNAL SEX FREE TEXT Enter E RELIGION CLASSIFICATION 1 5 FREE TEXT Enter DIAGNOSIS in DIAGNOSIS subfile FREE TEXT Enter 200 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual AGE AT ONSET in DIAGNOSIS subfile NUMERIC Enter Enter the maximum length of a physical record that can be exported Enter to stop the creation of an EXPORT template MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH 100 Export Template created The Export Tool checks to make sure that your SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template does not contain fields from Subfiles Multiples that are not descendent from each other If you have not followed that restriction you will receive an error message The SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template would have to be modified Choose Entries Export Data In the final step to export data use the Export Data option to select which entries from the file to export and
127. NTERNAL LAST MAXIMUM MINIMUM nTH NEXT PREVIOUS TOTAL March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Categor Mathematical ABS BETWEEN MAX MIN MODULO SQUAREROOT Printing Related Functions IOM PAGE String DUP LOWERCASE PADRIGHT REPLACE REVERSE STRIPBLANKS TRANSLATE UPPERCASE Temporary Data Storage PARAM and SETPARAM VAR and SET M Related Functions A SCIT C HAR S E XTRACT F IND H OROLOG I O J OB J USTIFY L ENGTH P IECE R ANDOM S ELECT S TORAGE X March 2013 89 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Date Time Functions BEIWEEN BETWEEN d1 d2 d3 Parameters d1 d2 and d3 are dates or date expressions d1 is the date being tested d2 is one limit for the test d3 is the other limit for the test This Boolean function determines if d1 is within the limits defined by d2 and d3 If d1 is within this range a value of 1 true is returned otherwise 0 false is returned If d1 equals d2 or d3 1 true is returned Select OPTION SEARCH FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE BUILD Enter A SEARCH FOR BUILD FIELD BETWEEN DATE DISTRIBUTED 1JAN2000 1JAN2001 B SEARCH FOR BUILD FIELD IF A Enter BETWEEN DATE DISTRIBUTED 1 AN2000 1 AN2001 DATE Gg datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This date function returns the date portion of a date time expression
128. OW 20 JUL 1981 20 JUL 1982 366 TIME TIME datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns time from datexp in 12 hour format with AM PM TIME NOW 1 15 PM TODAY March 2013 95 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Use This argumentless function returns today s date TODAY gt AUG 26 1991 WR REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section YEAR EE datexp is an expression with a date time value This function returns the year from datexp YEAR DATE OF BIRTH 1949 Environmental Functions BREAKABLE Formar BREAKABLEGS Parameters is a number or numeric expression with a value of 1 or This function returns nothing When used within a PRINT template this function determines whether or not lt Ctrl C gt can be used to break out of a report print If n 1 lt Ctrl C gt will break out if n 0 it will not Under default conditions lt Ctrl C gt will break you out The value of n is returned BREAKABLE 0 gt 0 lt Ctrl C gt is disabled CLOSE 96 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual CLOSE Parameters device is an open device in the form of a valid argument for an M Close command Use This function should only be
129. One File Level You cannot export more than one Multiple at any one file level You can export data from one Multiple and from Subfiles directly descendent from that Multiple as long as you never export more than one Subfile at the same level Suppose you are exporting data from a file with the following structure 206 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Subfile 2B 1 Subfile 2B 2 Subfile 2C 1 In addition to fields in the Primary file you can export from Subfile 1A or Subfile 2A but not from both Also you can export from Subfile 2A Subfile 2B 1 and Subfile 2C 1 but you could not additionally choose fields in Subfile 2B 2 If you need data from Subfiles that are not directly descendent from each other you can do multiple exports and join the data together in the importing application Sorting with Multiples A special automated sort is done to the data when Multiples are exported you cannot perform your own sort When Subfiles are involved the Export Tool performs a special sort in order to format the data Since the Export Tool must do this customized sort you cannot sort the data yourself If you need the data in a particular sequence sort it in the importing application You can perform any search on the data that is necessary to choose entries for export About EXPORT Templates The Export Tool uses two types of templates the EXPORT FIELDS template created
130. PAYSCALE You want to retrieve the value of a field DEDUCTION in the PAY FACTOR entry that equals the PAYSCALE field for each entry in the PERSONNEL file You can create a COMPUTED field expression in the PERSONNEL file COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION PAYSCALE IN PAY FACTOR FILE DEDUCTION NOTE PAYSCALE was not defined as pointing to the PAY FACTOR file The link to that file is made by the COMPUTED field definition PAYSCALE could itself be a COMPUTED field In this situation the value of the PAYSCALE field in the PERSONNEL file is used to do a normal lookup in the PAY FACTOR file using all lookup type cross references March 2013 63 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation In database terminology this extended pointer capability is similar to a JOIN operation because you can specify at any time a new relationship between two formerly unrelated files Therefore we call this type of pointing the Join Extended Pointer Limitations If the join expression matches more than one entry in the file being joined the first matching entry by internal entry number is returned as the result of the join Thus if your join expression is likely to match more than one entry be aware that only the first matching entry is returned Example You could find out if any entries in the PERSONNEL file could be matched against the NAME field in the PATIENT file just by specifying the following sort OUTPUT
131. PRINT FIELD BUDGET THEN PRINT FIELD COST THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT STATISTICS Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter e SORRY JUST A MOMENT PLEASE Output is generated here Generating the Descriptive Statistics Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS 12 March 2013 Chapter 2 Statistics Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Select OTHER OPTION STATISTICS Select STATISTICAL ROUTINE DES Enter CRIPTIVE STATISTICS User FMUSER TWO 2 51 PM 02 15 13 DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS N OF STANDARD CASES MEAN DEVIATION MINIMUM MAXIMUM BUDGET 27 45845 1481 25685 8582 2589 0000 95200 0000 COST 27 45914 1111 25796 2936 259 0000 96000 0000 Scattergram If you subtotal by two fields De sub subtotal in a sort you can create Scattergrams for fields that were counted with or in the corresponding print Only numeric values are charted The Scattergram is scaled to fit your output device s row and column dimensions Occurrences of more than nine points in a single print position are marked by an asterisk Initial Print Select Fileman Option PRINT File Entries Subtotal by two fields OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter XXXXXXXX SORT BY NAME WARD LOCATION START WITH WARD LOCATION FIRST lt Enter gt WITHIN WARD LOCATION SORT BY ROOM BED START WITH ROOM BED FIRST SEnters WITHIN ROOM BED SORT BY
132. RCHIVE OPTION CREATE FILEGRAM ARCHIVING TEMPLATE OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE FIRST SEND CHANGE FIELD ALL Do you mean ALL the fields in the file No Y THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD Enter STORE ARCHIVE LOGIC IN TEMPLATE CHANGE FILEGRAM Are you adding CHANGE FILEGRAM as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No YES March 2013 287 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving Write Entries to Temporary Storage The Write Entries to Temporary Storage option writes your selected archiving activities to the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file into a WORD PROCESSING field This step is in preparation for moving the data to permanent storage You cannot archive to permanent storage unless you use the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option first Needless to say this file could grow quite large and will shrink only after the Purge Stored Entries option has been run After using this option the archived entries will appear to be missing from the primary file This protective measure assures selected entries cannot be edited so that entries in the file will match the archived version The entries are not really gone merely locked Also after using this option you cannot add or delete entries to an archiving activity If changes in the selection of entries for archiving is necessary you have to cancel this activity and restart CAUTION This process can be quite time consuming It can be queued at the DEVICE prompt After it is completed
133. RGE EXTRACTED ENTRIES Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 UPDATED DESTINATION FILE SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT If the source file has fields from other files pointing to it the Extract Tool tells you The records about to be purged should not be pointed to by other records to maintain database integrity This option will DELETE DATA from both CHANGE and from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file Are you sure you want to continue NO YES The entries will be deleted in INTERNAL NUMBER order lt lt 4 ENTRIES PURGED gt gt As you can see entering a YES response to the Are you sure you want to continue NO prompt deletes the entries immediately March 2013 265 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool Cancel Extract Selection Option 8 of 9 You can cancel an extract activity any time before the entries are purged by using the Cancel Extract Selection option If the extract activity status is UPDATED DESTINATION FILE meaning the entries have already been moved to the destination file you ll see a warning notice At this point you can roll back or delete the new entries that were created while using the Update Destination File option After you have canceled an extract activity Fileman deletes the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file reference to the extract activity In addition you will once again be able to gain access to all of those source entries that Fileman locked during
134. SCHOLAR NAME FIELDS SSN FIELDS DATE OF BIRTH FIELDS SUBJECT AREA FIELDS TOPICS FIELDS WILL BE TRANSFERRED WANT TO MERGE TRANSFERRED ENTRIES WITH ONES ALREADY THERE NO YES WANT EACH ENTRY TO BE DELETED AS IT S TRANSFERRED NO TRANSFER ENTRIES BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME FIRST Enter DEVICE HOME Enter You can specify whether you want entries with the same NAME field to be merged when the transfers are made or whether each transferred entry and subentry should become a distinct new entry in the target file In this case the answer was YES to merge You can also specify whether or not the entries should be deleted from the from file as they are transferred In this case the answer was NO to delete A simple report is created that lists the entries that were transferred You have the ability to route that list to a printer using the DEVICE prompt In addition you have considerable control over which entries are transferred Your answers to the TRANSFER ENTRIES BY and START 236 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual WITH prompts select entries in the same way that you specify sort criteria when describing a print output e REF For more information on sort criteria and print output see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the Fileman User Manual For example if you only wanted to transfer scholars born
135. SET logic SET condition KILL logic or KILL condition is being executed ATA Value in KILL Value in SET Logic SET y Logic KILL Condition Condition X1 order Old value Old value ec The variables X X1 and X2 always equal X 1 X1 1 and X2 1 respectively If an order number in the cross reference refers to the 01 field X1 order is set to null when the SET logic and SET condition are executed during record creation Similarly X2 order is set to null when the KILL logic or condition are executed during record deletion Key Support A regular New Style index can be used as the Uniqueness March 2013 169 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities Index for a key Fileman ensures that all fields in a Uniqueness Index have values are not null and that those values taken collectively are unique across all records in the file B REF For more information on keys and how to create them see the Key Definition section Edit a New Style Cross reference To edit a New Style cross reference identify the file or subfile you wish to edit Fileman will display the cross references on the file and offer you the choices of Edit Delete or Create Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional NEW MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select Subfile Enter Current Indexes on file 1602
136. STRICT LISTING TO CERTAIN GROUPS OF FIELDS NO Y Include GROUP DEMOG And include GROUP Enter eo NOTE If you answer the question concerning M code YES and do not specify any groups the output from the Modified Standard format will be the same as that of the Standard format Custom Tailored Data Dictionary The Custom Tailored format allows you to select attributes of the fields for your report You decide what information will be displayed and you determine the printed format of the output REF For a detailed description of the techniques used to control the format of output see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the Fileman User Manual For this simple example we accept the default settings Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION LIST FILE ATTRIBUTES START WITH WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter GO TO WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter Select SUB FILE Enter Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD CUSTOM TAILORED SORT BY LABEL ANSWER WITH ATTRIBUTE NUMBER OR LABEL DO YOU WANT THE ENTIRE ATTRIBUTE LIST Y Enter The SORT BY prompt allows you to specify the order in which the data dictionary information will be displayed Here we are asking for the entire list of possible attributes about a field 42 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual that can be stored in the data dictionary Typically no field would have a value for ev
137. T DAT Foreign format EXCEL COMMA OR Data fixed length Fileman FILE Field delimiter Fields quoted Primary file NEW PERSON Field selection page OR Import Template COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Match Source to Destination Fields For your import you need to match each field in the incoming record to a field in the destination Fileman file Fields in the incoming record are imported in order from left to right 210 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Thus for each field in the incoming record you specify the corresponding destination field in the Fileman file in the same order The first Fileman field you specify will be the destination for the first field in the incoming record the second will match the second field in the incoming record and so forth FIELD SELECTION FOR IMPORT Page 2 Choose a field from NEW PERSON Field Delete last field selected These are the fields selected so far NAME STREET ADDRESS 1 STREET ADDRESS 2 STREET ADDRESS 3 CITY STATE ZIP CODE NDNDOBWNE COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Remember that you must include the 01 field and any fields that are required identifiers for the top level of the file The same is true for any Subfiles Multiples If you specified a fixed length as opposed to delimited data format for the incoming records you must enter not on
138. TED FIELD EXPRESSION TODAY DATE OF BIRTH 365 25 NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT ONLY ANSWER IF NUMBER VALUED 2 For this example we assume the DATE OF BIRTH field was previously created Thus we can reference it in the COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION Also the NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT question is asking whether you should enter the number of digits that should normally appear to the right of the decimal point when this field is displayed SHOULD VALUE ALWAYS BE INTERNALLY ROUNDED TO 2 DECIMAL PLACES No X WHEN TOTALLING THIS FIELD SHOULD THE SUM BE COMPUTED FROM THE SUMS OF THE COMPONENT FIELDS No Enter LENGTH OF FIELD 8 Enter NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of COMPUTED in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section 130 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual POINTER TO A FILE Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as a POINTER TO A FILE requires you to enter the name or number of the pointed to file and that file must already exist defined previously For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as POINTER TO A FILE you are asked the following questions Select FIELD RELIGION Are you adding RELIGION as a new FIELD No X DATA T
139. TUS 123 NUMBERS OTHER NAME LOTUS 123 NUMB DESCRIPTION WP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert After you have completed and filed the Screenman forms you are returned to the Data Export submenu You can now use the new format to create an EXPORT template or do an import March 2013 231 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries The Transfer Entries menu contains three options Transfer File Entries Compare Merge File Entries Namespace Compare These options allow you to transfer entries from one file to another to compare and or merge two entries in a single file or to compare file data dictionaries and entries between two UCIs For example you may need to combine data from two different entries into one of the two This could happen in a patient database when the same patient has been inadvertently entered twice with the name spelled slightly differently CAUTION Once you have merged file entries the merging cannot be undone Care must be taken that data is not mistakenly lost Transfer File Entries Option The Transfer File Entries option can be used for several purposes You can use it to Merge two entries in the same file Transfer one or more records from one file to another file Copy a data dictionary into a new file However the Compare Merge File Entries option described in Section should usually be used to
140. UOTE NON NUMERIC PUBS gees nein oett 221 PROMPLPFORDATA LYDPE detects ce qup hat c aeo Hut 222 SUBSTITUTE FOR JBNUNFL e tote d un dte Eege 222 DATE FORNDAJT S oet etu etie metis dom fe 229 BILE E RE 224 FILE TRAILER gees aes civ ian eet yearn lols 224 Variables Available for Programmer Uloe sss 224 Print Format Electro Ee 225 Define Foreign File Format Option eee 227 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries eerte 231 Transfer File Entries pun su entier etd us br eps 231 Transferring Data Within the Same File 232 Transferring Entries Betweerr Piles opone t emere eets 234 Transferring Entries into a New Pile enero Eent 236 Compare Merge File Entries Option ENNEN 237 Comparing EDERT mb ee bn etum 237 ee sio nur NU HN RR 239 Namespace Compare E e EE 244 Sample Namespace Compare Desgton 244 Chapter 12 Exact E 247 Extract Overview oues ab eet DN Bee 247 Important Items to Note soos da eei eds p eth rentrer ra rne 247 Source Files ireti ate ee eaan tata heel eaa E EEEE e EDan 248 Destination E 248 Mapping Informatio eebe tn otra tle death se tese dd E 250 Extract ote pss dust pisc uoto Mana M Gd wich oat ated ta ated Men uta ad 253 Select Entries to Extract Option 1 of 9 ees 253 Add Delete Selected Entries Option 2 of 9 255 Print Selected Entries Option 3 of 9 eese 257 Modify Destination File Option 4 of 9 sse 258
141. YPE OF RELIGION POINTER TO A FILE POINT TO WHICH FILE RELIGION The file that is pointed to must already exist on your system If you enter a single question mark at the POINT TO WHICH FILE prompt you will be presented with a list of the available files SHOULD ADDING A NEW RELIGION FILE ENTRY LAYGO BE ALLOWED WHEN ANSWERING THE RELIGION QUESTION No Enter By answering NO to this prompt users who are editing patient data are not able to add a new entry on the fly to the RELIGION file This prompt depends on whether you have LAYGO access to the file or not WILL RELIGION FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS RELIGION ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter HELP PROMPT Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter o NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of POINTER TO A FILE in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section March 2013 131 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields VARIABLE POINTER Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as a VARIABLE POINTER as with the POINTER TO A FILE DATA TYPE requires you to enter the names or numbers of the pointed to files and those files must already exist defined previously Additionally an order message and prefix must be associated with each
142. a template in which to store the selected fields You must store your field specifications in a template to proceed with the next step in the data export After you specify a template name for the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template you have completed this step The following is an example of the EXPORT FIELD dialogue The example uses the sample PATIENT file 200 Several unacceptable responses are shown the error messages are the ones you would receive to these responses Select Fileman OPTION OTHER OPTIONS 196 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Select OTHER OPTION DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION SELECT FIELDS FOR EXPORT OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT FIRST EXPORT FIELD NAME S SORRY You cannot add S to the export field specifications FIRST EXPORT FIELD NAME THEN EXPORT FIELD INTERNAL SEX THEN EXPORT FIELD RELIGION SORRY You cannot jump to another file when selecting fields for export THEN EXPORT FIELD SE RELIGION CLASSIFICATION 1 5 THEN EXPORT FIELD DIAGNOSIS Enter multiple THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD DIAGNOSIS THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD HISTORY Enter word processing SORRY You cannot choose a word processing field for export THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD AGE AT ONSET THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD Enter THEN EXPORT FIELD Enter STORE EXPORT LOGIC IN TEMPLAT
143. after 1900 to the NEW SCHOLAR file you could answer the TRANSFER ENTRIES BY prompt like this TRANSFER ENTRIES BY NAME DATE OF BIRTH gt 1900 WITHIN DATE OF BIRTH gt 1900 TRANSFER ENTRIES BY Enter o NOTE The Transfer File Entries option can be used to purge files You can define a SCHOLAR ARCHIVE file containing a subset of the fields that are in the original file perhaps the fields NAME SSN and DATE OF BIRTH you can then simply transfer into this separate file all or a selected group of entries from the original file deleting the entries as they are transferred Transferring Entries into a New File You can use the Transfer File Entries option to create a new file To do this 1 At the INPUT TO WHAT FILE prompt enter the name of a nonexistent file 2 If you have programmer access you will be prompted for the global location for the new file 3 When you specify the file to transfer from you can request that the data dictionary of that file be copied as the data dictionary for your new file Here is an example of using the Transfer File Entries option to create a new file INPUT TO WHAT FILE SCHOLAR COPY Are you adding SCHOLAR COPY as a new FILE No Y March 2013 237 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries FILE NUMBER 16031 Enter INTERNAL GLOBAL REFERENCE DIZ 16031 Enter SORRY I M WORKING AS FAST AS I CAN A FreeTe
144. al jumping is mainly a convenience to make it easier to select more than one field from another file by letting you temporarily jump to the other file it s easier to pick all the fields you want directly rather than having to use extended pointer syntax to specify each field eo NOTE When sorting printing searching or editing if you want to reference several fields from another file it is more efficient to jump to the file and specify the needed fields than it is to use the extended pointer March 2013 59 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation syntax to reference the fields one at a time Multiple uses of the extended pointer cause multiple relational jumps There are three types of relational jumps that correspond to the three extended pointer syntax Simple short form ATTENDING PHYSICIAN Simple long form PROVIDER IN PERSON FILE PAYSCALE IN FACTOR FILE Within the Enter or Edit File Entries option for example you can respond to the prompts as depicted in the dialogue that follows INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NAME THEN EDIT FIELD ATTENDING PH AN EDIT WHICH DOCTOR FIELD ALL NAME PHYSICIAN NAME THEN EDIT DOCTOR FIELD NICKNAME THEN EDIT DOCTOR FIELD Enter THEN EDIT FIELD Enter Because of a pointer linkage between the ATTENDING PHYSICIAN field in the PATIENT file and the DOCTOR file you can use the simple short form of the e
145. alty are fields in the DOCTOR file The answer is to use relational navigation By using the pointer relationship between the PATIENT and the DOCTOR file you can start from the PATIENT file and for each record in the PATIENT file retrieve not only the name of the doctor for that patient but also additional information about the doctor from the DOCTOR file March 2013 53 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual PATIENT File Record Name FMPATINET 11 DOE 3 3 57 Marital Status MARRIED Attending Physician FMPROVIDER 1 Service Connected YES Pointer Relationship Chapter 5 Relational Navigation DOCTOR File Record Name FMPROVIDER 1 Phone x3945 Specialty Internal Medicine Relational Navigation lets you combine information from different files PATIENT LIST PATIENT NAME PATIENT DOB PHYSICIAN June 25 PHY PHONE 1996 15 12 Page 1 PHY SPECIALTY 3 3 57 7 6 49 FMPROVIDER 1 FMPROVIDER 2 x3945 x2231 INTERNAL MEDI INTERNAL MEDI You can use relational navigation in many places in Fileman to move beyond the current file and retrieve or edit information in related files records including Reports Print Fields Sort Criteria Search Criteria Editing Records edit information in related files not just current file Computed Expressions COMPUTED Fields Within word processing Windows The syntax to perform relational navigation called Extended Pointer syntax
146. an 22 2 Advanced User Manual the template s mapping information is correct and acceptable and then populates the destination file adding entries as new records Fileman will not however check to see if any of those records to be moved already exist in the destination file Since this two step process can be quite time consuming it can be queued at the DEVICE prompt Here is a sample of the dialogue Select EXTRACT OPTION UPDATE DESTINATION FILE Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 31 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT You MUST enter an EXTRACT template name This EXTRACT template will be used to populate your destination file PRINT TEMPLATE CHANGE EXTRACT Enter EXTRACT AUG 30 1992 USER 2 FILE 16000 Excuse me this will take a few moments Checking the destination file If entries cannot be moved to the destination file an exception report will be printed Select a device where to print the exception report QUEUEING to this device will queue the Update process EXCEPTION REPORT DEVICE QUEUE TO PRINT ON DEVICE PRINTER After the destination file has been updated Fileman changes the extract activity status from SELECTED or EDITED to UPDATED DESTINATION FILE At this point the entries from the source file are no longer available on lookups This protective measure prevents you from attempting to edit the selected source file entries so that they contain the same data as the co
147. an integer from 1 through 12 This function returns the full name of the month corresponding to n MONTHNAME 4 gt APRIL MONTHNAME E DATE OF BIRTH 4 5 gt APRIL Function E extracts the 4th and 5th digits from a date stored in FileMan internal format YYYMMDD NOON Use This argumentless function returns today s date with a time stamp of 12 00 NOON gt AUG 23 1991 12 00 WR REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section 92 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual NOW This argumentless function returns the current date and time NOW gt AUG 23 1991 11 23 WR REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section NUMDATE NUMDATE datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the date in datexp in MM DD YY format NUMDATE DATE OF BIRTH gt 03 07 49 NUMDATE4 NUMDATEA4 datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the date in datexp in MM DD YYYY format NUMDATEA DATE OF BIRTH gt 03 07 1949 NUMDAY March 2013 93 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 File
148. anner as the Search File Entries option 254 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual W REF For guidance on selecting entries see the Search chapter of the Fileman User Manual The Select Entries to Extract option performs the following functions 1 During the search phase the search criteria for selecting entries is specified and must be stored in a template NOTE If you want to extract a subentry contained in a Multiple field you must extract the entire entry 2 During the sort phase which is indicated by the SORT BY prompt you can enter additional restrictions on the entries to be selected If no further restrictions are required simply accept the defaults provided at the SORT BY and START WITH prompts 3 During the print phase which is indicated by the PRINT FIELD prompt Fileman gathers the entries specified in the search and sort phases and adds the internal entry numbers of the selected entries to the SEARCH template Although specifying print fields is not required the print process rust be run to completion Simply press the Enter key at the PRINT FIELD prompt or specify actual fields to print a report of identifying information for the extracted records In the sample dialogue that follows notice the sequence in which the search sort and print prompts appear EXTRACT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE A SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD 01 Enter NO A CONDITION LESS THAN
149. ansform only the extract of the Subrecord will fail When you arrive at the STORE EXTRACT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE prompt enter the name that you wish to assign to your new EXTRACT template To edit an existing EXTRACT template on the other hand simply enter its name at the FIRST EXTRACT FIELD prompt using the following format Extract templatename Here is a sample of the dialogue that you will encounter when you are ready to build an EXTRACT template Select EXTRACT OPTION CREATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE This option lets you build a template where you specify fields to extract and their corresponding mapping in the destination file For more detailed description of requirements on the destination file please see your Fileman User Manual OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE DESTINATION FILE CHANGE EXTRACT FIRST EXTRACT CHANGE FIELD 01 Enter NO MAP NO TO CHANGE EXTRACT FIELD 01 Enter NO THEN EXTRACT CHANGE FIELD VERSION MAP VERSION TO CHANGE EXTRACT FIELD VERSION THEN EXTRACT CHANGE FIELD PROGRAMMER March 2013 261 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool MAP PROGRAMMER TO CHANGE EXTRACT FIELD PROGRAMMER STORE EXTRACT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE CHANGE EXTRACT Are you adding CHANGE EXTRACT as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No YES While you are creating your EXTRACT template Fileman performs a few validation checks Inspecting the extract field and its correspond
150. as an identifier for a file simply by using the Identifier option available on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY A multiple valued field cannot be designated as an identifier however a subfield of that multiple valued field can be designated as an identifier for the multiple The DIAGNOSIS field in the PATIENT file cannot for example be designated as an identifier but its subfield AGE AT ONSET can be designated as an identifier of DIAGNOSIS This feature is discussed in more detail later in this section These are the steps for setting up the sample SSN field as an identifier MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD SSN Want to make SSN an identifier NO Y Want to display SSN whenever a lookup is done on an entry in the PATIENT file YES Enter Here the positive answer to the last question causes the patient s SSN value to show up whenever a lookup on a patient is done For example Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 1 FMPATIENT 25 000223333 2 FMPATIENT 29 000114444 CHOOSE 1 2 An identifier field will not be asked if its WRITE access security does not match the Fileman Access Code of the user If the identifier field has been specified in the Modify File Attributes option as a required field the user 174 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual must type a valid answer to its prompt when it is asked as an identifier otherwise the entry just created is d
151. ata Types in Computed Expressions When you are working with file data in computed expressions you must consider the appropriateness of the DATA TYPE field value for the operation or function you are using Here are some notes regarding data types and computed expressions SET OF CODES POINTER TO A FILE and VARIABLE POINTER Data Types These data types are manipulated using the external representations not the internal ones The internal value can be accessed using the INTERNAL function DATE TIME Data Type The DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME usually yields results based on the internal value of the field when used in a computed expression For example the computed expression DATE OF BIRTH _DOB where DOB is a field with a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME yields DATE OF BIRTH 2910713 where 2910713 is the internal representation of the date Often you do not want the internal representation of the date to be used for output There are alternatives Continuing with concatenation as an example you can concatenate a caption with the output of a function e g DATE OF BIRTH _NUMDATE DOB yields DATE OF BIRTH 07 13 91 When using the Print File Entries option you can separately identify the caption like this FIRST PRINT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH THEN PRINT FIELD DOB X 74 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Since DOB was not entered as part of a computed e
152. ata records from an ASCII file is a four step process as described below Generate ASCII Source File Generate your source file from your non Fileman application containing the records to be imported Generate the file with one record per line with the fields in each record being set off using either the delimited or fixed 208 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual length method The last record in the file must be terminated with the appropriate EOL end of line character s for your operating system Once you generate your ASCII source file you need to move it to a disk that is accessible from the computer system running Fileman Your IRM should be able to assist you with this Specify Data Format Source File and Destination File Invoke Fileman s Import Data option It loads a two page Screenman form On page one of the form you need to specify the data format source file and destination file for your import DATA FORMAT INTERNAL or EXTERNAL Specify if the incoming data is in external form the way Fileman would display it or internal form the way Fileman would store it Unless you are knowledgeable about how Fileman stores data you should choose EXTERNAL Also the incoming data is only validated by Fileman if you choose EXTERNAL validation prevents you from putting invalid data into the file FOREIGN FORMAT Choose a Foreign Format entry whose settings match the ASC
153. ata types are acceptable for receiving extracted data Please see your User Manual for more guidance on building the destination file MODIFY WHAT FILE CHANGE EXTRACT From this point on you will see the usual dialogue while creating a new file and creating fields Once you have finished creating your destination file you will see the dialogue that follows Select FIELD Enter ARCHIVE FILE NO Enter either Y or N March 2013 259 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool ARCHIVE FILE NO YES will not allow modifications or deletions of data or data dictionary NO will place no restrictions on the file ARCHIVE FILE NO Enter Select EXTRACT OPTION Create Extract Template Option 5 of 9 When selecting destination fields for data to be extracted into keep in mind that the INPUT transforms of the destination fields are executed for each field value For an extracted record the value of each field in the record is tested against the INPUT transform of its destination field If any field fails the INPUT transform the extract for the entire record will fail Make sure the INPUT transforms on the destination fields are appropriate for the data you will be extracting O NOTE If you are extracting a Subrecord using the EXTRACT DIAXU entry point and its FILING_LEVEL parameter and a value fails the INPUT transform only the extract of the Subrecor
154. ate ER e 5 6 7 8 9 207 Ee Expressions in Word Processing Windows 302 Word Deocesstmp Fields n scuto adn aepo ted dide on brune tyme Advanced Bee 300 TtadirttonalGross references aie toco Ir rebar t a tae EH a e A ree dede aeg i ip 165 IR et ss utes f Condes etie usce tan ani dem der ai eee Dieu 166 Editihg cale eee tod o ver eoe to o ausente Laid p Id dE 164 Transfer Entries MOL oes oe ipe e ro Pe sc e da P ERN a ER RR 231 Transfer File Entries Op Onis sd on bote te ea ret p hg 231 232 234 236 242 EISE Data Within the Same Pe 232 Entries Between Eesti Lee 234 Entries into a New BIG obo E v baa eed n b ER NEIN 236 TAIPEI S o eo esa a A AR S LU NU D M M E LUE 231 TRIGGER e EEN 164 March 2013 335 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Index TAPE Fie cl GU EE 214 Unary Operators Mc 71 Uneditable Data OpbBOoD so oeste uosu pe tm Etats p eludet o deti eiis 182 Emvalidated KEE Adyvaticed E MEN EE 295 Update Destination File Option 247 248 249 259 261 265 EU EE Cross Reference a Field or File oOpliOtt s socie e pereo uie 162 Utility Functions Menu 5 37 141 159 162 167 168 174 177 207 VA ELSI Tea EE EENS 86 Validate Extract Template ptm escis eti aetas t ene pete e eundi et 266 Mariable SET Advanced Edit EN EE usce tec ro eer arte p va Re 295 Variables Available for Programmer Use Foreign Formats
155. ation we look at the name is the most important piece of information Names are how we human beings refer to things Patients states drugs insurance providers we call all of these things by names However as anybody who has ever looked up a patient can tell you the name is not always sufficient to uniquely identify a particular record Other fields in a file can be designated as identifiers which means pretty much what it sounds like these fields can be used to assist in identifying the specific record the user is looking for Another thing that can be done with a field is making it a required field Required fields you will recall are the ones you can t skip but you can jump out of A field can also be a required identifier which means it works in much the same way as the 01 field The DD also allows the file designer to say which fields are indexed A Fileman file can have any number of indexes and each index specifies one or more fields Indexes can be lookup or non lookup A lookup index allows users to select a record using a field even if that field is not normally an identifier Non lookup indexes don t affect users but they can help in other ways For example a non lookup index could be created to help speed up a sort Non lookup indexes are also useful in relational navigation which you will learn about in a few chapters Keys are a relatively new addition to Fileman A key is a way to uniquely identify any record in
156. ayed when printed Frequently the OUTPUT transform will contain a computed expression that alters the data stored internally in the field A simple OUTPUT transform that converts the internally stored date into MM DD YY format is DATE OF BIRTH OUTPUT TRANSFORM NUMDATE DATE OF BIRTH If an OUTPUT transform is applied to a field the result of the transform will be used if that field is used in another computed expression For example if DATE OF BIRTH is used in a PRINT template the transformed value will be output THEN PRINT FIELD NAME S BIRTHDAY DATE OF BIRTH The result of this computed expression would be similar to ONE FMPATIENT S BIRTHDAY 03 07 42 Word Processing Windows When entering text into a DATA TYPE field with a value of WORD PROCESSING you can insert a computed expression within a Window This expression will be evaluated at the time the WORD PROCESSING type field is printed If the expression is meaningful its value will replace the Window in the printed output For example you could embed within the text of the HISTORY WORD PROCESSING type field a Window containing a COMPUTED field expression 84 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual HISTORY 1 PATIENT IS A SEX RELIGION WHO HAS NO 2 APPARENT PROBLEMS When this field is printed for a patient who has a SEX value of MALE and a RELI
157. be surrounded by quotes when this field contains YES NOTE Do not set this field to YES if a fixed length record is being exported or imported PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE The Export Tool will determine the DATA TYPE field value for fields in the primary file and its Multiples based on their definition in the data dictionary Other fields are automatically assigned a DATA TYPE of FREE TEXT If you want the user to choose the DATA TYPE of each field when creating an EXPORT template answer YES to this field The only DATA TYPE field values recognized by the Export Tool are the following FREE TEXT NUMERIC DATE TIME The DATA TYPE field value entered by the user controls whether or not the values from that field will be surrounded by quotes if the QUOTE NON 222 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual NUMERIC FIELDS field is set to YES The user supplied DATA TYPE field value does not affect how numbers are exported numeric export is controlled by the DATA TYPE field value in the data dictionary only SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL Numeric fields with no data a null value will result by default in nothing being exported for that field For fixed record length exports this should not be a problem However if your importing application uses spaces as a delimiter you may need a printable character to be exported for null valued numeric fields If you want a character or characters such as 0 or
158. characters long If string is less than n characters long the characters in string will be repeated until the output string is n characters in length DUP DIAGNOSIS 3 gt Ang value of DIAGNOSIS Angina Pectoris DUP _ IOM gt ____ line drawn will have a length equal to the value of IOM March 2013 107 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions LOWERCASE LOWERCASK string string is an expression yielding alphabetic characters This function will change uppercase characters in string to lowercase except for the first character and the first character after a punctuation mark A space is a punctuation mark thus the first letter of a word will not be changed String cannot be a word processing field the contents of a word processing field will be unaffected LOWERCASE EMPATIENT 20 gt Fmpatient 20 PADRIGHT PADRIGHT string n Parameters string is a string or string expression to be printed n is the total size of the output string This function will pad string on the right with spaces to make a string n characters long If string is longer than n characters the entire string will be returned this function will not truncate Examples PADRIGHT Peter 10 gt Peter five spaces after the r PADRIGHT CITY 15 gt San Juan Capistrano REPLACE REPLACK string oldstring newstring Parameters string is the string expression that will be changed oldstring is a string e
159. clude those that in combination will uniquely identify the entry Save the PRINT template for future use when archiving When the archived entries are written to temporary storage the corresponding original entry disappears from the user s view A new node subscripted with 9 is added to the original entry so that it will be bypassed by the usual Fileman calls If data to be archived is contained in a Multiple field then the entire entry must be archived You cannot archive a subentry by itself A FILEGRAM type template is the only template type allowed in the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option You cannot have more than one archiving activity on a file at a time Data selected for archiving can be permanently saved to any sequential storage media for example SDP a VMS file magnetic tape or a removable disk pack Depending on the number of entries involved be prepared for the search the Select Entries to Archive option and write the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option processes to be time consuming A brief history of who performed the various archive steps and when they were accomplished is saved in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file You can cancel your archiving process by using the Cancel Archival March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Selection option at any time before the Purge Stored Entries option is used The Find Archived Entries option can be used to verify that the archi
160. cord number paired with an indicator for the file This indicator is a value called the global root which you will learn about later on March 2013 31 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities The structures of Fileman files are stored in the data dictionary DD There you can find the specifications of every field in every file Frequently you need to know the information in the DD usually field names and descriptions to successfully access and use the data in Fileman s files The Data Dictionary Utilities submenu contains the following utilities that show information about files List File Attributes Map Pointer Relations Check Fix DD Structure Find Pointers Into a File List File Attributes Option To get a listing of the fields in a file and other file attributes use the List File Attributes option This listing displays the structure of the file and the characteristics of the fields in the file it does not show entries records or any data contained in the file This information can be very useful when deciding what fields to include in a report or what fields to edit You have your choice of the following formats for the listing Brief Condensed Standard or Modified Standard Custom Tailored Templates Only Global Map Indexes and Cross References Only Keys Only 32 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced
161. cs will be generated as discussed later in this chapter 2 Immediately after the report finishes use the Statistics option on the Fileman menu to generate statistics The two step process for each type of statistical output is described below e NOTE If you have statistical software on a personal computer you might want to consider using Fileman s Export Tool as an alternative to Fileman s statistics options especially if the statistics options described in this chapter do not provide the statistical analysis you need With the Export Tool you can export your data into a format your personal computer statistical software can read and use all of that software s capabilities to perform statistical analyses on Fileman data Descriptive Statistics The Descriptive Statistics routine creates a summary report of the numeric March 2013 11 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 2 Statistics information produced by the preceding print The number of cases is always shown To get descriptive statistics for fields printed out in a report you must associate one of the following qualifiers with fields in the print Count and mean i Count mean standard deviation minimum and maximum To obtain descriptive statistics 1 Print a report and use the or print qualifiers on one or more fields 2 Immediately after the report completes generate the Descriptive Statistics based on the report Initial Print FIRST
162. cts if you later install Kernel s NEW PERSON file March 2013 17 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Introducing the Data Dictionary Introducing the Data Dictionary Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure No this isn t going to be one of those tedious what is a file discussions You already know what a file is You also know what fields and records are what it means to point to a file and how a database works Now it s time to pop the hood and find out what really makes Fileman files tick File Characteristics Each file in the Fileman system has certain characteristics that you and Fileman can use to identify it The primary characteristics are file name file number file description data global and the file s data dictionary entry You are already familiar with file names You know about the PATIENT file the STATE file the NEW PERSON file and so on Each Fileman file has a name However these names are not guaranteed to be unique It s true that most of the more important files have unique names but there s no mechanism in Fileman to prevent developers in say the Pharmacy package from creating a new file called PATIENT which is different from the PATIENT file you know So although most users refer to files by their names programmers tend to use the file s number when talking about it This is because they know that the file number is unique Somebody else could create a PATIENT file but there w
163. d or a field number preceded by in fname This function returns the last entry in a file or ina Multiple identified by fname If the second format is used the last entry with a non null value in field is returned The last entry is the one with the highest internal entry number the function does not analyze the values of the entries MAXIMUM fname MAXIMUM fname field In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname With the first format this function returns the largest value from the 01 field of the file or Multiple identified by fname The second format returns the largest value from field The function works only if the internally stored values of the entries are numeric Thus you can use numeric or date valued fields Also free text fields will work if the stored values are numbers Computed fields with numeric results can be used Pointer fields will return the value from the pointed to file MAXIMUM APPOINTMENT gt FEB 25 1991 101 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions APPOINTMENT is a Multiple valued DATE TIME field MAXIMUM PATIENT AGE gt 93 AGE is a field in the current file PATIENT MINIMUM Format MINIMUM fname MINIMUM fname field Parameters In the first format
164. d Entries option Add Delete Selected Entries Option 2 of 9 When you wish to add entries to the extract activity or you wish to delete an entry or entries use the Add Delete Selected Entries option This option provides an easy way to eliminate undesired entries or to add needed ones to your list of entries to extract Like the Inquire to File Entries option this option displays a selected entry and then asks if you wish to delete or add 256 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual the entry If you modify the list then the activity s status in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file changes from SELECTED to EDITED You can only use this option to modify your list before the entries are moved to the destination file If you need to change the extract activity list after the destination file is updated you will need to cancel the extract activity and start a new extract activity To use the Add Delete Selected Entries option select the extract activity you wish to modify by entering the archival activity number source file number or source file name Then select the entry to be added or deleted The following dialogue depicts the sequence you will follow when adding an entry to the extract activity Select EXTRACT OPTION ADD DELETE SELECTED ENTRIES Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY ANSWER WITH ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY ARCHIVE NUMBER OR FILE CHOOSE FROM 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 SELECTED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Select
165. d any number between two and three NUMBER 001 Field All files have unique numbers associated with each of their entries Defining the NUMBER field allows you to use the Internal Entry Number IEN also called the record number as you would any other field Usually this means that someone like Herr Doktor Ludwig Koechel in the case of the MOZART WORK file has gone to the trouble of creating a numbering scheme for the entries If you wish to set up a file in which a unique Internal Entry Number is always matched with each entry Name you can do so by creating a field numbered 001 for the file Select FILE MOZART WORK Select FIELD 001 Are you adding a new FIELD No YES LABEL KOECHEL NUMBER FIELD NUMBER 001 Enter DATA TYPE OF KOECHEL NUMBER NUMERIC INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND 1 INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND 626 IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT Y N NO Enter MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS 0 Enter HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 1 and 626 0 Decimal Digits Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter The previous dialogue is what would normally create a NUMERIC valued field In this case we are describing the file s PRIMARY KEY or Internal Entry Number Once such a 001 field is defined you can create a new file entry that might look like this March 2013 137 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Select MOZART WORK EINE KLEINE NACHTMUSIK Are you adding
166. d to every Subfile on a path to the lowest level Subfiles Your data must include values for the 01 field and all the required identifiers for every Subfile as well as for the top level of the file You can add more than one subentry in a particular Subfile However you are restricted to the same set of fields for every entry in each Subfile March 2013 215 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Importing from VMS Files When importing from a data file that s been transferred to a VMS based computer system a problem can occur if once transferred the data file does not get a maximum record length stored in its file header This can happen when a DOS file is moved to a VMS system by some protocols When the maximum record length is unknown VMS uses a default maximum size of 510 If the length of a data record in the source file is larger than the maximum size an error results The solution is to run the VMS CONVERT utility on the Host file This utility adds the maximum record information to the file header and everything will work just fine You can see if the maximum record length is stored in a file s header on a VMS system by using the following DCL command DIR filename FULL Foreign Formats FOREIGN FORMAT File Attributes Reference The following fields in the FOREIGN FORMAT File 4 44 correspond to attributes of the formatted data that you wish to export or import FIELD DELIM
167. d to the current file from the pointing file must be cross referenced If the POINTER TO A FILE field is located in a Subfile then the whole file must be cross referenced by the pointer To use a Backward Extended Pointer you must make a relational jump from the current file to the file in question enter the name of the file pointing to the current file followed by a colon Once you make the March 2013 61 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation relational jump to the backwards pointer linked file specify which fields elements to access in that file Returning to the situation mentioned above within the RADIOLOGY EXAM file there is a field called EXAMINEE pointing back to our PATIENT file That EXAMINEE pointer field is cross referenced You want to list the EXAM DATE field from the RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries that point back to a patient From the PATIENT file enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME N S1 THEN PRINT FIELD RADIOLOGY EXAM Relational Jump By RADIOLOGY EXAM do you mean the RADIOLOGY EXAM File pointing via its EXAMINEE Field YES Enter THEN PRINT RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD EXAM DATE THEN PRINT RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD Enter THEN PRINT FIELD Enter As indicated by this example you did not have to specify the EXAMINEE field That field was identified because it is a field in the RADIOLOGY EXAM file that points back to the current file The following is the ou
168. d will fail When you are ready to build an EXTRACT template you must select the Create Extract Template option Using this option you will identify not only the field you wish to extract from the source file but also its corresponding field in the destination file The EXTRACT template is the only type of PRINT template used in the Update Destination File option Building an EXTRACT template requires entering valid field numbers or field names at the EXTRACT FIELD prompt Since Fileman stores EXTRACT templates in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 this option uses the term PRINT TEMPLATE instead of EXTRACT TEMPLATE in the dialogue For each extract field that you identify in the source file at the MAP TO field prompt enter the destination file field name or field number that will receive the data Only those fields defined in the EXTRACT template will appear in the destination file 260 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Keep in mind that the value of each field in an extracted record is tested against the INPUT transform of its destination field If any value fails its destination field s INPUT transform the extract for the entire record will fail Make sure the INPUT transforms on the destination fields are appropriate for the data you will be extracting i NOTE If you are extracting a Subrecord using the EXTRACT DIAXU entry point and its FILING LEVEL parameter and a value fails the INPUT tr
169. dos srt seu et obs ditis 164 Create a Traditional Cross reference sese 165 Delete a Traditional Cross referenices a eise enr eet e HR 166 New Style Eege 166 Edit a New Style Cross reference ccsccsssssssscsscrssensenscessseeneneenens 170 Create a New Style Cross reference eeeeeeen nentes 171 Delete a New Style Cross reference eese 172 Ifeisioiiiii D ai 173 Limits on Re indexing Piles use censet bt rent 176 CH EN ER 177 gleef Ga R 177 OUTPUT EE BOLI Ee 181 Uneditable E set etse eiat tei atq bai aste dissi ta 182 Mandatory Required Field Check eee 182 E e EMEN 182 Create Eeer 184 Edita Keys T M 185 IRIS 186 Verify a ER 187 Moving Data Around eege 189 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools estre eedA eer 189 What Applications Can You Exchange Data With 189 How Data is Moved between Appltcatoms sese 190 Dependency on Correct Data Communication 190 Data PORA eed ti eue uade guam tati put edle Leva ele tbid 191 Delimited Data Format erbe Aub 191 Quoted Fields in Delimited Format 192 Fixed Length Data FoEftato ost osade ipod rima ehe eie ebd 192 How to Export Data si cine e cribit adip ste sepu riii 193 Make Sure a FOREIGN FORMAT File Entry is Available 194 Select Fields tor Re 195 Create Export Templat
170. e Enter Keys defined on file 716026 A PRIMARY KEY Uniqueness Index C Field s 1 NAME 7 01 2 SSN 4 02 Choose V Verify E Edit D Delete C Create EDIT Which Key do you wish to edit A Enter You will then be taken into Screen Mode i e Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the key Enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt for additional help Delete a Key The following dialogue shows how to delete a key NOTE You are also given the option of deleting the Uniqueness Index of the key Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILITY OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT lt Enter gt Select Subfile lt Enter gt 186 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Keys defined on file 716026 A PRIMARY KEY Uniqueness Index C Field s 1 NAME 01 2 SSN 4 02 Choose V Verify E Edit D Delete C Create DELETE Which Key do you wish to delete A Enter Are you sure you want to delete the Key No Y Key A of File 16026 deleted Do you want to delete the C Uniqueness Index 6 on File 16026 previously used by Key A of File 716026 YES Index definition deleted Removing old index DONE Verify a Key When you verify the integrity of a key Fileman checks that all fields in the key have values are not null and that those field valu
171. e different DATA TYPE field values DATA TYPE field values of destination field should be FREE TEXT 2 FREE TEXT if internal form of data is moved MUMPS MUMPS Multiples Multiples Backward Multiples Pointers Here are additional guidelines that you must follow while creating your destination file Ifyou are extracting a SET OF CODES type field and you are mapping it to a FREE TEXT type field use a maximum length of the same or greater than length as the longest external value in the SET OF CODES field If you are mapping the SET OF CODES type field to a SET OF CODES type field create the corresponding field in the destination file using the same specifications as the extract field Ifyou are extracting DATA TYPE field values of any of the following o FREE TEXT o DATE TIME 252 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual o NUMERIC o WORD PROCESSING o MUMPS Create the corresponding field in the destination file using the same specifications as the extract field If you are extracting a Multiple type field create the corresponding field in the destination file as a Multiple type field Multiples in the source file are moved to Multiples in the destination file following the DATA TYPE field value recommendations The structure of the Multiple in the destination file should be the same as that in the source file down to the lowest level Multiple that you extract When extracting data
172. e N mbets ien ere Ee 20 The Data DICHOHdf yos mos ditutdenioetretas tosta band acteurs 21 Bield ei Ee EE 22 Iatemoband E 24 Afi eelere 24 Record Numbers cratere berti ei eei ecu to erbe Ras EE 25 Thes 00r EE 26 Did emt Duett Eeer 27 Pointers and Variable Pointers eege 28 Dates en 29 EE RE 30 Chapter Eisterreich 32 List Piles AUrbutes ClO EE 32 Brief ata DIGHOPBIEY Leere notat acie bnnc tala esie e iets 33 Condensed Data Dictioriaty oit retener deed 35 Standard and Modified Standard Data Dictionaries 38 Standard En EEN 38 Modified Standard Formegt E 41 Custom Tailored Data Dictionary rette tette reti tee 42 Templates Only E 45 Global E lup ah Soc dea hal telnet dud 45 Indexes and Cross references Only sese 46 IX ie e 47 Map Pointer Relations OUO cn er exire het sees oo lube retirees 47 Check Fix DD Structure Option 49 Find Pointers into a File ODEPODQ desine retorno id 51 Chapter Relational Navigations iorsin ii tato a 53 Simple Extended Pintet sssr iri e dessine 55 Simple Extended Pointer Syntax Short form 56 Simple Extended Pointer Syntax Long Form 56 Relational Query Example iet erigere esten p e neci teet 57 COMPUTED Field Example sedisse bereitet ensem uenerit 57 How to Navigate With a Variable Pointer Field 58 Relational Jumps Across Files
173. e Option ren ihrer eis 198 Choose Entries Export RE 201 Export EE 202 What Device to Send Export Data To eee 203 Sending Export Data to a Host P1l6 s ee aie te eet efe te 204 Sample OUT UIE supo ari can tet Mast tied or mearnsii hue 204 Special Considerations Exporting Numbers sess 205 Special Considerations Mulipl sits eisene eege Sege hr eed 206 Data Flattening Vd iso sten bureau debite ud tasa tcb I OUR a 206 No More Than One Multiple at Any One File Level 206 Sorte with Multple8u secet semet ie inan hod et ai tei o ve 207 About EXPORT ee itd as du tUi au tdt ad t bec 207 How to Import Data e ecacimdac Ghia aaa 208 Generate ASCII S urce FILE oe epo nr bebe abend 208 Specify Data Format Source File and Destination File 208 Match Source to Destination Fields 210 Rin e IS OPE d ciao hasc o petenda este echt reet ca ord 212 Importing Data Into Multiples cine tte teeth hi c ED ES ts 214 Completeness of Subfile Entries e eettens 215 Importing EN oodd ob Coh to ed netu eter 215 Foreign FORMATS iion Cox olov ee De tate EAE 216 FOREIGN FORMAT File Attributes Reference 216 TO RE RT H KAN stc toten pedore dard av test t eue 217 SEND LAST ERR E ER KEE 218 RECORD DELIMTITER deeg Se ere t adt etii ries 218 RECORD LENGTH FIXED ee ge 219 MAXIMUM OUTPUT BERG 220 NEED FOREIGN FIELD NAMIS entorno rne atn 220 Q
174. e Template Edit option to associate a particular PRINT template with a SORT template Thus whenever that SORT template is invoked in the Print File Entries option the associated PRINT template will be used by default with ro FIRST PRINT FIELD prompt being displayed to the user Select Utility Functions Option TEMPLATE Edit MODIFY WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter Select TEMPLATE File SORT template Select SORT TEMPLATE XUUFAA Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the template as shown below TEMPLATE NAME XUUFAA DATE LAST MODIFIED JUL 1 2007 DATE LAST USED JAN 29 2013 READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS USER Rm DESCRIPTION 8 March 2013 Chapter 1 Templates Revisited Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual PRINT TEMPLATE XUUFAA Sort Fields on Next Page Exit Save Next Page Refresh AI Enter a command or followed by a caption to jump to a specific field COMMAND NWE Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Editing SORT template fields is particularly tricky however most SORT templates have only three or so sort levels Here is an example of the second screen of a SORT template using the Template Edit option Editing Sort Template XUUFAA INSERT lt File 200 gt lt F1 gt H Help SORT BY DATE TIME OF ATT
175. e VISTA software applications to allow access to one development domain by another VISTA software developers are allowed to use internal entry points APIs or other software specific features that are not available to the general programming public Any software developed for use in the VISTA environment is required to adhere to this standard as such it applies to vendor products developed within the boundaries of DBA assigned development domains e g MUMPS AudioFax An IA defines the attributes and functions that specify access The DBA maintains and records all IAs in the Integration Agreement database on FORUM Content can be viewed using the DBA menu or the Health Systems Design amp Development s Web page The number used to identify an entry within a file Every record has a unique internal entry number Often abbreviated as IEN March 2013 Glossary KERNEL KEY LOOKUP M ANSI STANDARD MENU TEXT MUMPS March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual A VISTA software package that functions as an intermediary between the host operating system and VISTA application packages Kernel includes installation menu security and device services A group of fields that taken collectively uniquely identifies a record in a file or subfile All fields in a key must have values The term simple key refers to keys that are composed of only one field the term compound key refers to keys that are composed of mo
176. e file number The SEARCH SORT and PRINT templates used in the extract activity For Fileman 20 0 and later the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains data about both archiving and extract activities A file can have only one active activity at a time either an archiving activity or an extract activity You can only select an extract activity from the Extract Tool options When you use the Inquire to File Entries option the word EXTRACT will appear for all extract activities Extract Steps The order of the options on the Extract Tool submenu reflects the sequence of steps in which you ordinarily perform your extract activity To access to the Extract Tool options start at the Other Options submenu Here s a sample of the dialogue that you will encounter Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS Select OTHER OPTION EXTRACT DATA TO FILEMAN FILE Select EXTRACT OPTION ANSWER WITH EXTRACT OPTION NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM SELECT ENTRIES TO EXTRACT ADD DELETE SELECTED ENTRIES PRINT SELECTED ENTRIES MODIFY DESTINATION FILE CREATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE UPDATE DESTINATION FILE PURGE EXTRACTED ENTRIES CANCEL EXTRACT SELECTION VALIDATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE VO OO 10YU1I 4 C N20 S Select Entries to Extract Option 1 of 9 The Select Entries to Extract option initiates the extract activity In this option the entries are selected and stored in a template and an entry in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file is created Entries are selected in the same m
177. e illustrates how to create a FILEGRAM type template OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE FIRST SEND CHANGE FIELD You can enter ALL at this prompt if you want to include all fields in the file in your filegram ALL can also be used in existing file navigation paths Enter at this prompt to get a listing of existing FILEGRAM type templates for the selected file Here two question marks requests a list of the fields in the file CHOOSE FROM 01 NAME VERSION TAG ROUTINE CHANGE REPORTER multiple DATE CHANGED PROGRAMMER BUG OR FEATURE PURPOSE DESCRIPTION word processing kA O0 o0 10YU i C NJ H mme In the example that follows the PROGRAMMER field is a pointer to the NEW PERSON file 200 FIRST SEND CHANGE FIELD 1 lt Enter gt VERSION THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 3 lt Enter gt ROUTINE THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 4 lt Enter gt CHANGE THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 5 lt Enter gt REPORTER multiple FIRST SEND REPORTER SUB FIELD 01 THEN SEND REPORTER SUB FIELD lt Enter gt THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 6 lt Enter gt DATE CHANGED THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 7 lt Enter gt PROGRAMMER March 2013 271 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 13 Filegrams THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 11 Enter DESCRIPTION word processing THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD Enter STORE FILEGRAM LOGIC IN TEMPLATE ZZTEST FILEGRAM Are you adding ZZTEST FILEGRAM as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No Y
178. e person who selected this option the archival activity number an index of all archived entries and the search criteria used during the Select Entries to Archive process etc 2 It will build an index of all archived entries and write this index at the beginning of the archived file An item in the index contains the 01 value of the entry along with all PRIMARY KEY and Identifier values for that entry W NOTE The PRIMARY KEY is available as of Version 22 0 3 It will prompt for Archive Device Label information This information will usually represent some naming convention that Systems Managers use as physical label for devices such as tape If using a disk file the full disk file name will be presented as a default This device label information along with the index printed on the Archive Activity report should be useful in locating an archived entry and the device to which it was archived 4 Lastly this option will move archive data to permanent storage March 2013 289 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving Permanent storage is considered any sequential storage media like SDP VMS file magnetic tape or disk data set You can send to more than one permanent storage location without having to recreate the archiving activity When the archived data is moved to permanent storage every line contained in the temporary storage word processing field is simply read and then written to a sequential medium The sta
179. e produced if an entire package or a large related group of files were mapped NOTE You must have DD access to the PACKAGE file 9 4 and to the files chosen at the Add FILE prompt The output consists of three columns The middle column has the target file or files each surrounded by a box This is the file or group of files that you asked to be mapped To the left in the first column are the files and fields that point to the target file An abbreviated description of the field is shown To the right in the last column are any files that are pointed to by the target file The output s heading contains brief descriptions of the codes used A possible output for the PATIENT file is shown below File Package PATIENT FILE Date MAY 31 1991 48 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual FILE POINTER FILE POINTER FIELD TYPE POINTER FIELD FILE POINTED TO L Laygo S File not in set N Normal Ref C Xref Truncated m Multiple v Variable Pointer ADMISSIONS 16999 16026 PATIENT CLIENT N S L gt RELIGION gt RELIGION v PROVIDER gt PERSON gt PROVIDER This output shows that the CLIENT field in the ADMISSIONS file points to the PATIENT file LAYGO additions are allowed and the ADMISSIONS file is not in the set of files being mapped Further the RELIGION field in the PATIENT file points to the RELIGION file and the PROVIDER
180. e record will ignore the no re index restriction which includes the following APIs EN DIK EN14DIK EN2 DIK IX DIK IX1 DIK IX2 DIK A cross reference will be re indexed if it is specifically named in an API 176 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual call regardless of whether it is marked Do Not Re Index which includes the following APIs ENALL DIK ENALL2 DIK WR REF For more information on these APIs see the Fileman Programmer Manual Traditional regular cross references e g B and C cross references will always be re indexed and cannot be marked Do Not Re Index All other cross references can be marked Do Not Re Index because re indexing them might cause problems The following cross reference types can be marked Do Not Re Index All New Style cross references Bulletin cross references MUMPS cross references Trigger cross references To mark a cross reference Do Not Re Index use the Cross Reference a Field or File option DIXREF under the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY CAUTION Do Not Re Index can only be undone by KILLing the NOREINDEX node in the DD REF For more information on the Cross Reference a Field or File option see the Cross Reference a Field or File section INPUT Transform Syntax If you have programmer access you will be able to edit a field s INPUT transform or syntax checker March 2013 177 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual C
181. e the Trigger Cross References chapter in the Fileman Programmer Manual BULLETIN Whenever a field is updated a MailMan message is sent notifying specified users that an update has occurred The Bulletin cross reference is only available when Fileman is installed with MailMan Edit a Traditional Cross reference To edit a Traditional cross reference identify the field or subfield you wish to edit Fileman will display the type of cross references on the field and offer you the choices of Edit Delete or Create Select Edit at this prompt and you will have the opportunity to edit or add a No Deletion message and to enter a description of the cross reference Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional Enter 164 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select FIELD 01 Enter NAME CURRENT CROSS REFERENCE IS REGULAR B INDEX OF FILE Choose E Edit D Delete C Create E NO DELETION MESSAGE NO DON T DELETE THIS X REF This FREE TEXT message indicates that the cross reference cannot be deleted As long as a message is retained the cross reference cannot be deleted The user will see this message whenever an attempt is made to delete the cross reference DESCRIPTION 1 gt Used for look up on and sorting by name
182. e the following dialogue for canceling an archival activity Select ARCHIVE OPTION CANCEL ARCHIVAL SELECTION Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY CHANGE Enter 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING Are you sure you want to CANCEL this ARCHIVING ACTIVITY NO YES gt gt gt DONE lt lt lt Find Archived Entries The Find Archived Entries option scans an archive file and retrieves an archive entry or entries that matches the NAME field 01 and or the PRIMARY KEY and or Identifier field s of the requested entry On the prompts for lookup values and on the resulting report PRIMARY KEY and Identifier fields are both called Identifiers The information contained in the archived entry is printed in CAPTIONED format field name field number value This option should only be used with tapes or files archived under Fileman 19 0 or later NOTE The PRIMARY KEY is available as of Fileman 22 0 Several requests for archived entries can be made at a time An id next to a prompt indicates an Identifier PRIMARY KEY or Specifier field One set of all the prompts makes one request The matching process is dependent on the presence or absence of an index on the archive file or tape The matching process for archive files or tapes March 2013 293 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving with no index can be more time consuming since it has to read the entire archived file to dete
183. earching archived file Formatting found entries Press RETURN to continue or F to exit Enter ARCHIVE RETRIEVAL LIST AUG 30 1992 PAGE 1 REQUEST 1 PROGRAMMER FMPROGRAMMER 2 ARCHIVE FILE CHANGE 16000 LOOKUP VALUE 01 330 IDENTIFIERS VERSION 1 17 09 PROGRAMMER 7 FMPROGARMMER 30 FIELDS FIELD NAME NO 01 330 FIELD NAME VERSION 1 17 09 MATCHES FOUND 1 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY File The status of an archiving activity is displayed in the listing of activities when a question mark is entered at most of the Archiving options You can also use the Inquire to File Entries option on the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 1 11 to obtain information about past or pending archiving activities The amount of information you receive depends on the status of the archiving activity In summary the information contained in this file describes who archived status of the archive when entries were archived the number of items archived name of the file archived archiving activity internal entry number and the SEARCH and PRINT templates used in archiving If an archiving activity is purged the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains the purge and archive date and the person who did the purge Beginning with Fileman 20 0 the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains data about both archiving and extract activities A file can have only one active activity at a time either an archiving activity or an extract ac
184. ecords are added or edited Exactly one key in a file must be designated the PRIMARY KEY All other keys are SECONDARY KEYs While Fileman enforces the integrity of both primary and SECONDARY KEYs the PRIMARY KEY is Fileman s principal means of looking up entries in the file Fileman will prompt for lookup values for each of the PRIMARY KEY fields and will consider a record a match only if it matches all of the lookup values The 01 field should be a part of the PRIMARY KEY Keys are also useful when transporting data to another system using the Kernel Installation and Distribution KIDS system Since the key fields uniquely identify a record it is easy to decide whether a record being brought in to the target system needs to be merged to a record that already exists or whether it is a new record Associated with each key is a Uniqueness Index a regular New Style cross reference The Uniqueness Index helps Fileman enforce KEY INTEGRITY and is used during lookup When you create a new key you can have Fileman create a new Uniqueness Index automatically for you or you can select an existing index to be the Uniqueness Index of the key The index you select though must meet the following criteria March 2013 183 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities t must be a regular New Style cross reference e t must be used for lookup and sorting that is it cannot have a name that starts with the letter A
185. ed at this point in the text 304 March 2013 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual INDENT arg Causes the text that follows it to be indented arg number of spaces from the left margin SETTAB arg1 arg2 arg3 Sets tab positions for the text that follows it In subsequent lines the first TAB encountered will cause indentation to column position arg1 characters from the left margin The second TABI encountered will cause indentation to column position arg2 and so on If any SETTAB arg is negative the text following the corresponding TAB will be right justified so that the rightmost column of that text will fall in the column number that is the absolute value of the SETTAB arg If a SETTAB arg is the literal C i e SETTAB C I the text following the corresponding tab setting will be centered CENTER arg Causes the arg to be centered TAB Causes the text to start printing at predetermined indents The default column settings are 5 10 15 20 which can be reset with SETTAB TAB at the end of a line causes that line to be printed as is no word wrapping March 2013 305 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques I TAB nl Overrides any SETTAB specification for the text that follows it and causes tabbing to the n column over from the left margin Output is right justified on the n column if n is negative Fo
186. ed pointer syntax also called long form is shown below expr file element OR expr IN file FILE element 56 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Expr is any expression that applies to the file that is your current context File is the name of any file Element is any element field in the file named by File For example since ATTENDING PHYSICIAN is a pointer field in the current file to the DOCTOR file the long form of extended pointer syntax to reference the PHONE NUMBER field in the DOCTOR file would be ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DOCTOR PHONE NUMBER OR ATTENDING PHYSICIAN IN file DOCTOR PHONE NUMBER Relational Query Example You can use simple extended pointers to make relational queries For example suppose you want to print all patients who are older than their attending physicians A field in the PATIENT file called ATTENDING PHYSICIAN points to the DOCTOR file Given a field PT AGE in the PATIENT file and a field DR AGE in the DOCTOR file you can use the Print File Entries option and then enter the information that follows OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SORT BY NAME PT AGE gt ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DR AGE WITHIN PT AGE gt ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DR AGE SORT BY lt Enter gt FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME Here the simple extended pointer ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DR AGE is used to make a comparison between values in
187. eld Value Stuffing In the Enter or Edit File Entries option you can follow the or specifiers with computed expressions The expression is evaluated for the entry you are inputting and used as a variable stuff value Suppose you want to put the current contents of a patient s NEXT OF KIN field into the BENEFICIARY field with a notation that this value is UNVERIFIED for all patients who do not have a value in the BENEFICIARY field The dialogue would look like this Select OPTION ENTER OR EDIT FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD BENEFICIARY NEXT OF KIN UNVERIFIED THEN EDIT FIELD Enter Select PATIENT NAME LOOP EDIT ENTRIES BY BENEFICIARY WITHIN BENEFICIARY EDIT ENTRIES BY Enter This example uses two on the fly expressions one in answer to the EDIT ENTRIES BY prompt which is essentially a SORT BY for looping and one as the forced default value for the BENEFICIARY input field BENEFICIARY is a Boolean true false computed expression that means The BENEFICIARY value equals null March 2013 83 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions After the previous dialogue the names of such patients would be printed out and their BENEFICIARY value would automatically be set equal to their NEXT OF KIN field value concatenated with a space followed by UNVERIFIED OUTPUT Transforms OUTPUT transforms change the way a field is displ
188. eleted Using the caret key for jumping is not allowed for identifier fields in the Enter or Edit File Entries option when adding a new entry If you attempt to use the caret key in a field designated as an identifier in an edit session the entry just created is deleted Since the SSN field in our example is mandatory and an identifier this ensures that every patient in our PATIENT file will have an SSN recorded As mentioned above you could make the AGE AT ONSET subfield an identifier for the multiple DIAGNOSIS field as follows Select UTILITY OPTION IDENTIFIER Select FIELD DIAGNOSIS multiple Select DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD AGE AT ONSET Want to make AGE AT ONSET an Identifier NO Y Want to display AGE AT ONSET whenever a lookup is done on an entry in the DIAGNOSIS file YES N As a result of this dialogue every time a new DIAGNOSIS for a patient is entered the AGE AT ONSET would be asked The AGE AT ONSET would not however be automatically displayed at subsequent DIAGNOSIS lookups To drop a field s status as an identifier simply return to the Identifier option select the field and answer YES to the question Field is already an Identifier want to delete it NO Y Re Index File Use the Re Index File option DIRDEX when you create a new cross reference on a field that already contains data and you want to re index the file The following dialogue is presented when re indexing a fi
189. emplate type a two screen Screenman form is used This allows you to edit templates in Screen Mode The first screen of the pair allows you to change the access privileges of the template you are editing READ ACCESS This access controls which class of users De DUZ 0 get to use the template WRITE ACCESS This access controls which class of users gets to change the template The first screen also allows you to enter a DESCRIPTION for the purpose of documenting what the template does This DESCRIPTION will be printed on a TEMPLATES ONLY data dictionary list and in the TEMPLATES section of other data dictionary listings The second screen allows you to edit the contents of a template In order to jump to the second screen from the first screen in a Screen Mode you need only press the lt F1 gt lt ArrowDown gt from wherever you are on the current screen March 2013 5 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 1 Templates Revisited WR NOTE The first screen provides the usual kind of field by field help in response to entering a single question mark all help messages are displayed in the lower portion of the screen Also entering lt F1 gt H will provide general Screenman help The second screen however does not provide help on individual entries Thus if you are building a complicated new template from scratch it is still a good idea to use the traditional interactive Scrolling Mode with the Enter or Edit
190. en 278 Fixed Leneth Data EOfmat a eade odbitist et bo dudo usitata e 192 Forced Lookups Using INUTIDGES 5 eie ite eite Ie Drei e iens 138 FOREIGN FIELD NAMES E 220 FOREIGN FORMAT Pile epe cbe e aen een tut e i ines 198 224 225 228 FOREIGN FORMAT ere Field lic c RPM O Exporting Ee 198 FOREIGN FORMAT File 5 44 eese teinte nonno 194 195 217 FOREIGN FORMAT leegen acce ete OR edebat da El EE 216 Foreign Eeer 216 Formatting Text with Word Processing Windows ENEE eebe 301 EUBNGTIONCEH ete oe pte th mte eet noto A eoe RR 75 86 130 Generate Filegram Re EE 268 273 DC MC EA 306 e LR 204 Histogrammi sessed si 5 5 ears eee EE er Re Ct TuS EdUL ds 15 330 March 2013 Index Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Ota EE 15 Igi eases Seth ws Ge vt ies a cee a a ical te 204 215 220 How Data is Moved Between Applicattong sse 190 Se EE EX ER 193 eet 208 Navigate With a Variable Pointer Pied 58 ee o un oec ane aot is AE ssec itia fe to tese dede Am RAUM 173 286 leet 174 175 Import and Export Tooley irese nA n e o ev Ade actes 189 Iniport RE Ee DE 208 IMPORT Templates uscite eio te ties aoa NO bad tuere eiat 209 211 212 Import LOOM EE 190 208 214 Importing RE ni ee Completeness of Subfile DEET enee 215 Field Selection PAGE IMPORT Template eere 209 Foreign eria er KSEE 209 From VMS lee 215 Internal EE 209 Source Pilen
191. ence whether the internal and external values are the same or whether they are different As we will see in chapter 6 super users can ask Fileman for the internal value of a field then use that internal value to perform various tasks An Expert Super User As a super user you are an expert on files Even if the concepts in this advanced manual are new to you we re betting that you ve spent a fair amount of time in your organization s files You know what s in those files how they work and how you can make them disgorge reports for you And you also know where those files fall short You know which files are plagued by duplicate records that you have to clean up which required fields shouldn t be required which non required fields should be required 24 March 2013 Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual and which fields really ought to be indexed because you sort on them all the time Since you have all this expertise don t keep it to yourself Share it with your IT department Some of the changes you need are fairly simple Some honestly are fairly complex but either way it won t hurt to ask If your site s programmers know what you need what kind of things could make the system work better for the users then they re in a better position to do something about it Even if they can t quite do the exact thing that you want they may be able to do something to improve the situation But you
192. ernal entry number of the record The one field that must be present for every file and file entry It is also called the NAME field At a file s creation the 01 field is given the label NAME This label can be changed Brief online notices that are issued to users as they complete a cycle through the menu system Alerts are designed to provide interactive notification of pending computing activities such as the need to reorder supplies or review a patient s clinical test results Along with the alert message is an indication that the View Alerts common option should be chosen to take further action American National Standards Institute The M formerly known as MUMPS programming language is a standard recognized by the American National Standard Institute ANSI M stands for Massachusetts Utility Multi programming System Program calls provided for use by application programmers APIs allow programmers to carry out standard computing activities without needing to duplicate utilities in their own software APIs also further DBA goals of system integration by channeling activities such as adding new users through a limited number of callable entry points VISTA APIs fall into March 2013 Glossary ARRAY AT SIGN AUDIT TRAIL AUDITING BACKWARD POINTER March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual the following three categories The first category is Supported API These are callable routines which are
193. ernel s menu system you need the DDXP DEFINE key to use the Define Foreign File Format option The following is an example of making a new format from an existing one The Define Foreign File Format option is the first one on the Data Export to Foreign Format submenu Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS Select OTHER OPTION DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION DEFINE FOREIGN FILE FORMAT You are first asked for the name of a format If you want to create a new format from scratch enter a new name You will be presented with the Screenman form used to define a Foreign Format e NOTE Whenever you are asked to choose a FOREIGN FORMAT you can reply with either the format s NAME or one of its OTHER NAMES Here an existing format s name is given Select FOREIGN FORMAT 123 IMPORT NUMBERS 123 IMPORT NUMBERS foreign format has been used to create an Export Template Therefore its definition cannot be changed This format has already been used to create an EXPORT template Since that template relies on the information in the FOREIGN FORMAT file s entry at the time the template was created you cannot modify this format Instead you are given the option of seeing what is in the format 228 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Do you want to see the contents of 123 IMPORT NUMBERS format NO YES NAME 123 IMPORT NUMBERS FI
194. ers writing routines for Fileman always use the record number to select a record So why don t we have users select records by numbers Wouldn t that be more reliable Not really In most cases record numbers are meaningless and arbitrary The first record entered is record 1 the second is record 2 and so on Forcing users to choose records based on what order somebody typed them in is just mean More importantly it would actually lead to more errors What nurse is going to remember that his patient is number 12391 in the PATIENT file He wants to select his patient by name with other identifiers such as birthdate and ID number to help him get the right patient Far from forcing users to select records by their number Fileman is actually set up to hide record numbers from users One of the fundamental principles of VISTA is that you should never make a user pick a record using an artificial key such as the record number when there are better methods available And there are almost always better methods available The 001 Field There are times when the record number might be useful to users We ll talk about a couple of examples in a bit If a file designer feels that the record number is something the users might want to see they can include a 001 field Not all files have a 001 field in fact most of them do not The purpose of the 001 field is to expose the record number to the user Although it is called a field t
195. ery one of these attributes CHOOSE FROM 001 NUMBER 01 LABEL 1 TITLE 12 VARIABLE POINTER multiple 2 SPECIFIER 23 LENGTH 24 DECIMAL DEFAULT 25 TYPE 26 COMPUTE ALGORITHM 27 SUB FIELDS 28 MULTIPLE VALUED 29 DEPTH OF SUB FIELD 3 POINTER 4 GLOBAL SUBSCRIPT LOCATION 5 INPUT TRANSFORM 1 CROSS REFERENCE multiple 1 1 AUDIT 1 2 AUDIT CONDITION 2 OUTPUT TRANSFORM 3 HELP PROMPT 4 XECUTABLE HELP 8 READ ACCESS OPTIONAL 8 5 DELETE ACCESS OPTIONAL 9 WRITE ACCESS OPTIONAL 9 01 COMPUTED FIELDS USED 10 SOURCE 11 DESTINATION multiple 12 POINTER SCREEN 12 1 CODE TO SET POINTER SCREEN 12 2 EXPRESSION FOR POINTER SCREEN 20 GROUP multiple 50 DATE FIELD LAST EDITED 999 TRIGGERED BY POINTER multiple TYPE IN FRONT OF NUMERIC VALUED FIELD TO SORT FROM HI TO LO TYPE IN FRONT OF FIELD NAME TO GET SUBTOTALS BY THAT FIELD TO PAGE FEED ON EACH FIELD VALUE TO GET RANKING NUMBER TO SUPPRESS SUB HEADER TO FORCE SAVING SORT TEMPLATE TYPE TEMPLATE NAME IN BRACKETS TO SORT BY PREVIOUS SEARCH RESULTS SORT BY LABEL Enter START WITH LABEL FIRST Enter March 2013 43 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities FIRST PRINT ATTRIBUTE ANSWER WITH ATTRIBUTE NUMBER OR LABEL DO YOU WANT THE ENTIRE 36 ENTRY ATTRIBUTE LIST N Enter At this point you indicate the specific attributes of the
196. es records are separated by a carriage return or by a line feed and a carriage return This is the same as pressing the Enter key at the end of a line The Export Tool automatically puts this separator after each record every record begins on a new line of output You do not need to put the ASCII values for carriage return and line feed in this field Some applications may also require that additional characters be placed after each record If this is the case put those characters into the RECORD DELIMITER field The requirements for coding the field are the same as for the FIELD DELIMITER field RECORD LENGTH FIXED A second common way to import and export data in addition to using delimited data is with fixed length records In a fixed length record each field has a predetermined constant data length For example a name field might be 30 characters long The name FMPATNT 10 is only 10 characters long thus 20 spaces would be added to the field value to fill the required 30 characters The next field s value would begin in the thirty first column If you want to import or export fixed length records answer YES to this field At the time that the EXPORT template is created or an import is done the user will be prompted for the length of each field in the target or source file During export in most cases data will be truncated when the length of a March 2013 219 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Exp
197. es taken together are unique across all records in the file Any problems are reported You can also save the entries that violate KEY INTEGRITY in a template Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILITY OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT Enter Select Subfile Enter Keys defined on file 716026 A PRIMARY KEY Uniqueness Index KEYA Field s 1 NAME 2 01 2 SSN 02 Choose V Verify E Edit D Delete C Create V Enter ERIFY Which Key do you wish to verify A Enter STORE THESE ENTRY ID S IN TEMPLATE Enter March 2013 187 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities DEVICE HOME Enter Telnet terminal KEY INTEGRITY CHECK DEC 31 1998 09 23 PAGE 1 Key A 5 File 16026 Uniqueness Index KEYA 6 ENTRY NAME ERROR 1 FMPATIENT 10 Duplicate Key A 5 2 FMPATIENT 10 Duplicate Key A 5 3 FMPATIENT 25 Missing Key Field s SSN 16026 02 In this example records 1 and 2 have the same key and record 3 is missing a value for SSN field 02 188 March 2013 Moving Data Around Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Moving Data Around Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools If you want to use an application like Microsoft Excel to manipulate data stored in a Fileman file you need some way to exchange that data between Fileman and your application Fileman provides the Import and Export Tools for this purpose
198. ess information about the export The data type length and foreign field name are stored in the EXPORT FIELD Multiple 100 REF For additional information see the data dictionary for the PRINT TEMPLATE file FILE TRAILER You can use this field like the FILE HEADER field The literal or M code will be output after the exported data Variables Available for Programmer Use Some of the fields in the FOREIGN FORMAT file allow you to enter M code if you have programmer access You may want to use data stored in the EXPORT template entry at the time the export is performed You may also want to access information in the FOREIGN FORMAT file entry used for the export Two variables are available for use in the M code entered in FOREIGN FORMAT file fields DDXPXTNO The internal entry number of the EXPORT template in the PRINT TEMPLATE file DDXPFFNO The internal entry number of the Foreign Format in the FOREIGN FORMAT file Consult the data dictionaries of the two files for fields that may contain useful information about either the format or the specific export itself The EXPORT FIELD Multiple in the PRINT TEMPLATE file might be of particular interest This Multiple contains information about each field being exported March 2013 225 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Print Format Documentation Option Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Data Export to Foreign Format
199. estination file You will need to ensure that the DATA TYPE field value of the field in the destination file is compatible with the DATA TYPE field value of the extract field The compatibility of the DATA TYPE field values is validated when the fields are specified during template creation The following table recommends the DATA TYPE field values to use depending on the DATA TYPE field value of the extract field DATA TYPE DATA TYPE Field Value of Destination Field Field Value of Extract Field DATE TIME 1 DATE TIME internal form of data is moved 2 FREE TEXT external form of data is moved NUMERIC NUMERIC or FREE TEXT SET OF CODES 1 FREE TEXT if external form of the SET OF CODES is moved 2 SET OF CODES if internal form of the SET OF CODES is moved User must make sure the SET OF CODES fields are identical in both the source file and the destination file data dictionaries FREE TEXT FREE TEXT March 2013 251 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool DATA TYPE DATA TYPE Field Value of Destination Field Field Value of Extract Field WORD WORD PROCESSING PROCESSING COMPUTED FREE TEXT DATE TIME or NUMERIC POINTER TO A 1 NUMERIC if internal form of data is moved 2 Non pointer field type FREE TEXT NUMERIC or DATE TIME if external form of data is moved VARIABLE 1 Non pointer field type if external form of data is POINTER moved if the 01 fields of the pointed to files hav
200. estions are asked about Multiple valued fields SHOULD USER SEE AN ADDING NEW ENTRY MESSAGE FOR NEW ENTRIES Y N Answering NO here means that the new Diagnosis or whatever the Multiple is named gets added without a verification prompt being asked HAVING ENTERED OR EDITED ONE SHOULD USER BE ASKED ANOTHER Y N Answering YES means that the user is prompted to put in several diagnoses one right after the other NO means that the user is not prompted to enter a second value Making a Field Mandatory For all DATA TYPE field values except COMPUTED as you create the field you are asked the following IS xxxxxxxx ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO The xxxxxxxx represents the name of the field If you answer YES the user of your file will not be allowed to skip the field without entering data for a particular entry Field Number Sequences It is often useful to sequence the fields so that when you are using the Enter or Edit File Entries option and you ask to edit ALL fields you will see the field questions presented in a natural order If you want to add a CURRENT AGE field to our PATIENT file and place it between DATE OF BIRTH 2 and RELIGION 3 the dialogue would be Select FIELD 2 5 Are you adding a new FIELD No Y 136 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual LABEL CURRENT AGE FIELD NUMBER 2 5 Enter You could have specifie
201. extract activity is file specific not user specific Anyone with 248 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual access to the file and the Extract Tool options can complete or change an existing extract activity When the extracted data is moved to the destination file the source entries in the primary file are blocked from selection e ASubfile cannot be extracted by itself At least one field from every Multiple level above the Subfile must also be extracted If no field is extracted at the next higher level the 01 field at that level will automatically be extracted You may want to extract Identifiers and or KEY fields from the source file to the destination file so that records in the destination file can be uniquely identified An EXTRACT template is the only type of PRINT template that can be used by the Update Destination File option e The ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 41 11 contains a brief history that describes who performed the various extract activity steps and when the steps were completed The extract activity can be canceled at any time before the Purge Extracted Entries option is used The Purge Extracted Entries option deletes all of the source data in the primary file from which you extracted data Selected entries cannot be purged until they have been moved to the destination file Asecond extract from a file cannot be performed until the active extract activity has been comp
202. eys Only data dictionary listing KEY LIST FILE 16026 12 24 98 PAGE 1 PRIMARY KEY A 5 Uniqueness Index KEYA 6 File Field 1 NAME 16026 01 2 SSN 16026 6 Map Pointer Relations Option The Map Pointer Relations option on the Data Dictionary Utilities submenu creates a graphic representation of the pointer relationships between files Files are linked by POINTER TO A FILE and VARIABLE POINTER field types REF These field types are described in the Creating Fields topic in the Creating Files and Fields section March 2013 47 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities You select an application package a file or a group of files to be mapped If you select a package to map you are given the opportunity to exclude a file or files from the map The initial dialogue goes like this Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION MAP POINTER RELATIONS Prints a graph of pointer relations in a database of FileMan files named in the Kernel PACKAGE file 9 4 or given separately Works best with 132 column output Select PACKAGE NAME Enter Enter files to be included Add FILE PATIENT Add FILE Enter Files included 16026 PATIENT Enter name of file group for optional graph header PATIENT FILE DEVICE HOME Enter In this instance only a single file the PATIENT file has been selected for mapping Of course a more useful and complex map would b
203. f a field or a file that identifies an action that should take place when the value of a field is changed Often the action is the placement of the field s value into an index A Traditional cross reference is defined with a specific field A New Style cross reference is a file attribute and can be composed of one or more fields New Style cross references are stored in the INDEX file 11 A characteristic unit of data such as length value or method of representation Fileman field definitions specify data attributes A record of a file s structure its elements fields and their attributes and relationships to other files Often abbreviated as DD A user s authorization to write update edit the data definition for a computer file Also known as DD Access This term refers to the condition of patient records in terms of completeness and correctness It also refers to the process in which a particular patient s data is synchronized at all the sites in which that patient receives care A collection of software that handles the storage retrieval and updating of records in a database A Database Management System DBMS controls redundancy of records and provides the security integrity and data independence of a database A database that contains data collected or entered for all VHA sites 311 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Glossary DBA DBIA DICTIONARY DIRECT MODE UTILITY DOMAIN DUZ DUZ 0 ED
204. f the first and last records imported Here s a sample Import Results report Log for Fileman Data Import Page 1 Import Initiated By 10 FMPATIENT Source File USERS FMPATIENT1 IMPORT DAT Fixed Length NO Delimited By Text Values Quoted NO Values Are External Primary FileMan Destination File NEW PERSON Seq Len Field Name Subfile Name if applicable 1 n a NAME 2 n a STREET ADDRESS 1 3 n a STREET ADDRESS 2 4 n a STREET ADDRESS 3 5 n a CITY 6 n a STATE 7 n a ZIP CODE Error Report Record 4 Rejected March 2013 213 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools The value Illlinois for field STATE in file NEW PERSON is not valid Summary of Import Total Records Read 7 Total Records Filed 6 Total Records Rejected 1 IEN of First Record Filed 209 IEN of Last Record Filed 214 Import Filing Started Jul 16 1996 08 24 36 Import Filing Completed Jul 16 1996 08 24 38 Time of Import Filing 0 00 02 In this example six records were added and one record was not added The record that was not added was the fourth record in the source file It failed due to the misspelled value Illlinois being rejected by the STATE field in the NEW PERSON file 4200 Importing Data Into Multiples CAUTION Incoming Data Should not be Flattened The Import Tool expects that any data bound for a Multiple be contained in the same import record line of data as t
205. fied Standard Data Dictionaries The most complete information about a file is obtained by using the Standard data dictionary format which is the default for the List File Attributes option In addition to detailed information about every field in the file the Standard data dictionary format gives the file access identifiers cross references other files pointing to the file files pointed to by the file and any templates including forms and blocks associated with the file Standard Format Here is a sample data dictionary in Standard format STANDARD DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 1 STORED IN DIZ 16026 1 ENTRY SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX DATA NAME GLOBAL DATA ELEMENT TITLE LOCATION TYPE A sample file containing some of the fields found in a file of patient information in a hospital database DD ACCESS RD ACCESS WR ACCESS 38 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual DEL ACCESS LAYGO ACCESS AUDIT ACCESS CROSS REFERENCED BY NAME B CREATED ON MAR 22 1991 16026 01 NAME INPUT TRANSFORM X LAST EDITED HELP PROMPT in length GROUP CROSS REFERENCE SE X 1 30 DA SE X 1 30 DA ref used to on the value in 16026 1 SEX LAST EDITED GROUP 16026 2 DATE OF BIRTH INPUT TRANSFORM K 2630000 lt X 1600101 gt x LAST EDITED HELP PROMPT 1963 GROUP 0 1 FREE TEXT Required K
206. fields in two different files COMPUTED Field Example Suppose the PATIENT file has an ATTENDING PHYSICIAN field that points to the DOCTOR file The DOCTOR file in turn has a field called SPECIALTY If you want to create a COMPUTED field within the PATIENT March 2013 57 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation file data dictionary that is equivalent to the SPECIALTY field in the DOCTOR file you can define a COMPUTED field as COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION ATTENDING PHYSICIAN SPECIALTY The file does not have to be specified in this case since there is a direct link between the two files through the pointer field This is an example of the short form of the simple extended pointer syntax An equivalent computed expression which explicitly identifies the file is ATTENDING PHYSICIAN IN DOCTOR FILE SPECIALTY This is the long form of the syntax It is long because the file name is included How to Navigate With a Variable Pointer Field If the pointing field is a variable pointer the long form of the extended pointer syntax must be used so that Fileman will know which of the pointed to files to search Here is the syntax vpfield IN file FILE element OR vpfield file element Vpfield is the variable pointer field in the current file file is one of the possible pointed to files and element applies to that pointed to file The following is an example from t
207. fields that you want displayed Here help regarding the print formatting options will be displayed TYPE amp IN FRONT OF FIELD NAME TO GET TOTAL FOR THAT FIELD Ur TO GET COUNT TO GET TOTAL amp COUNT TO GET MAX amp MIN TO FORCE SAVING PRINT TEMPLATE TYPE TEMPLATE NAME IN BRACKETS TO USE AN EXISTING PRINT TEMPLATE YOU CAN FOLLOW FIELD NAME WITH AND FORMAT SPECIFICATION S Now by using either the label or the corresponding number of the attribute you want you select the information you want in your customized data dictionary listing FIRST PRINT ATTRIBUTE LABEL THEN PRINT ATTRIBUTE TYPE THEN PRINT ATTRIBUTE DATE FIELD LAST EDITED THEN PRINT ATTRIBUTE Enter HEADING FIELD SEARCH CUSTOM TAILORED OUTPUT DEVICE Enter You can save the selected attributes in a PRINT template e REF For details see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter in the Fileman User Manual The output will look like this PATIENT FILE CUSTOM TAILORED OUTPUT MAY 31 1991 11 10 PAGE 1 DATE FIELD LABEL TYPE LAST EDITED 44 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual DATE OF BIRTH DATE TIME MAR 22 1991 DIAGNOSIS FREE TEXT NAME FREE TEXT MAR 29 1991 PROVIDER VARIABLE POINTER MAR 22 1991 RELIGION POINTER MAR 22 1991 SEX SET MAR 22 1991 SSN FREE TEXT MAR 22 1991 eo NOTE With the Custom Tailored format in
208. file For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as VARIABLE POINTER you are asked the following questions Select FIELD PROVIDER Are you adding PROVIDER as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF PROVIDER VARIABLE POINTER Select VARIABLE POINTER PROVIDER You answer the Select VARIABLE POINTER prompt with the name or number of an existing file Are you adding PROVIDER as a new VARIABLE POINTER No X VARIABLE POINTER PROVIDER Enter MESSAGE Staff Provider ORDER 1 PREFIX S SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY NO The MESSAGE is part of the online help associated with the VARIABLE POINTER field when a single question mark is entered during editing In this example the PROVIDER file MESSAGE is associated with Staff Provider The several pointed to files are searched based on their ORDER In this example since the ORDER for the PROVIDER VARIABLE POINTER is one the PROVIDER file is the first file searched The PREFIX field is used to reference a particular pointed to file To see the entries in a particular file you would enter that file s PREFIX followed by a 132 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual period and a question mark at the VARIABLE POINTER s field name e g in this example entering S would give you the option to list the entries in the PROVIDER file If you want to refer to only one of the several p
209. fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname With the first format this function totals the values of the 01 field of a Multiple or file identified by fname The second format totals the values in field The field being totaled must have numeric values Example TOTAL VISIT COST 569 32 VISIT COST is a Multiple Mathematical Functions ABS 104 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual BER Parameters nisa number or an expression with a numeric value Use This mathematical function will return the value of n without a sign it gives the absolute value of n ABS 23 87 23 87 BEIWEEN BETWEEN n1 n2 n3 Parameters nl n2 and n3 are numbers or numeric expressions n1 is the number being tested n2 is one limit for the test n3 is the other limit for the test This Boolean function determines if n1 is within the limits defined by n2 and n3 If n1 is within this range a value of 1 true is returned otherwise 0 false is returned If n1 equals n2 or n3 1 true is returned BETWEEN OCCURRENCES 5 10 gt 0 OCCURRENCES is a field with value 3 BETWEEN 3 10 0 gt 1 MAX MAXI nl and n2 are numbers or numeric expressions This function returns the larger of n1 and n2 Date time field values can be used resulting in the most recent date time being returned
210. g editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With COMPUTED type fields Fileman displays the characteristics of the computed expression in the popup window March 2013 151 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields WR REF The syntax of these expressions is explained fully in the Computed Expressions section Field 4 68 is the RELEASE DATE TIME field The JUST RELEASED field will be TRUE if the RELEASE DATE TIME was less than two days ago e NOTE You can specify this virtual value to be BOOLEAN STRING VALUED DATE VALUED or NUMERIC Only in the last case are the three fields following the TYPE OF RESULT prompt editable POINTER TO A FILE Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the WHO ENTERED field 3 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of POINTER TO A FILE Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD WHO ENTERED You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 13 in File 100 FIELD LABEL WHO ENTERED DATA TYPE POINTER em rm em rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm pm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm em rm rm rm rm rm em rm c rm rm rm rm rm pm rm rm rm rm rm rm rm pm em rm pm mm ml q POINT TO WHICH FILE hi3 pe A
211. g files fields or editing fields in a file are illustrated using Screen Mode File Creation DATE TIME Field SET OF CODES Field FREE TEXT Field WORD PROCESSING Field COMPUTED Field POINTER TO A FILE Field VARIABLE POINTER Field Creating a Multiple Subfields NUMERIC Subfield NOTE These examples assume that the user does not have programmer access REF For explanations of additional capabilities available to the programmer see the Advanced File Definition chapter in the Fileman Programmer Manual File Creation The following example illustrates the file definition dialogue you see when creating a new file using the Modify File Attributes option In this case we will create the ORDER file 100 a standard Fileman file Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Are you adding ORDER as a new FILE No Y FILE NUMBER 99000 100 March 2013 143 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields e SORRY HOLD ON A FreeText NAME Field 01 has been created Select FIELD NAME Fileman prompts you to enter the file name If it is a new file Fileman will ask you to confirm that you want to add a new file The default file number to the left of the e g 99000 is related to a site number that is assigned to your computer when Fileman is initialized This file number is with
212. g instructions Where only a single application is granted permission to use an attribute function of another VISTA package These IAs are granted for special cases transitional problems between versions and release coordination A Private IA is also created by the requesting package based on their examination of the custodian package s features Example one package distributes a patch from another package to ensure smooth installation The ability to use Fileman features that are reserved for application developers Referred to as having the at sign because the at sign is the DUZ 0 value that grants programmer access See Internal Entry Number Changing your current or primary file reference to another file Relational navigation is accomplished by using the extended pointer syntax without specifying a field in the referenced file March 2013 Glossary ROUTINE SAC SACC SCATTERGRAM SEARCH TEMPLATE SECURITY KEY March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Program or a sequence of instructions called by a program that may have some general or frequent use M routines are groups of program lines which are saved loaded and called as a single unit via a specific name Standards and Conventions Through a process of quality assurance all VISTA software is reviewed with respect to SAC guidelines as set forth by the Standards and Conventions Committee SACC VISTA s Standards and Convention
213. ges The Import and Export Tools FIELD DELIMITER fields allow you to specify up to 15 characters to be placed between each field You can directly enter any string of characters except ones that begin with a number or consist of characters that have special meaning when editing Fileman data e g or March 2013 217 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools If your field delimiter begins with one of these restricted characters or consists of an unprintable control character like TAB you can enter the ASCII value of the delimiter When entering the ASCII values always use three digits Thus TAB ASCII 9 becomes 009 and ASCII 64 becomes 064 You can enter up to four ASCII values If more than one is needed separate the values with commas e g 048 094 If you want the user to be prompted for a field delimiter at the time the EXPORT template is being created enter ASK in this field CAUTION Using unprintable control characters ASCII values less than 32 as delimiters may not have the effect you want During either export or import often control characters are intercepted by terminal software communication programs or network links they may not be passed through unaltered as regular printable characters usually are For example ASCII value 5 is interpreted by many terminals as a request for their Answerback Message Thus putting 005 in the FIELD DELIMITER field might
214. grammer will not have that knowledge If you run into a situation where one of the files you use is having an ongoing problem with dangling pointers cropping up you can ask your IT person to turn on auditing for the field or fields involved When auditing is turned on Fileman tracks what got changed when the change was made and who changed it This will help you find out what keeps going wrong March 2013 29 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Because dangling pointers are a problem Fileman has features to help prevent them If a user or super user attempts to move or change a pointed to record Fileman displays a warning and asks the person whether they are sure they want to proceed The person can go ahead and move or change the record anyway but at least they ve been warned Therefore if you ever find somebody who has moved or altered pointed to records don t let them get away with I didn t know They knew They had to know Fileman would have told them Variable Pointers In many ways variable pointers are like standard pointers However they have some unique characteristics that are worth a brief discussion Variable pointers point to more than one file and can select a record from any of them When searching for a record at a variable pointer prompt a user can specify which file they want Fileman to look in but they don t have to If no file is specified Fileman checks each of them in
215. h the DATA TYPE field of DATE TIME You can change this prompt using the Replace With syntax e NOTE This help information is displayed when the user inputs a single question mark when editing this field o NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode 124 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value as DATE TIME in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section NUMERIC Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as NUMERIC requires you to enter the lowest and highest values allowed the maximum number of decimal digits allowed and to state whether dollar values are allowed e g 33 For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as NUMERIC you are asked the following questions Select FIELD AGE AT ONSET Are you adding AGE AT ONSET as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF AGE AT ONSET NUMERIC INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND O INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND 100 IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT Y N NO Enter If you answer YES at the IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT Y N prompt Fileman would allow users to precede input data with a dollar sign and show up to two decimal places MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS 0 Enter WILL AGE AT ONSET FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS AGE AT ONSET ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO
216. hapter 9 File Utilities W REF For a detailed description of the INPUT transform see the Input Transforms section in the Fileman Programmer Manual Edit File The Edit File option available on the Fileman Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY displays the various attributes of a file you specify in Screen Mode i e invokes a Screenman form Here is an example using the Edit File option with the ORDER file 100 in Screen Mode Select Fileman Option UTILITY Functions Verify Fields Cross Reference A Field Identifier Re Index File Input Transform Syntax Edit File Output Transform Template Edit Uneditable Data Mandatory Required Field Check Key Definition Select Utility Functions Option EDIT File MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the file as shown below FILE NAME ORDER DESCRIPTION File 100 Select APPLICATION GROUP DEVELOPER DATA DICTIONARY ACCESS 4 READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS 178 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual ASK OK WHEN LOOKING UP AN ENTRY NO POST SELECTION ACTION CROSS REFERENCE ROUTINE ORD2 COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert DELETE ACCESS LAYGO ACCESS AUDIT ACCESS UNNNEEEENENNI DD AUDIT NO FILE SCREEN LOOK UP PROGRAM You can use
217. haracters long A user with programmer access can also enter M code at this prompt The M code must have a WRITE statement for anything that is to be written to the report SEARCH FOR FIELD Prompt In the Search File Entries option you can answer the SEARCH FOR FIELD prompt with a computed expression If the expression is Boolean i e its value is either true or false you will not be asked the condition of the search because the computed expression itself specifies that condition A user with programmer access can also enter M code at this prompt The M code must set the variable X to whatever is to be compared against the search value SORT BY Prompt In Print or Search File Entries options you can answer the SORT BY prompt with a computed expression If you use a Boolean computed expression you will not be asked for the START WITH parameters A user with programmer access can also enter M code at this prompt The M code must set the variable X to the sort value 82 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Thus if you want to print a list of the names of all patients who are Baptists you could enter Select OPTION PRINT FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SORT BY RELIGION BAPTIST WITHIN RELIGION BAPTIST SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME This is a common way to select certain records for printing Fi
218. has any text on file corresponding text from the sender s entry is not merged with it Thus if you decide to delete the FROM entry Sam Sender here you may lose some data In the case of distinct Multiple valued subfields merging will take place The subentries in the FROM entry would be added to the Multiple in the March 2013 233 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries TO entry Further if two subentries have the same 01 value and if any of the subfields are blank in the TO entry the FROM subentry s data will be placed in the blank subfield In this way data is added to Multiples in the same way that it is added to files For example suppose DIAGNOSIS is the label of the 01 field of a Multiple and AGE AT ONSET is a subfield in that Multiple If Roger Recipient has a DIAGNOSIS of Angina and Sam Sender has one of Diabetes Recipient ends up with both Angina and Diabetes Further if both Recipient and Sender had Angina but Recipient had no AGE AT ONSET for that subentry and Sender did have one the Sender s AGE AT ONSET data for Angina would be transferred to Recipient The following example illustrates the transfer of data values from one entry to another in more detail These two entries will also be used in the discussion of the Compare Merge File Entries option Before the transfer the Inquire to File Entries option displays these two entries from the SCHOLAR file NAME
219. hat patient Edit data within that selected entry in the RADIOLOGY EXAM file Return to edit another field in the PATIENT file A sample editing session using this INPUT template looks like this INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL PATIENT EXAM Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 11 NAME FMPATIENT 11 Enter Select RADIOLOGY EXAM CHOOSE FROM 1 DEC 4 1984 2 OCT 1 1985 CHOOSE 1 2 2 DATE OF EXAM OCT 1 1985 Enter RESULTS NORMAL ATTENDING PHYSICIAN FMPATIENT Enter As indicated by this example the only RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries you were allowed to choose were the two that pointed back to the selected patient FMPATIENT 11 Each file for the purpose of this editing sequence is considered a subfile of the original so that when no more fields within the second file are specified the dialogue falls back to the original file Having navigated over to a second file you can use another extended pointer to move to still a third file March 2013 67 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation You cannot cross file boundaries on input unless you have WRITE access to the file to which you move This restriction applies to the individual who created this Patient Exam INPUT template Computed field with Multiple Pointer return type The following example shows the definition of a computed field using a backwards pointer The result is a computed field with a mul
220. he 001 is probably best imagined as a window Remember that the record number is part of the file s structure The 001 field then is a little window through which you can see a small part of the file s structure the part that contains the record number An important consequence of this is that the value that appears in the 001 26 March 2013 Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual field cannot be deleted or changed And by now you know why the value that appears in the 001 field isn t like values in other fields It isn t really jn the field it s part of the file s structure and Fileman won t let you mess around with it Even if you have the level of permission that lets you change the file structure Fileman won t let you do it at the 001 field When a file designer creates a 001 field Fileman automatically calls the field number The file designer can rename the field later but they usually do not Number is a pretty good name for this field in most cases When you are using Fileman s tools to create custom reports you can choose to print the record number as one of the fields You can even choose to print the record number in a file that does not have a 001 field Enter number as the name of a field you would like to print and unless the file has another field called number Fileman will print the record number Even in a file that does not have a 001 field Fileman knows what
221. he Choosing Print Fields topic in the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the Fileman User Manual First you must identify the file from which you are exporting data This is the primary file Then you choose from which fields to export data March 2013 195 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools In addition to fields from that file and its Multiples you can export data from other files by using the extended pointer syntax REF For more information on pointer syntax see the Relational Navigation section Also you can put other computed expressions at the EXPORT FIELD prompt to make use of Fileman functions or M code There are several kinds of specifications that are valid at the PRINT FIELD prompt that are not allowed at the EXPORT FIELD prompt They are WORD PROCESSINC type fields ALL signifying all the fields in a file e Print qualifiers following the field designation like X or C22 e Statistical print qualifiers preceding the field like or amp Backward extended pointers e Relational jumps to other files De use of a terminating colon instead use the full extended pointer syntax to obtain data from other files Specifications that return more than one value e g a Multiple in a pointed to file you can specify Multiples in the primary file After you enter a set of field specifications you are immediately prompted for
222. he Examples of File and Field Creation section WORD PROCESSING Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as WORD PROCESSING allows entry of unlimited free text data The data can be edited formatted and printed with word processing text editors eo REF For a description of Fileman s native text editors see the Screen Editor and Line Editor chapters in the Fileman User Manual For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as WORD PROCESSING you are asked the following questions Select FIELD HISTORY Are you adding HISTORY as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF HISTORY WORD PROCESSING SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE Yes Enter 128 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual HELP PROMPT SUBJECTIVE NARRATIVE OF PATIENT S PROBLEM HISTORY DESCRIPTION 1 Enter If you answer YES to the SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE question text is automatically wrapped at word boundaries to fit in the column in which it is being printed Usually this is the preferred way to print text TIP When it is important that lines of text be printed exactly as they were entered answer NO to the SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE question Thus text is output in no wrap mode You would probably want a spreadsheet or a restaurant menu printed in no wrap mode e NOTE If the column in which no wrap text is being
223. he PATIENT file where the PROVIDER field is a variable pointer to either the PHYSICIAN file or the PERSON file and PHONE is a field in the PERSON file You could enter the following print specifications FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME THEN PRINT FIELD PROVIDER THEN PRINT FIELD FILE PROVIDER 58 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual THEN PRINT FIELD PROVIDER PERSON PHONE THEN PRINT FIELD Enter You would receive the following output NAME PROVIDER FILE PROVIDER PROVIDER PERSON PHONE FMPATIENT 13 FMPROVIDER 3 PHYSICIAN FMPATIENT 14 FMPROVIDER 4 PERSON 555 3332 The long form simple pointer asked for the PHONE field from the PERSON file Only the variable pointer from the FMPATIENT 14 entry pointed to the PERSON file Thus only his phone number is displayed Relational Jumps Across Files In interactive Fileman mode you can use the following syntax file Doing this changes your context to the file you specify you jump to the specified file You can then select fields from the file to which you have jumped You can only do this in four places in Fileman EDIT WHICH FIELD prompt Enter or Edit File Entries option SEARCH FOR FIELD prompt Search File Entries option SORT BY prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option PRINT FIELD prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option HR GO A M Relation
224. he data for the top file level This is different from the output of the Export Tool which flattens exported data from Multiples into separate lines of output For example consider a comma delimited import of records each including a name plus four subentries Each subentry contains a DATE and a TYPE The records will be imported into a file with a top level NAME field 2 01 and a Multiple with DATE field 4 01 and TYPE field 1 For this import you would choose the destination fields as follows FIELD SELECTION FOR IMPORT Page 2 Choose a field from 214 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual PATIENT DATE Subfile Field Delete last field selected These are the fields selected so far NAME DATE DATE DATE TYPE DATE DATE DATE TYPE DATE DATE DATE TYPE DATE DATE DATE TYPE Q 00 1 OY Ul i Q0 IND I Exit Save Next Page Refresh L Enter a command or followed by a caption to jump to a specific field COMMAND NEXT Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert A corresponding line of data to be imported for a record containing data for both the top level record and its subentries would look like FMPATIENT 01 JAN 95 SC 24 JUN 95 NSC 14 AUG 95 SC 21 JUL 96 NSC NOTE You must file the same number of subentries in each record you import Completeness of Subfile Entries New subentries need to be adde
225. he field for that subscript value if there is one Computed Values Those with programmer access can have any value in the cross reference be computed that is the value is determined from M code that sets the variable X Subscript Transforms Those with programmer access can define a Transform for Storage and a Transform for Display on subscripts in an index 168 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual The Transform for Storage is code that transforms the internal value of a field before it is stored as a subscript in the index The Transform for Display is code that transforms the value stored in the index back to a form that can be displayed to the user SET and Kill Conditions Those with programmer access can enter M code that specifies whether the set or kill logic is fired The M code sets the variable X to Boolean true only if the logic should be executed The before and after values are available in the X X1 and X2 arrays The X X1 and X2 Arrays Those with programmer access can reference the X X1 and X2 arrays in the SET and KILL logic and the SET and KILL conditions of New Style cross references When a field is edited and the cross reference logic is executed the field s corresponding X1 array element contains the old value of the field the X2 array element contains the new value of the field and the X array element contains either the old or new value depending on whether the
226. hip to access entries in another file The set of programs files documentation help prompts and installation procedures required for a given application e g Laboratory Pharmacy and PIMS A VISTA software environment is composed of elements specified via the PACKAGE file 49 4 Elements include files associated templates namespaced routines and namespaced file entries from the OPTION HELP FRAME BULLETIN and FUNCTION files As public domain software VISTA software can be requested through the Freedom of Information Act FOIA March 2013 Glossary SORT TEMPLATE SPACEBAR RETURN SPECIAL QUEUING STUFF SUBENTRY SUBFIELD SUBFILE SUBSCRIPT March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual The stored record of sort specifications It contains sorting order as well as restrictions on the selection of entries Used to prepare entries for printing You can answer a Fileman prompt by pressing the spacebar and then the Return key This indicates to Fileman that you would like the last response you were working on at that prompt recalled Option attribute indicating that Task Manager should automatically run the option whenever the system reboots To place values directly into a field usually with no user interaction An entry in a Multiple also called a Subrecord A field in a Multiple The data structure of a Multiple In many respects a Subfile has the same characteristics as a File A symbol
227. ile Structure Ideally a file s description should state what kind of information is in the file when it was created why it was created and which VISTA packages use the information in the file Many file descriptions do contain that information but unfortunately many do not If you come across files whose descriptions are inadequate don t be afraid to contact the person responsible for the file and ask for the description to be updated Programmers often hate doing stuff like this but descriptions need to be informative and if they re not then programmers really should expect to hear about it And if the programmers don t want to hear about it anymore well they know what they need to do Each file has a designated data global which is the place in the computer system where the file s data is stored Files belonging to the same package have data globals that are close to one another this helps the programmers find the information they re looking for Each file also has a data dictionary entry which describes the fields contained in the file This is an important and complex piece of information so we will discuss it in more detail a little later on For now let s take a closer look at how Fileman keeps track of files More About File Numbers You already know in general terms how a file works A file contains a number of records and each record has a record number even if the user doesn t see the record number The record number
228. ill always be only one File 2 18 March 2013 Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual We recommend that you start getting into the habit of using file numbers rather than file names when working with files You may already be doing this depending on how much time you spend hanging out with programmers File numbers are a more reliable way to identify files and as you begin to work with Fileman s more powerful tools this will be important If you haven t spent a lot of time hanging out with programmers you may not know the numbers for the files you use The following table shows the file numbers of some of the more common files If you need the file numbers for files specific to your division or packages ask your IT department for assistance They will probably be delighted that you intend to start using file numbers so don t be shy about asking File name File number Data Dictionary 0 FILE 1 PATIENT 2 STATE 5 OPTION 19 HOSPITAL LOCATION 44 DRUG 50 LABORATORY TEST 60 NUTRITION PERSON 115 NEW PERSON 200 PATIENT MOVEMENT 405 PATIENT THS 9000001 VISIT 9000010 In addition to a name and number each file also has a file description This description is written by the person who created the file Usually that person was a programmer although super users can also create files March 2013 19 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 3 Fileman F
229. imple extended pointer at the PRINT FIELD prompt PRINT FIELD ATTENDING PHYSICIAN PHONE NUMBER You can use simple extended pointers in many places in Fileman including Reports Print Fields Sort Criteria Search Criteria March 2013 55 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Editing Records edit information in related files not just current file Computed Expressions COMPUTED Fields Within word processing Windows The syntax for simple extended pointers is described below Simple Extended Pointer Syntax Short form With simple extended pointers there must be an existing relationship based on a pointer field from the current file to the file you are interested in In this case you can reference a field in a pointed to entry by using the following syntax pfield element Pfield is the name or number preceded by of a pointer field in the current file and element is an element that exists in the field to which pfield points This is called the short form of extended pointer syntax For example since ATTENDING PHYSICIAN is a pointer field in the current file to the fictitious DOCTOR file the short form of extended pointer syntax to reference the PHONE NUMBER field in the fictitious DOCTOR file would be ATTENDING PHYSICIAN PHONE NUMBER Simple Extended Pointer Syntax Long Form The most complete or general form of extend
230. in the range of numbers assigned to your site Be sure to follow local policies when assigning file numbers As you can see from this example when a file is created a field with the label NAME and number 01 is automatically created When creating a new file you can change the definition of this field in the same way you can change the definition of any other field When you select a field e g the NAME field you will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 01 in File 100 FIELD LABEL DATA TYPE FREE TEXT TITLE AUDIT AUDIT CONDITION READ ACCESS DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY YES HELP PROMPT NAME MUST BE 3 35 CHARACTERS NOT NUMERIC OR STARTING WITH PU XECUTABLE HELP 144 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert DATE TIME Fields In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the RELEASE DATE TIME field 68 in the ORDER file 100 has a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES lt Enter gt MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER lt Enter gt Select FIELD RELEASE DATE TIME You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the prope
231. ing information may be available A NAME that is from 3 to 30 characters long A recorded SEX of either m MALE or f FEMALE A DATE OF BIRTH A RELIGION for a list of all valid religions we would have to consult a RELIGION file One or more diagnoses and for each DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSIS is a Multiple valued field that has the following information An AGE AT ONSET AHISTORY e A PROVIDER e g a primary care physician For a list of valid PROVIDERS you would consult File 6 and then File 16 If the PROVIDER s name does not appear it can then be entered in File 16 since LAYGO Learn As You Go has been allowed ASOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER SSN Condensed Data Dictionary Another format for listing a file s attributes is the Condensed format and the following example illustrates a Condensed data dictionary listing CONDENSED DATA DICTIONARY PATIENT FILE 16026 UCI VAH KXX STORED IN DIZ 16026 05 31 91 PAGE 1 March 2013 35 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities FILE SECURITY DD SECURITY DELETE SECURITY READ SECURITY LAYGO SECURITY WRITE SECURITY CROSS REFERENCED BY NAME B FILE STRUCTURE FIELD FIELD NUMBER NAME 01 NAME RF 0 1 SEX RS 0 2 DATE OF BIRTH RD 0 3 RELIGION P13 0 4 DIAGNOSIS Multiple 16026 04 1 0 01 DIAGNOSIS MF 0 1 1 AGE AT ONSET NJ3 0 0 2 2 HISTORY Multiple 16026
232. ing field in the destination file Fileman checks to see if both fields are compatible in several important areas including data type minimum length maximum length minimum values maximum values If a discrepancy exists Fileman will display an error message such as the following statement PROGRAMMER field in CHANGE EXTRACT file should have a maximum length of at least 30 characters After Fileman displays an error message about your destination field you can continue building your template You will not however be able to update the destination file until you have corrected the problem Here is the warning that you will see when any source field and its corresponding destination field fail one of the validation checks THE DESTINATION FILE DATA DICTIONARY SHOULD BE MODIFIED PRIOR TO ANY MOVEMENT OF EXTRACT DATA At any MAP TIELD NAME TO FILE NAME FIELD prompt entering two question marks yields a list of the selectable fields in the destination file The list gets shorter as fields are selected to ensure that no two extract fields map information to a single field in the destination file Update Destination File Option 6 of 9 Once you have used the Update Destination File option the extracted data from the source file is moved to the destination file After you enter the name of the EXTRACT template that you wish to use Fileman makes sure 262 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Filem
233. initialized Fileman creates the NAME field field number 01 which is free text 3 to 30 characters in length non numeric and has no leading punctuation You will see the following message A FreeText NAME Field 01 has been created The 01 field s definition can be modified like any other field it does not have to be FREE TEXT its label need not be NAME and so forth The 01 field should be the key attribute of an entry used to identify it and to order the entries for lookups However entries can be identified and ordered by other fields through cross references After creating a new file you can define any number of fields for the new file as described in the Creating Fields topic below REF For an example of a new file using the Modify File Attributes option see the Examples of File and Field Creation section Creating Fields For any file you can create fields describing logically related data that pertains to entries in that file When created every file automatically receives one field a NAME field the 01 field You must explicitly define any other fields All such definitions are made and changed with the Modify File Attributes option When you create a file after you give the new file a name you are asked Select FIELD Enter a new field name and respond with YES when Fileman asks Are you adding xxxxxxxx as a new FIELD The xxxxxxxx represents the
234. is displayed followed by a report of any discrepancies found or any changes made For example Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION CHECK FIX DD STRUCTURE Check the Data Dictionary START WITH WHAT FILE 16033 GO TO WHAT FILE Enter Remove erroneous nodes NO YES DEVICE HOME Enter DECSERVER Checking file 16033 Checking ID nodes for Q Checking IX nodes Checking PT nodes File 16037 Field 01 is not a pointer DD 16033 0 PT 16037 01 was killed Checking FIELDs Checking subfile 16033 04 Checking IX nodes Checking FIELDs Checking subfile 16033 42 Checking FIELDs Returning to subfile 16033 04 Returning to main file Checking subfile 16033 01 Checking IX nodes Checking FIELDs Returning to main file 50 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual In the previous example the check is being run on a single file Correction of erroneous nodes has been requested An incorrect PT node was found and deleted NOTE Subfiles are inspected too Application developers might use this tool to clean up their files before export Site managers may find the reporting function useful for checking a package s files after installation Erroneous nodes that are found by this option may be remnants of prior versions of the files the current install may not be to blame Find Pointers into a File Option You can identif
235. is edited With New Style cross references you can specify that the action associated with a cross reference be performed only once after the entire record has been edited typically at the end of the editing session Record level execution would normally be selected for compound cross references If the C index in the example above were defined using Traditional MUMPS type cross references and both the NAME and ID Number fields were contained in a single INPUT template the index would be updated when the NAME field was edited and then again when the ID Number was edited But if the cross reference were defined as a New Style compound index with record level execution the index would be updated only once after the entire record was edited after changes to both the NAME and ID Number fields had been completed Code to Kill the Entire Index This is code that Fileman can execute to remove an entire index from a file This can make re indexing a file much more efficient To delete an index Fileman can execute the Kill Entire Index Code instead of looping through all the record in a file and removing each record s index one at a time Activity New Style cross references can have an Activity of R and or March 2013 167 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities I to allow you to control whether the cross reference should be fired during Reindexing and or Installation KIDS If you call IX DIK IXI DIK or IXALL
236. is number of days since December 31 1840 followed by a comma followed by the number of seconds since midnight H gt 55032 48780 Te system variable returns the current device It may return the operating system s designation of the current device JIOB JIUSTIFY Format J string n J n1 n2 n3 Parameters In the first format string is a string expression n is an integer representing width of field 114 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual In the second format n1 is a numeric expression n2 is an integer representing the width of field n3 is the number of decimal places to output with the number In the first format the function returns string right justified within a field that has a width of n If string is longer than n there is no truncation In the second format the function returns n1 right justified in a field that has a width of n2 There will be n3 decimal places to the right of the decimal point NAME 20 gt FMPATIENT 21 12 spaces preceding the S _ J PRESCRIPTION COST 8 2 gt 25 88 3 spaces preceding the 2 SL ENGTH Format L string L string delimiter Parameters string is a string expression delimiter is a character or characters or an expression yielding a character or characters that divides the string into pieces Use In the first format the function returns the number of characters in string I
237. is report of records to be extracted FIRST PRINT FIELD ZZTEST TEMPLATE The output looks like CHANGE EXTRACT ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 11 09 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 25 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 25 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 258 March 2013 Chapter 12 Extract Tool Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Modify Destination File Option 4 of 9 You can use either the Modify File Attributes option or the Modify Destination File option when you are ready to create the destination file that will receive your extracted data You can also use these options to correct discrepancies that you noticed while you were building your EXTRACT template The two options are nearly identical However one major difference exists the Modify Destination File option prompts for a new file attribute ARCHIVE FILE see the Destination File topic previously described in this chapter If you use the Modify File Attributes option to create the destination file you will need to access the Modify Definition File option to set the ARCHIVE FILE flag Here is a sample of the type of dialogue that you will encounter when modifying your destination file Select EXTRACT OPTION MODIFY DESTINATION FILE This option allows you to build a file which will store data extracted from other files When creating fields in the destination file all data types are selectable However only a few d
238. itle long form of its name Auditand Audit Conditions to indicate which fields should be audited e Read Delete Write e Source Destination Group Description of the field a WORD PROCESSING field what the user sees after entering two question marks Technical Description After you are presented with these attributes of the field you can change the attributes defined during the initial definition of the field as illustrated in the Creating Fields topic above For example let s say you have created an SSN field Social Security Number in the PATIENT file and would now like to edit the field Select FIELD SSN LABEL SSN Enter TITLE Social Security Number AUDIT YES ALWAYS AUDIT CONDITION Enter eo REF Auditing is described in the section READ ACCESS OPTIONAL Enter DELETE ACCESS OPTIONAL Enter WRITE ACCESS OPTIONAL Enter REF Control of various kinds of access to files is described in the section SOURCE lt Enter gt Select DESTINATION lt Enter gt March 2013 139 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Select GROUP DEMOG A GROUP is a shorthand way for the user to refer to several fields at once when using the Print File Entries or the Enter or Edit File Entries options Here SSN is being assigned to the DEMOG group DESCRIPTION 1 gt An entry is required If you do not
239. kkkkkkkkkkkk ISC6A4 kkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk K egeregegeg pese 4 eatem deos 8 16 24 31 39 47 55 63 In addition to these fields accessed directly by Fileman Kernel uses the NEW PERSON file to set up Fileman key variables You can define additional NEW PERSON file fields to use to define these local variables as follows Internal Entry Used to set DUZ for the Number user There is no defined 001 field on the NEW 16 March 2013 Chapter 2 Statistics Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual FILE MANAGER 13 0 4 Used to set DUZ 0 for user ACCESS CODE A FREE TEXT field from 1 to 15 characters LANGUAGE 200 07 200 7 Used to set DUZ LANG A POINTER TO A FILE field that points to the LANGUAGE file 85 identifying the user s language TIMED READ 4 200 1 200 10 Used to set DTIME for the OF SECONDS user A NUMERIC field with a value of 1 to 99999 When these additional fields are defined you can use them in a signon routine to set these key variables Of course you may choose to place additional information about your users in the NEW PERSON file 200 If you add other fields to your NEW PERSON file use field numbers greater than 10 000 and use subfile numbers with at least 5 digits following the decimal place Also place the fields in global nodes subscripted with numbers greater than 10 000 If you numberspace your data elements in this way you will be able to avoid confli
240. l Chapter 9 File Utilities New Style Cross references Edit a New Style Cross reference Create a New Style Cross reference Delete a New Style Cross reference There are seven types of Traditional cross references and two types of New Style cross references available Generally a cross reference in Fileman specifies that some action is performed when the field s value is entered changed or deleted For several types of cross references the action consists of putting the value into a list an index used when looking up an entry or when sorting The regular cross reference is used for sorting and for lookup you can limit it to sorting only The KWIC mnemonic and SOUNDEX cross references are also used for lookup You can sort a file on any field except a WORD PROCESSINC type field whether or not a cross reference exists for the field However sorting is done more quickly and efficiently if a regular cross reference exists on the field When a file is created a Traditional cross reference on the NAME 42 01 field is automatically established You can add or delete cross references at any time using the Cross Reference a Field or File option DIXREF located on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY This option can also be used to enter a description of a cross reference and to prevent the cross reference from being deleted You can create a cross reference on a Multiple field a Multiple s subfields or on any other field type except
241. l be passed through an existing output transform and checked again against the input transform Cross references are checked to assure that they exist and reference and existing entry Thelength of a cross referenced is verified to be no greater than 30 characters March 2013 159 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities Following is a sample report illustrating how the Verify Fields option identifies the field and cross reference being checked and shows the IEN entry 01 value and a brief description of each error found VERIFY FIELDS REPORT KBAN BROKEN FILE FILE 11310003 JAN 09 2013 14 33 PAGE 1 11310003 01 FIELD 01 NAME FREE TEXT CHECKING CROSS REFERENCE ENTRYZ NAME ERROR 6 BAD B XREF BAD B XREF not properly Cross referenc 10 THIRTY TWO CHARACTER LIMIT ENT WRONG B CROSS REF BAD B XREF 99 99 DANGLING B CROSS REF BAD B XREF 9 LOOPY OUTPUT TRANSFORM WRONG B CROSS REF LOOPY OUTPUT TRANS 10 THIRTY TWO CHARACTER LIMIT ENT DUPLICATE B CROSS REF THIRTY TWO CHAR 11310003 02 FIELD 2 02 POINTER POINTER CHECKING CROSS REFERENCE ENTRYZ NAME ERROR 2 BAD POINTER No 6666 in pointed to File 7 BAD C POINTER XREF 4 not properly Cross referenced 7 BAD C POINTER XREF WRONG C CROSS REF 44 2 BAD POINTER WRONG C CROSS REF 7777 11310003 03 FIELD 03 DATE DATE CHECKING CROSS REFERENCE 3 BAD DATE ABCDEF fails Input Transform 8 BAD D DATE
242. l table Use This function returns the value of variable The variable can be one that you set using the SET function Examples VAR COUNT gt 1 1 is the current value of COUNT VAR DUZ gt 160 SET SET value variable Parameters value is an expression to be evaluated variable is a local variable name used to hold the value of value This function returns value s value In addition the value March 2013 111 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions is placed in a local variable Variable should be namespaced to avoid conflict with other local variables You can use this function only if you have programmer s access Example SET 1 COUNT gt 1 this would put 1 into the variable COUNT M Helated Functions A SCII St ee Parameters string is a string of characters or an expression yielding a string nis an integer or expression yielding an integer Use The function returns the numeric ASCII value of the character in position n within string If n is not specified the value of the first character is returned Examples SA NAME 4 gt 77 NAME is SHAM SAM THE A Get the value gt 71 C HAR Parameters nis an GE or an expression yielding an integer This function returns the character corresponding to the ASCII value of n If more than one n is specified in the argument a string of characters will be returned Examples C 100 gt d
243. lar Files therefore can have non integer file numbers which means that the FILE file has non integer record numbers Actually any Fileman file can have non integer record numbers although it s not always a good idea We recommend using non integer record numbers only in cases where it is necessary or makes obvious sense The Data Dictionary The data dictionary is a file in the Fileman system It is often abbreviated as DD and we will often use that convention in this manual Although it is a file the DD has a few characteristics that make it different from all the other files For example it is not listed in the FILE file The mechanism for this is a little complex but essentially Fileman developers hid the DD from the FILE file by making it File 0 Another unique characteristic of the data dictionary is that its entries are not strictly speaking records In many ways they act more like files March 2013 21 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure although they are not files either Essentially DD entries are something in between a record and a file Okay so what is contained in these not quite records and not quite files Each entry in the data dictionary corresponds with an entry in the FILE file The DD entry describes the fields contained in the file Each field has its own characteristics name type of data description and so on The complete list of one file s fields and all
244. le DO YOU WISH TO RE CROSS REFERENCE ONE PARTICULAR INDEX NO Enter March 2013 175 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities OK ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO KILL OFF THE EXISTING INDEX NO Y DO YOU THEN WANT TO RE CROSS REFERENCE YES Enter All the cross references for the file will be fired except for bulletins This dialogue will execute triggers and MUMPS cross references If a file contains more than one cross reference you can get a list of them by entering a single question mark in response to the DO YOU WISH TO RE CROSS REFERENCE ONE PARTICULAR INDEX prompt You can then re index a single cross reference or all of the file s cross references Limits on Re indexing Files There are some files that should rot be re indexed When those files are inadvertently re indexed it can cause major problems and necessitate restores from backups Currently there is no way to prevent such files from being re indexed except for putting DO NOT RE INDEX in the file description which is ineffective The Re Index File option DIRDEX is a powerful useful tool but it can cause a lot of damage when one is not paying attention Patch DI 22 167 allows individual cross references to be marked Do Not Re Index and the Re Index File option DIRDEX will respect that APIs that perform re indexing will also respect that with the following exceptions APIs that re index a singl
245. lect FIELD 1 Enter DATE CURRENT CROSS REFERENCE IS REGULAR C INDEX OF FILE Choose E Edit D Delete C Create D Are you sure that you want to delete the CROSS REFERENCE NO YES New Style Cross references Two types of New Style cross references are available Regular and MUMPS They are like their Traditional cross reference counterparts but New Style cross references offer some unique advantages Compound Cross references You can create not only simple cross references that are based on a single field but compound cross references 166 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual cross references that are based on more than one field in a file For example in a regular New Style C index you can store both the Name and ID Number of a record as subscripts in a single index DIZ 1000 C FMPATIENT 25 A56789 14 DIZ 1000 C FMPATIENT 10 D1234 5 In order to create this kind of index with a Traditional cross reference you would have to create two MUMPS type cross references one on the NAME field and one on the ID Number field New Style cross references allow you to define this compound cross reference once as a regular index that Fileman can use for lookup and sorting Field or Record Level Execution Since a Traditional cross reference is defined on a particular field the action associated with that cross reference is performed whenever the field
246. leman 22 2 Advanced User Manual This change enables incredibly wonderful things to occur REPORTER 5 L FMPATIENT 10 BEGIN REPORTER 1001 0582 END REPORTER 1001 05 REPORTER 01 FMPATIENT 10 SEND DAT Install Verify Filegram Option The filegram recipient uses the Install Verify Filegram option to install a filegram from a MailMan message into a file on the target system Choose a filegram history by entering its date time or by using a lt Spacebar gt lt Enter gt for the last used history at the Select FILEGRAM HISTORY prompt The destination file for the filegram entry must be in place on the target system for a successful installation CAUTION The installation will more likely succeed if the destination file is a replica of the sending file The message DONE is displayed if the install was successful If not successful an UNSUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION message is returned with an error code REF For a list of error codes identifying their meaning see the ADIFG section in the Filegrams API chapter in the Other APIs section in the Fileman APIs Manual Deleting a Filegram Delete a filegram by removing the filegram s entry from the FILEGRAM HISTORY file 1 12 As shown in the following dialogue use the Enter or Edit File Entries option Enter the at sign at the DATE TIME prompt of the filegram history you want to delete Select OPTION ENTER OR EDIT FILE ENTRIES March 201
247. leted either by purging or canceling Source File The term source file represents the primary file and any other files that can be referenced by extended pointers The primary file is the starting file from which you will extract your data The term extract field refers to any field in the source file Destination File The term destination file represents the Fileman file that stores the extracted data The destination file can be located anywhere on the network March 2013 249 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool that is recognized by the system To create this file you select either of two Fileman options Modify File Attributes or the Extract Tool s Modify Destination File For each extract field in the source file a corresponding field in the destination file must exist Certain DATA TYPE field values can optionally be resolved to external form before moving the data to the destination file For example data extracted from a DATA TYPE field of POINTER TO A FILE can be moved to a FREE TEXT type field in the destination file if external form of data is moved or such data can be moved to a NUMERIC type field if the internal value is moved e REF For more information see the Mapping Information section The destination file uses a file level attribute called ARCHIVE FILE The following is a description of this flag e YES This is an archive file and users cannot modify or delete the data or the
248. lidate Extract Template Option 9 of 9 After you have corrected any discrepancies that Fileman might have pointed out while you were creating an EXTRACT template you can use the Validate Extract Template option to quickly check your EXTRACT template s mapping information The Validate Extract Template option will not alter anything in your template Here is a sample dialogue Select EXTRACT OPTION VALIDATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE Select EXTRACT TEMPLATE CHANGE Enter EXTRACT EXTRACT AUG 30 1992 USER 2 FILE 16000 Excuse me this will take a few moments Checking the destination file Template looks OK March 2013 267 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 13 Filegrams Chapter 13 Filegrams NOTE In order to use the full capabilities of Fileman s Filegram procedures Kernel 6 5 or later must be installed on your system Filegrams are a feature in Fileman intended for use by System Managers Package Developers and Programmers A filegram is a process that moves a record also called an entry from a file on one computer system to a duplicate file on another independent computer system An independent computer system is defined as a system having its own database Sending data from the live account at a medical center to a test account at the same medical center is an example of moving a filegram locally Sending data from a computer in the San Francisco Medical Center to a computer in the Salt
249. line WORD PROCESSING fields to edit them press the Enter key and a separate screen opens i e a popup window The DESCRIPTION is displayed to users who enter two question marks while editing the ORDER field The TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION however is for internal documentation only March 2013 123 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields DATE TIME Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as DATE TIME allows you to enter a minimum and maximum date You can also indicate whether the date can be entered with an imprecise date e g JUL 1969 or with the time of day e g JUL 2004 Fileman does not accept dates before 1700 For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME you are asked the following questions Select FIELD DATE OF BIRTH Are you adding DATE OF BIRTH as a new FIELD NO Y DATA TYPE OF DATE OF BIRTH DATE TIME EARLIEST DATE OPTIONAL 1 1 1860 LATEST DATE 1963 CAN DATE BE IMPRECISE Y N YES Enter CAN TIME OF DAY BE ENTERED Y N NO Enter If you reply YES to the CAN TIME OF DAY BE ENTERED Y N NO prompt you would then be asked CAN SECONDS BE ENTERED WILL DATE OF BIRTH FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS DATE OF BIRTH ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Y HELP PROMPT TYPE A DATE BETWEEN 1 1 1860 AND 1963 Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter A default help prompt is automatically written for you wit
250. ll ignore the field delimiter in a quoted string when this field is set to YES When exporting data if you want all values that do not belong to a DATA TYPE field of NUMERIC to be surrounded by quotation marks answer YES to this field Many importing applications treat data within quotation marks in a special way Sometimes such data is automatically considered to be text as opposed to numbers Also the importer may ignore the field delimiter character if it falls within a quoted string Quoting a null value from a non numeric field will result in two double quotes being exported March 2013 221 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools During export the DATA TYPE field value is automatically determined for fields in the primary file and its Multiples DATA TYPE fields of NUMERIC are considered NUMERIC There may be other fields that you want treated as NUMERIC For example COMPUTED type fields with numeric results Fields referenced by the extended pointer syntax Replies to the EXPORT FIELD prompt that are computed expressions with numeric results By default these fields are assigned a FREE TEXT DATA TYPE If you want the user to choose the DATA TYPE when the EXPORT template is created answer YES to the PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE field If the Export Tool assigns a non numeric to a DATA TYPE field or if the user chooses one of those DATA TYPE field values the field s values will
251. ly the destination Fileman field but also the length for each corresponding incoming field Each time you enter a field at the Field prompt it s added to the bottom of the list of fields displayed on the form This shows you the destination fields you have selected and their order If you make a mistake you can delete fields from the bottom of the list one by one by entering YES at the Delete last field selected prompt To insert a field delete back to the insertion point enter the new field and then re enter the deleted fields March 2013 211 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools WR REF There are special issues when importing data into fields in Multiples see the Special Considerations Multiples section You can save the information you specify on the Field Selection page in an IMPORT template This lets you reuse the field matching criteria you have entered for subsequent imports that use the same file and fields without having to re enter it To save your field specifications as an IMPORT template answer YES to the Do you want to store the selected fields in an Import Template question which you are asked after you exit the Import form see Run the Import below Then for future imports simply enter the name of the IMPORT template on Page 1 of the Import form You can use any IMPORT template to which your Fileman Access Code gives you access Run the Import Once you have set up
252. man Functions NUMDAY datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the day of the month in datexp as a number Example NUMDAY DATE OF BIRTH gt 7 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 NUMMONTH NUMMONTH datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value This function returns the month in datexp as a number Example NUMMONTH DATE OF BIRTH gt 3 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 NUMYEAR NUMYEAR datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the last two digits of the year in datexp as a number Example NUMYEAR DATE OF BIRTH gt 49 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 NUMYEAR4 NUMYEARA datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value This function returns the four digit year in datexp as a number March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Example NUMYEARA DATE OF BIRTH gt 1949 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 RANGEDATE RANGEDATE datexp1 datexp2 datexp3 datexp4 Parameters datexpl is a date valued expression beginning the first range of dates datexp2 is a date valued expression ending the first range of dates datexp3 is a date valued expression beginning the second range of dates datexp4 is a date valued expression ending the second range of dates Use This function returns the number of days that the two ranges of dates overlap Example RANGEDATE DATE OF BIRTH N
253. mber The unary operators are Positive numeric interpretation sign unchanged E Negative numeric interpretation sign changed March 2013 71 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Binary Operators Another set of operators takes two elements manipulates them and returns a result These are called binary operators You can use the following binary operators in computed expressions S SSCS Integer truncated division e g 13 2 6 Concatenation leg AB CDE ABCDE Boolean Operators A third set of operators makes a comparison between two elements and returns a true or false value These are known as Boolean operators If the outcome of a Boolean operation is true the value one 1 is returned if false zero 0 is returned You can use these Boolean operators in computed expressions E mma SSS Follows in alphabetical order Contains e g AB A is true A AB is false Or either element is true e g 2 3 5 lt 10 is true And both elements are true e g 2 3 amp 5 lt 10 is false 72 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual An apostrophe means negation or NOT It can precede any of the Boolean operators Thus 6 gt 8 is read six is not greater than eight which is true a one is returned Parentheses in Expressions In the absence of parentheses the expression is evaluated strictly left to right One
254. mes referred to as a SET For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as SET OF CODES you are asked the following questions Select FIELD SEX Are you adding SEX as a new FIELD No Y Enter DATA TYPE OF SEX SET OF CODES INTERNALLY STORED CODE m Enter WILL STAND FOR MALE INTERNALLY STORED CODE f Enter WILL STAND FOR FEMALE INTERNALLY STORED CODE Enter WILL SEX FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS SEX ENTRY MANDATORY Y N No Y HELP PROMPT Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter In this example m stands for Male and f stands for Female Numbers as well as alphabetic characters can be used 126 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual WR NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section FREE TEXT Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as FREE TEXT allows you to enter the maximum and minimum allowable string length of the FREE TEXT data You can also enter an M PATTERN MATCH that input data will have to match For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as FREE TEXT you are asked the following questions Select FIELD DIAGNOSIS Are you adding DIAGNOSIS as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF DIAGNOSIS FR
255. mockups of sensitive data in illustrations and screen captures The first three digits prefix of any social security numbers SSN will begin with 000 Patient and user names will be formatted as FMPATIENT N and FMUSER N respectively where N represents the first name as a number spelled out Screen captures and computer source code are shown in a non proportional font and enclosed within a box The user s responses to online prompts will be boldface Most screen captures are shown in scrolling mode This is because scrolling mode prompts and responses are easier to follow on paper or in PDF form Most of what is shown in scrolling mode can also be done in screen mode list mode or with a GUI it will just look a little different Before You Begin To fully understand the material in this manual you should be reasonably familiar with the material covered in the Fileman 22 2 Getting Started Manual Specifically you should know March 2013 1 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Orientation How to use the Inquire to File Entries Print File Entries Search File Entries and Enter or Edit File Entries options How to create save and use Inquire templates Print templates Sort templates Search templates and Edit templates and The basic definition and use of sort qualifiers print qualifiers and edit qualifiers In order to practice the operations described in this manual you should have super user access to
256. n INPUT template can make the presentation of certain fields conditional based on the values of other fields You must have programmer access to set up branching With programmer access any executable M code can be put into an INPUT template You can branch either to a field prompt elsewhere in the template or to a predefined place holder The place holder is identified by n where n is an integer e g 1 To branch within an INPUT template you enter M code at one of the EDIT FIELD prompts You set the variable Y to the branch destination Y can be given the value of a field label a field number or a place holder If Y is set to zero and editing is being done at the top level of a file the template is March 2013 299 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques exited If Y is set to zero and a Multiple is being edited the Multiple is exited The variable X will contain the updated internal value of the field edited at the previous prompt Thus you can check X to determine if you want to set Y to branch or not For example suppose you had a file called ADMISSIONS Some of the fields are concerned only with the discharge of a patient You want to branch around those fields if the DATE OF DISCHARGE is empty in the database and no date is given in the current editing session Your template could be defined like this Select OPTION ENTER OR EDIT FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE ADMISSIONS
257. n only send one entry at a time The following dialogue illustrates the generation of a filegram Select FILEGRAM OPTION GENERATE FILEGRAM OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE Select FILEGRAM TEMPLATE ZZTEST FILEGRAM Select CHANGE NO 334 Send mail to SYSTEM MGR METRODB VA GOV And send to Enter Heceiving Filegrams with MailMan Filegram messages do not appear as NEW mail at the receiving site After the mail message is received the filegram recipient must read the mail message Then it should be forwarded to S DIFG SRV HISTORY on the target system i e the system on which the filegram will be installed This is a special server used to load the message into the recipient s FILEGRAM HISTORY file 41 12 and to set up the interface between Fileman and MailMan at the target system Here is an example of what the recipient would see when reading and forwarding a filegram Subj FILEGRAM for entry 334 in CHANGE FILE 1001 186309 25 Aug 89 10 00 20 lines From SITE MANAGER in IN basket Page 1 SDAT CHANGE 1001 N CHANGE 1001 L 334 BEGIN CHANGE 1001 1 SPECIFIER VERSION 1 17 4 END CHANGE 1001 VERSION 1 17 4 ROUTINE 3 DICATT5 CHANGE 4 Changed DIED to DIEO DATE CHANGED 6 APR 13 1987 PROGRAMMER 7 FMPROGRAMMER DESCRIPTION 11 wp This change enables incredibly wonderful things to occur REPORTER 5 L FMEMPLOYEE 10 March 2013 275 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 13 Filegrams
258. n the second format the function returns the number of pieces into which delimiter divides the string If delimiter does not exist within string 1 is returned Examples L PROVIDER gt 11 PROVIDER is FMPROVIDER 5 L PROVIDER gt 2 same PROVIDER SP IECE March 2013 115 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Format P string delimiter n P string delimiter n1 n2 P string delimiter Parameters string is a string expression delimiter is a character or characters or an expression yielding a character or characters that divides the string into pieces n n1 and n2 are positive integers or expressions evaluating to positive integers The function returns a part of string String is divided into substrings by delimiter In the first format the n substring is returned In the second format the substrings starting with n1 and ending with n2 are returned The delimiters between those substrings are also returned In the third format the first substring i e the one preceding the first occurrence of delimiter is returned S P FMPATIENT22 2 gt 22 P PHONE 2 3 gt 943 2109 P PHONE gt 510 R ANDOM Parameters n is a positive integer or an expression evaluating to a positive integer Use This function returns a randomly generated integer from the range of 0 through n 1 EE S ELECT 116 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Function
259. nd Archived ENEE 292 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY PHG ih ene rire ode gne tene Feet 294 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques eene 205 Field Value Stutfing oret te noe Rad i aaa cas 295 Unvalidated Stuffs 4 4 EE 295 Variable DEUS cu uscite mtr ded Emr nde Mee ee erede 295 WORD PROCESSING Field Stuffing sss 296 INED Temp late Suena Desmond metet Reb Da ea etta estan aunts pb 297 Branching Within INPUT Templates eese einen 207 Text Formatting in Word Processing Fields 300 Word Wrapping eiS eios eerte iie etre bei bci 300 EE 301 Formatting Text with Word Processing Windows Frames 301 Text Formatting Expressions in Word Processing Windows 302 cri Mc E 306 Orientation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Orientation The typical end user in a VISTA system interacts with Fileman indirectly through VISTA s clinical and administrative packages There is no need therefore for a typical user manual for Fileman Instead this manual is written for advanced users of a VISTA system the super users and front line programmers who can use Fileman s tools and features to customize VISTA for their facility or their department This manual assumes that Fileman 22 2 is already installed and running on your system For instructions on how to install Fileman 22 2 please refer to the Fileman 22 2 Installation Guide This manual uses VA conventions for displaying
260. ng a eege Eeer 119 Creating Fields eerie ce eas 120 Field Data EE 121 Doreen Mode Field Editing E 122 DATE TIME Data E 124 NUMERIC Data Ty pe eiai arei pr e etta ti etes dari ae 125 BE POR CODES Data dae qscketea tenta uscdoeet dtp iei ee 126 FREE TEXT Data Type tec iei ett egt a tb ro ra egi 127 WORD PROCESSING Data Dye c oie rtr dete teo 128 COMPUTED Data Eeer 129 POINTER TO A FILE Data Type s s eseseseseseseersseseserrssrreseseseerssseneses 131 VARIABLE POINTER RE 132 MUMPS D ta Ke 134 Multiple Valued Field Multiples eege ts 135 Making a Field MvEndatoty u eee denn onte ente eet oen 136 Field Number Gelee 136 EE ER E EE 137 Forced Lookups Using INutabDers ege Seege 138 Changing and Deletibe Fields ceni eph petat crede a a 138 Changing Field EE ee Ee 138 Changing a Field s DATA TYPE Value see 141 Deleting E EEN 142 Examples of File and Field Creation sees 142 EE EIERE 143 DATE TIME Fielder R E A 144 SET OF CODES Field eet donned ee ee a 146 FREE TEX C Field oiei e a eee ESE EE 147 WORD PROCESSING Feld ee 149 COMPUTED Fieldsi e E a dispu EENAA 150 POINTER TO AFILE Pel Gls nerean 152 VARIABLE POINTER Field entitonteh esent touc cotone o qu edet tant 153 Creating a Multiple esee ete EN ERI Qu ees 154 t 159 Verify S 159 Cross Reference a Field or File iet ette 161 Types of Traditional ross references eee eret tenta 163 Edit a Traditional Cross reference aes
261. ng activity and is very important since there cannot be any archiving without the SEARCH template created in this option TIP It s important to know which entries you want archived and where you want them stored before you start the archiving process This mandatory archiving option really performs three important functions 1 A search for file entries that meet your specified search criteria or condition truth test occurs first The results of this search are then stored in a template you specify You must store these results in a template WR REF For guidance on how to use the search option procedures see the Search chapter in the Fileman User Manual 2 After storing the results of the search in a template a sort of the file by any field must occur This sort is as important as the search portion of this option Do not use any sort criteria that contains M code Be careful if you limit the sort range you will limit the entries selected for archiving You can delete unwanted entries later by using the Add Delete Selected Entries option 3 Finally a print of the fields to be archived to a printer or the screen CRT must occur Printing fields that uniquely identify the entries being archived gives you a permanent record of the archived entries You cannot create an archiving activity until at least one entry is located according to your search criteria sorted and printed to a printer or a terminal o NOTE If a subentry
262. ng systems provide tools such as the GER utility The Kernel provides a generic error trapping mechanism with use of the ZTER global and XTER routines Errors can be trapped and when possible the user is returned to the menu system A means to reference fields in files other than your current file The unique number used to identify a field in a file A field can be referenced by followed by the field number In Screenman a group of one or more pages that comprise a complete transaction Comparable to an INPUT template A DATA TYPE field value that can contain any printable characters Variable that is stored on disk M usage A type of bar graph that indicates frequency of occurrence of particular values In Fileman a field that is defined to aid in identifying an entry in conjunction with the NAME field 313 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Glossary INDEX INPUT TEMPLATE INTEGRATION AGREEMENTS IA INTERNAL ENTRY NUMBER 314 An ordered list used to speed retrieval of entries from a file based on a value in some field or fields The term simple index refers to an index that stores the data for a single field the term compound index refers to an index that stores the data for more than one field Indexes are created and maintained via cross references A pre defined list of fields that together comprise an editing session Integration Agreements define agreements between two or mor
263. nnot be changed to single valued fields or vice versa Multiple valued fields can only be defined when creating a field COMPUTED fields cannot be changed to other types of fields or vice versa WORD PROCESSINC type fields should only be changed into Multiple valued FREE TEXT fields OnlyaMultiple valued FREE TEXT field can be changed into a WORD PROCESSING field and only if no other subfields are defined for that field POINTER TO A FILE type fields cannot be changed to VARIABLE POINTER type fields or vice versa Deleting an Existing Field Deleting a field and its definition is done by deleting the field Name LABEL Delete the field by typing the at sign after the display of a field s LABEL when using the Modify File Attributes option Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD SEX LABEL SEX SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE THE ENTIRE SEX FIELD YES OK TO DELETE SEX FIELDS IN THE EXISTING ENTRIES YES A CAUTION If you answer NO to the OK TO DELETE question data conflicts may occur in the future if you create new fields It is advisable to always delete existing entries Only a programmer can delete the entries after you have answered NO 142 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Examples of File and Field Creation The following examples of creatin
264. nsfer document in the Line Editor s Transfer option As a Print Field specification in the Print File Entries option In an INPUT template when a multi valued field is being edited WORD PROCESSING Field WORD PROCESSING field names or field numbers preceded with a are allowed as elements in extended pointer expressions For example in the PATIENT file the HISTORY field is in the DIAGNOSIS Multiple You can define this computed expression B 12 Deficiency IN DIAGNOSIS FILE HISTORY This Multiline computed expression would signify the WORD PROCESSING HISTORY field text associated with a patient s B 12 Deficiency DIAGNOSIS A lookup is done on the DIAGNOSIS Multiple using B 12 Deficiency as the lookup value If the patient does not have that DIAGNOSIS or no HISTORY is associated with it the value of this extended pointer expression would be null March 2013 65 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Multiples You can use the simple pointer syntax to get data from Multiples of files pointed to by other files The RADIOLOGY EXAM file described above points to the PATIENT file by way of the EXAMINEE field In the PATIENT file there is a DIAGNOSIS Multiple You could obtain a list of diagnoses associated with RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries by doing the following Select OPTION PRINT FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE RADIOLOGY EXAM Enter SORT BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME
265. nsic functions provided by Kernel if possible REF For more information on Kernel date extrinsic functions see the Kernel Developer s Guide Data from fields with DATA TYPE field values of DATE TIME in the primary file its Multiples and pointed to files are altered by the code in this field date values from other sources are not There is another way to change the exported output you can use a Fileman function when selecting fields for export THEN EXPORT FIELD NUMDATE DATE OF BIRTH The DATE FORMAT field will have no effect on that output FILE HEADER Some applications require special information to process the data in the file that is imported For example the field names might be needed Also you may want to put some special data into the file for identification or documentation purposes The FILE HEADER field allows you to output information before the stream of exported data This field can contain either a literal string surrounded by quotation marks e g Data for Lotus 1 2 3 or M code that when executed will write the desired output You can put M code here only if you have programmer access The local variable DDXPXTNO which equals the internal entry number in the 224 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 4 of the EXPORT template being used for data output is defined when the code is executed You can use this variable to acc
266. nter SSN Want to make SSN a specifier NO YES Is the value of this field unique for each entry NO YES Answer YES only if you have a regular cross reference on the field that you are making a specifier A field can be a specifier without being unique If you answer YES a dialogue similar to the following occurs Select one of the following 1C REGULAR If one of the above provides a direct look up by SSN please enter its number or name 1 To delete a specifier Select FIELD 3 Enter SSN SSN is already a specifier Do you want to delete it NO YES Generate Filegram Option The Generate Filegram option is used by a filegram sender Be sure that the DUZ correctly identifies the filegram sender the DUZ is used to identify the filegram s sender to the recipient The option creates a filegram in MailMan message format after you designate a file FILEGRAM type template and a file entry Concurrently it creates a record in the FILEGRAM HISTORY File the FILEGRAM HISTORY file 41 12 points to the MESSAGE file 3 9 The record created in the FILEGRAM HISTORY file is called a filegram history The filegram history allows Fileman to differentiate between a filegram message and a mail message After the filegram is placed into the mail message you can send it to an individual at any established address 274 March 2013 Chapter 13 Filegrams Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual You ca
267. o the archives then you will receive the message Data has NOT YET been archived to PERMANENT storage You will see the following dialogue when purging permanently archived data Select ARCHIVE OPTION PURGE STORED ENTRIES BEFORE YOU PURGE MAKE SURE THAT YOUR ARCHIVE MEDIUM IS READABLE YOU MAY USE THE FIND ARCHIVED ENTRIES OPTION TO FIND THE LAST ARCHIVED RECORD APPEARING ON THE INDEX Do you want to proceed NO YES Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 ARCHIVED PERMANENT SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING This option will DELETE DATA from both CHANGE and from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file Are you sure you want to continue NO YES By answering YES to the Are you sure you want to continue NO prompt the entries will be immediately deleted Be sure this is your decision The entries will be deleted in INTERNAL NUMBER order lt lt 4 ENTRIES PURGED gt gt Cancel Archival Selection The Cancel Archival Selection option is used to cancel an archiving activity 292 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual before the Purge Stored Entries option occurs You are warned if the archiving activity has already been moved to permanent storage When you cancel an archiving activity the entry in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file is deleted Also entries that were locked after being moved to temporary storage can again be read and edited Se
268. ointed to files put that file s PREFIX followed by a period at the VARIABLE POINTER s field name e g in this example entering S would refer you to the PROVIDER file By answering NO to the SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY prompt the user is not allowed to add new entries on the fly to the PROVIDER file the same as the RELIGION field entered as a POINTER TO A FILE If you had answered YES then new entries could be added to the PROVIDER file Select VARIABLE POINTER 16 Enter PERSON Are you adding PERSON as a new VARIABLE POINTER the 2ND No X VARIABLE POINTER PERSON Enter MESSAGE Other Provider ORDER 2 PREFIX O SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY YES In this example a second VARIABLE POINTER was created to the PERSON file 416 By answering YES to the SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY prompt users who are editing patient data are allowed to add entries to the PERSON file Select VARIABLE POINTER Enter You stop identifying files for a VARIABLE POINTER by simply pressing the Enter key without any additional entries at the Select VARIABLE POINTER prompt WILL PROVIDER FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS PROVIDER ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter HELP PROMPT Enter DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter March 2013 133 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields After entering both VAR
269. on W REF For details of how to compose and use computed expressions see the Computed Expressions section March 2013 303 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Text Formatting Expressions in Word Processing Windows The following is the list of recognized special text formatting functions that you can use within word processing windows Most of these functions can be used in other contexts for example at the PRINT FIELD prompt RIGHT JUSTIFY Causes the text that follows it to be padded with spaces between words so the right margin is even DOUBLE SPACE Causes the text that follows it to be printed with blank lines inserted every other line SINGLE SPACE Turns off double spacing for the text that follows it TOP Causes a page break to occur at this point NOBLANKLINE If nothing will be printed on the line this causes the line to be suppressed so that a blank line is not output It is useful if the line contains only a computed expression that might evaluate to null PAGEFEED arg Causes page breaks to occur in the text that follows it whenever fewer than arg number lines remain on the current page PAGESTART arg Causes the text on the following pages to begin at line arg of the page SETPAGE arg Resets page numbering so that the page number that follows it will be arg 1 BLANK arg Causes arg number of blank lines to be insert
270. on are interpreted as minus signs For example 7 20 1969 would indicate subtraction and be evaluated as 1982 The word NUMBER or the name of the file followed by the word 70 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual NUMBER such as PATIENT NUMBER NUMBER will return the internal entry number of the entry in the file or subfile in question The name of a file followed by the name of a field in that file e g PATIENT NAME Like PATIENT NUMBER this syntax is helpful when it is unclear to which file or subfile an expression is referring However this syntax cannot obtain data from another file NAME and PATIENT NAME will return the same data To obtain data from another file the extended pointer syntax must be used A Fileman function e g TODAY or MONTH DATE OF BIRTH e REF Functions are discussed in the Fileman Functions section An extended pointer reference to fields in another file o REF Extended pointers and relational jumping are described in the Relational Navigation section Operators in Computed Expressions Computed expressions can consist of a single element However often several elements are joined together using operators Operators are characters that perform some action on elements Unary Operators The simplest operators are the unary operators They force a numeric interpretation of the element that follows They can also affect the sign of the resulting nu
271. on package The DBA maintains the list of DBIC approved entry points A number with no leading zeros and no trailing zeros after a decimal point In Screenman a label displayed on the screen Captions often identify fields that are to be edited The result of a mathematical computation involving the individual characters of a routine or file In Screenman the bottom portion of the screen used to display help information and to accept user commands This applies where the IA describes attributes functions that must be controlled in their use The decision to restrict the IA is based on the maturity of the custodian package Typically these IAs are created by the requesting package based on their independent examination of the custodian package s features For the IA to be approved the custodian grants permission to other VISTA packages to use the attributes functions of the IA permission is granted on a one by one basis where each is based on a solicitation by the requesting package An example is the extension of permission to allow a package e g Spinal Cord Dysfunction to define and update a component that is supported within the Health Summary package file structures March 2013 Glossary CROSS REFERENCE DATA ATTRIBUTE DATA DICTIONARY DATA DICTIONARY ACCESS DATA INTEGRITY DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DBMS DATABASE NATIONAL March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual An attribute o
272. ond format is used the number of entries with non null values in field is returned COUNT PATIENT gt 1349 the number of entries in the PATIENT file COUNT PATIENT PROVIDER gt 1288 number of patients with providers recorded DUPLICATED field Parameters field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by The field must be a cross referenced field This function when used on any cross referenced field will find all duplicates within a given file or determine 98 whether a specific entry is duplicated March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Returns one of the possible Boolean values 1 field value is duplicated in another entry field value is unique Example using the Search File Entries option to perform a search on the example file named ZZINDIVIDUAL Select OPTION SEARCH FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE ZZINDIVIDUAL Enter A SEARCH FOR ZZINDIVIDUAL FIELD DUPLICATED NAME B SEARCH FOR ZZINDIVIDUAL FIELD IF A Enter DUPLICATED NAME STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE Enter SORT BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME FIRST Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NUMBER THEN PRINT FIELD NAME THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C ZZINDIVIDUAL SEARCH Enter DEVICE Enter Telnet Terminal Right Margin 80 Enter ZZINDIVIDUAL SEARC MAR 18 2008 14 44 PAGE 1 NUMBER FMPATIENT ONE FMPATIENT ONE
273. order to get information about fields in a Multiple you must specifically ask for that Multiple by entering its name at the Select SUB FILE prompt Templates Only Format The Templates Only format displays information about the templates including forms and blocks associated with a file The output resembles the last part of the Standard data dictionary output Global Map The Global Map format shows the actual structure of the global file that contains the data for the file and its templates This information is of primary interest to programmers who can control how data is stored Here is a sample Global Map GLOBAL MAP DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 1 STORED IN DIZ 16026 1 ENTRY SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX CROSS REFERENCED BY NAME B DIZ 16026 D0 0 4 01 NAME 1F 1 SEX 2S 2 DATE OF BIRTH 3D 3 RELIGION 4P DIZ 16026 D0 1 0 16026 04A 4 DIAGNOSIS DIZ 16026 D0 1 D1 0 4 01 DIAGNOSIS 1F 1 AGE AT ONSET 2N DIZ 16026 D0 1 D1 1 0 16026 42 2 HISTORY DIZ 16026 D0 1 D1 1 D2 0 01 HISTORY 1W March 2013 45 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities DIZ 16026 D0 2 5 PROVIDER 1V 6 SSN 2F INPUT TEMPLATE S DIE 30 ZZUPDATE PRINT TEMPLATE S DIPT 01 CAPTIONED DIPT 60 ZZDIAGPRINT SORT TEMPLATE S An understanding of these da
274. ort Tools field is reached Thus if a field contains 32 characters but the user defined length is 30 the last 2 characters will not be exported However DATE TIME valued fields will always be exported in their entirety For dates the user must indicate a data length at least as long as the exported date which is 11 characters for standard Fileman dates o NOTE Fixed record lengths cannot be used in conjunction with field delimited data Also the maximum record size for exports for a fixed length format is 255 characters There is no limit on record length during import however CAUTION Fixed length exports will succeed only if all fields are exported on the same physical line Therefore the total of all the field lengths must not be more than the value stored in the MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH field MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH In many cases data import will be much easier if an entire record is contained on a single line of output That is there are no carriage returns within a single record only between records This is a requirement for a successful fixed length export In a regular Fileman print the amount of data printed before a carriage return is dependent on the type of device being used for output a CRT screen would normally have 80 characters on a line a printer 80 or 132 For data export however the physical characteristics of the output device is not controlling Rather the capabilities of the application importing da
275. ort and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Sample Output The data below has been prepared for import by Lotus 1 2 3 so it need not be easily read by people However you can see that text fields are surrounded by quotes empty text fields consist just of two quotes A space is in between each field s value Numeric values have no quotes If a field defined as numeric in the Fileman data dictionary has no value a zero 0 is output because this format has SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL set to 0 FMPATIENT FIVE m PROTE GANGRENE 45 FMPATIENT SIX f CATHO SLEEPING SICKNESS 28 FMPATIENT SEVEN m PROTE CIRRHOSIS 25 FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER FLU 34 FMPATIENT NINE m BLOOD POISONING 44 FMPATIENT FIVE m PROTE GUN SHOT 50 FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER FLU 37 FMPATIENT NINE m FLU 0 FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER FLU 46 FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER APPENDICITIS 39 Special Considerations Exporting Numbers If a number comes from a field in your primary file that is defined as NUMERIC or COMPUTED that number will be exported with all leading spaces or trailing insignificant zeros removed This is different from the way that the regular Fileman Print File Entries works If the field had a value of zero the character zero 0 will be exported If the value of a numeric field in the primary file is null the exported value will depend on the contents of the SUBSTITUTE FOR NU
276. oss reference Traditional or New Traditional NEW MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select Subfile Enter Current Indexes on file 16026 75 COMP index 85 XR202 index 106 H index 116 AC index 141 C index Choose E Edit D Delete C Create DELETE Which Index do you wish to delete 141 Enter C Are you sure you want to delete the Index No YES Index definition deleted Removing old index DONE Press RETURN to continue Enter Identifier e NOTE If you want to uniquely identify an entry in your file by a combination of fields and to force that uniqueness then you will most likely want to create a KEY on your file rather than using Identifier fields which do not force the uniqueness If a field is part of the PRIMARY KEY for a file then it should not be marked as an Identifier as well REF For more information on creating a KEY see the Key Definition section March 2013 173 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities An identifier is a designation you can give to a field that you want permanently associated with the 01 field NAME of a file The SSN field of our PATIENT file example has been defined as an identifier field Each time a patient s entry is referenced the SSN will be displayed to help positively identify the entry When a new entry is added to the file the user will be asked to provide the SSN A field that is not multiple valued can be specified
277. p routine must be a routine currently on the system This special lookup routine will be executed instead of the standard Fileman lookup logic whenever a call is made to DIC Specify that Cross references on a File Should be Compiled only available when you have programmer access If you have programmer access you also can specify that cross references on a file should be compiled To do this enter a routine namespace from three to six characters no at the CROSS REFERENCE ROUTINE prompt This will become the namespace of the compiled routine s If a new routine name is entered but the cross references March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual are not compiled at this time the routine name will be automatically deleted To stop the use of the compiled cross references enter an at sign at the CROSS REFERENCE ROUTINE prompt At this point the cross references are considered uncompiled and Fileman will not use the routine for re indexing If you decide later to recompile the cross references you will be shown the routine name previously used so that you can easily reuse the same routine name Stopping the use of the compiled cross reference does not delete the compiled routines If you want you can delete those routines manually OUTPUT Transform Sometimes you might want to display a field differently from the way in which it is stored For example a Social Security Number can
278. pUOR seo rero tte etes 162 177 Cross references EE AANS Guide dea E E PR EAE 166 Ren Em 163 Data Dictionary Utilities Metu ue etat tot EE 32 47 49 Data EE E 229 Data Export to Foreign Format Menu ierant eterne 227 Data OLIN AUS d cade anrea apn sarah vantanlian Eea KoE AEE EErEE ans SASE EEA DaT 191 Data Should Not be Flattened E Inipottine Datassist nt nter repete ri ee o addat boats 214 Data KE COMPUTED geed 129 EE eege 150 RR RE 124 ere 144 FRERE PEX P MN 127 Eeer 147 rte ergeet ees Coe utd Ut Met a d 135 Example testatore ates Geer Ee 154 155 Numeric oubfields Examples educ te osos tee ete bus 156 E 134 IR LE 125 POINTER TO A BIER e heit Man UN bas ide d tian toten ittis et un 131 Example EE 152 EE 126 E E 146 KEE EE ECH NEE 132 Example e eebe 153 WORD P ROCESS IN Geaa d tiet ro Taren I S oni is adii usse Le en 128 EXample dont fatte EE Eder 149 DATE Eield A D EE 214 DATEFORMAT reel eege 229 ELSE ee ET 215 OP e EE 225 IR RER detecte eoe e dien aet Mn eode mite leat 225 326 March 2013 Index Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Define Foreign File Format OpHOr uerit series 195 217 227 DELELE ACCESS c Em 264 Dependency on Correct Data Communication eee 190 Descriptive DIaHs CS svi Gu iere aiu e acts bec ode e tu eee RE ow aor seated 11 CELLO Seb odii tta A teo a edt oss caca dr 12 DEVICEEHe EE 204 BAA E AE Hee eg 204 Re Pl 28 DIRDEX OpIUOD E 167 168 RAR dO P 175 176 Dis
279. play Filegram Template OpHon eot uere te Ee 268 271 DIUTILIEY Wert acs wes aitesipeehcenn 5 37 141 159 162 167 168 174 177 207 DIXREF EE 162 177 eme CONVENU ONS e ee VA FileMan Retter Sege 87 TONS c tis srie elle a lait cee aati e Pea raat REE increas tert is a 215 EIERE 5 16 17 252 273 E EE MC s 244 Edit ODOM EE 177 179 EE e Ee Ee ai tentis eee rente ob a E cse npa toti ie 70 Enter or Edit File Entries Option 6 59 60 63 65 83 136 139 141 174 181 276 Ix Vaso HA EN RE 142 Join Extended et EE Relational INAVIGdHO a s totos intere Le ii Uia tad 64 Relational Navicat Onesies ie esae ha aste E Lu taped 57 Exchange eege EUNE EEEE ERN ENES B ED ada What Applications Can You Exchange Data With 189 DxportDatr Options onedeng eelere 194 197 201 EXPORT FIELD MulBiple s nectit metet Red 221 224 225 EXPORF FIELDS lemplates rna a i 207 March 2013 327 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Index EXPORT Templates 194 198 200 202 207 217 219 220 221 222 224 225 227 228 230 Eelere 11 189 190 193 222 Exportine Data es ee e E ENE E R NE i E ee E 202 et CG sees acctielatat ua tearabeare nie ates luotsen a terea Raglan EEEa tate chine an ail EEEE 206 ege 205 Send Export Data To a Devices a oie nter toe to ten te retenta 203 Send Export Data To a Host F3e s con ob pde e ere 204 e even Deb b nO eet NEEDED aee 194 P
280. ple field a special screen appears that displays information about the Multiple as a whole NOTE If you wanted to delete the entire Multiple field you would enter an at sign at the MULTIPLE FIELD LABEL prompt 156 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual After viewing this screen you can proceed to add fields to the Multiple or to edit existing Subfields This is done at the Select SUB FIELD prompt that is displayed when you exit Screen Mode shown below Numeric Subfield After selecting a Multiple valued field e g the RESPONSES Multiple field in the ORDER file 100 you can enter or modify the Multiple s subfields by entering the field s number or name label at the Select xxxxxxx SUB FIELD prompt where xxxxxxx represents the name of the Multiple A 01 field with the same name as the Multiple field was added automatically when the field was identified as a Multiple The 01 field is the identifying key for an entry in the Subfile Multiple it is similar to a file s 01 field which is the file s identifying key In the following example the 01 subfield is edited to have a DATA TYPE of NUMERIC Select RESPONSES SUB FIELD 01 Enter ITEM ENTRY You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the subfield as shown below Field 01 in Sub File 100 045 of File 100 FIELD LABEL ITEM ENTRY DATA TYPE NUM
281. port Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual FMPATIENT TWO 29 FMPATIENT THREE 47 FMPATIENT FOUR 38 In order to use fixed length data format both applications the exporting application and the importing application must be able to recognize the format How to Export Data The following menu shows the options used to export data Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Data Export to Foreign Format DDXP EXPORT MENU Define Foreign File Format DDXP DEFINE FORMAT gt Locked with DDXP DEFINE Select Fields for Export DDXP SELECT EXPORT FIELDS Create Export Template DDXP CREATE EXPORT TEMPLATE Export Data DDXP EXPORT DATA Print Format Documentation DDXP FORMAT DOCUMENTATION If you know how to print file entries you already know most of the procedures to export file entries The Export Tool is based on the standard Fileman Print File Entries option e REF For more information on the Print File Entries option see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the Fileman User Manual The Export Tool creates a specially formatted print output Some limitations apply to data exports that do not apply to setting up a regular print e g WORD PROCESSING type fields cannot be exported Some capabilities are available when exporting that are not when you are printing e g the records you export can be longer than 245 characters if you are using a delimited format see the desc
282. r example the text following TAB 121 will begin at column 12 the text following TAB C will be centered WIDTH arg Specifies that the text that follows it will always be printed in a column arg characters wide Arg in other words is the difference between the left margin position and the right margin position lus one NOTE In the absence of aWIDTH specification the output column width is determined by the user or defaulted by the system at print time NOWRAP Causes the text that follows it to be printed line for line without wraparound This eliminates the need to end each line with a tab or start the line with a space to force the line to be printed as it stands WRAP Causes the text that follows it to be printed in wraparound mode This is the default setting UNDERLINE arg Causes the arg to be underlined Starts underlining Underlining continues until a second _ is encountered This only works on printers that underline 306 March 2013 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual WR REF For additional information about functions see the Computed Expressions section Q NOTE In order to print a character you must enter it as Likewise to print enter I 11 March 2013 307 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Glossary Glossary 001 FIELD 01 FIELD ALERTS ANSI ANSIM API 308 A field containing the int
283. r Relations e EE 47 Standard and Modified Standard Data Diceponartes 38 Templates Only Formate cede sas slt ea dct testes oie asd 45 List Pile Attributes e DE 32 35 38 Lookup Prompts eeu pA ghee etu he vue f ate tenet EEN Eeer Ee 168 Mandatory Required Field Check Option ees 182 Map Pointer te EE e e DEE 47 MAXIMUM OUTPUT TEIN GT ly Biel ttes repito retos eh tet 220 Mersing E 239 MESSAGE EE 132 MNEMONIC E 163 Modify Destination File E HEEN 249 250 332 March 2013 Index Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Modify File Attributes Option 37 76 119 120 121 122 124 126 127 128 129 130 131 134 138 141 142 143 159 174 249 258 Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage Option 288 Multiline Return ET Relational BE EE 64 OU MO EE 163 NAME PG f ters scvcucice vst eat EEA AEEA EEEE EOE EEA 120 292 NAME Feld 90 EE 214 NAME OF FOREIGN FIELD EE 221 Namespace Comparte Options E 231 Naming a New PI ausis sat kei eae pde ite nd eee aba deeb ol Gaeta 119 NEW PERSON EIS cct veeteetaet o tent obedece addat ide 16 17 153 270 NEW PERSON File 200 oteectoutti bitu i dll lee EAN NA 153 214 New Style KEES UE 171 Dele Uie cote Tt IE e edt tav theod PNE 172 ELE 170 OPEN PARAMETER Fieldsi iei serinin ar i e o a or ubt te assem 204 occi Sin ira ia Er E AAE ESETE Sachs Gees See gba auspice eases ieee nee Conmptuted EX PreSSION EE 71 OPTION ee 135 ee Data E E 193 Modify Tetris SCA deter ih e
284. r example whenever an entry is made in a file a trigger could automatically enter the current date into another field holding the creation date User Class Identification a computing area The MGR UCI is typically the Manager s account while VAH or ROU may be Production accounts Send a file from one computer system to another usually using communications software March 2013 Glossary USER ACCESS VA VARIABLE VHA VISN VPID March 2013 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual This term is used to refer to a limited level of access to a computer system which is sufficient for using operating a package but does not allow programming modification to data dictionaries or other operations that require programmer access Any option for example can be locked with the key XUPROGMODE which means that invoking that option requires programmer access The user s access level determines the degree of computer use and the types of computer programs available The System Manager assigns the user an access level Department of Veterans Affairs Character or group of characters that refer s to a value M previously referred to as MUMPS recognizes 3 types of variables local variables global variables and special variables Local variables exist in a partition of main memory and disappear at sign off A global variable is stored on disk potentially available to any user Global variables usually exist as parts of
285. r explanation see the Write Entries to Temporary Storage section You can create a new FILEGRAM type template with this option or edit an existing one created using the Filegram or Archiving options 286 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual W9 NOTE Only those fields defined in the FILEGRAM type template the 01 field and any PRIMARY KEY or Identifier fields will be archived to permanent storage The PRIMARY KEY is available as of Version 22 0 You create a FILEGRAM type template just as you create a PRINT template except only valid field numbers or names can be entered You cannot include print qualifiers You always get the STORE FILEGRAM LOGIC IN TEMPLATE prompt no matter how many fields you identify FILEGRAM type templates are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 so the FILEGRAM type template is referred to as a PRINT template in the dialogue However Fileman can distinguish between PRINT and FILEGRAM type templates If you want to edit an existing FILEGRAM type template identify it at the FIRST SEND FIELD prompt by entering Filegram templatename Otherwise specify the fields you want included in the archive The 01 field and the file s PRIMARY KEY and Identifier fields will always be sent In the example that follows all fields are being sent eq NOTE The PRIMARY KEY is available as of Version 22 0 Here is an example of creating a FILEGRAM type template Select A
286. rch 2013 33 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Here is a sample of a Brief data dictionary listing of an elementary file of patients BRIEF DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 1 SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX NAME 16026 01 FREE TEXT characters in length SEX DATE OF BIRTH 1 1 1860 AND 1963 RELIGION FILE 13 DIAGNOSIS Multiple DIAGNOSIS characters in length AGE AT ONSET Decimal Digits HISTORY PROCESSING PROVIDER FILE ORDER 6 1 16 2 SSN Social Security Number Answer must be 3 30 16026 1 16026 2 16026 3 16026 4 16026 04 01 Answer must be 3 30 16026 04 1 Type a Number between 0 and 100 O0 16026 04 2 16026 42 WORD 16026 5 VARIABLE POINTER PREFIX LAYGO MESSAGE S n STAFF PROVIDER O y OTHER PROVIDER 16026 6 FREE TEXT SET m FOR MALE f FOR FEMALE DATE TYPE A DATE BETWEEN POINTER TO RELIGION 16026 04 FREE TEXT NUMBER Enter 9 numbers without 34 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual dashes The information in the data dictionary reports originated in the definition of the file and its fields REF For a detailed explanation of the source of the information displayed by the List File Attributes option see the Creating Files and Fields section This data dictionary listing tells you that for each patient the follow
287. re than one field Keys are stored in the KEY file 11 31 To find an entry in a file using a value for one of its fields Massachusetts General Hospital Utility Multi Programming System M formerly named MUMPS is a software package which consists of a high level programming language and a built in database The descriptive words that appear when a list of option choices is displayed Specifically the Menu Text field of the OPTION file 19 For example User s Toolbox is the menu text of the XUSERTOOLS option The option s synonym is TBOX Abbreviated as M The American National Standards Institute ANSI computer language used by Fileman and throughout VISTA The acronym MUMPS stands for Massachusetts General Hospital Utility Multi Programming System 315 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Glossary NAME FIELD NAMESPACE NODE NON CANONIC NUMBER NON NULL NULL NULL RESPONSE NUMERIC EXPRESSION 316 The one field that must be present for every file and file entry It is also called the 01 field At a file s creation the 01 field is given the label NAME This label can be changed A convention for naming VISTA package elements The Database Administrator DBA assigns unique character strings for package developers to use in naming routines options and other package elements so that packages may coexist The DBA also assigns a separate range of file numbers to each package In a tree structure
288. ription of the Maximum Output Length FOREIGN FORMAT attribute below These differences are discussed below March 2013 193 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools The steps to export data are 1 2 3 Make sure there is a FOREIGN FORMAT file 4 44 entry available to export your data in the format expected by the receiving application Select the fields you want to export Select Fields for Export option This creates a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template Create an EXPORT Template This is where you combine the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template with a desired FOREIGN FORMAT Export Data option This is where you select which entries to export and perform the export Make Sure a FOREIGN FORMAT File Entry is Available First you need to determine an ASCII data format some form of delimited or fixed length that your foreign application will recognize This is the format you will need the Export Tool to generate This data format must be set up in advance as an entry in the FOREIGN FORMAT file 1 44 The following are the major format parameters stored in a FOREIGN FORMAT file 4 44 entry What delimiters are used between fields Does the export use fixed length fields What headers to output before the body of the data and what footers after the data Any special formatting for specific DATA TYPE field values e g dates and numbers Some formats are already set up in advance in
289. rmine all matches The matching process finds a match when the values of all the answered prompts match with that of an archived entry If a partial value is typed at any prompt the matching process finds all matches that begin with the partial value for that particular prompt See the following dialogue for finding archived entries Select ARCHIVE OPTION FIND ARCHIVED ENTRIES This option will scan your archived file and will attempt to retrieve entries that match the name 01 field and or the identifier field s of the archived file Magnetic tapes should be opened with variable length records SEQUENTIAL ARCHIVE DEVICE HFS DISK FILE HOST FILE NAME TMP TMP ARC DAT You are reading archived information from the CHANGE file Do you want to continue YES Enter Multiple requests may be made One set of all prompts makes one request This archived file contains an index of all archived entries Do you want to see the index now YES Enter NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 Enter NO Enter Enter VERSION id Enter Enter PROGRAMMER id FMPATIENT 30 Enter NO Enter Enter VERSION id Enter Enter PROGRAMMER id Enter Enter NO Enter 294 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual PRINT FOUND ENTRIES TO DEVICE Enter DECSERVER S
290. rresponding destination file entries The following Exception Report is printed when the Extract Tool fails to move all of the data in a source entry into the destination file A failed INPUT transform is one possible cause of such a failure In this case the incomplete entry in the destination file is deleted The source entry is not locked and its internal entry number is deleted from the extract list The March 2013 263 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool total number of entries extracted is reduced by the total numbers of entries appearing on the exception report EXTRACT ACTIVITY EXCEPTION REPORT JUN 27 1996 PAGE 1 EXTRACT ACTIVITY 9 ARCHIVER FMEMPLOYEE J THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES IN THE TEST FILE WERE NOT MOVED BY THE EXTRACT TOOL Entry 9 was NOT processed because The value NEW for field FTEXT MULT LABEL in FTEXT MULT SUB FIELD in file TEST is not valid Enter 30 was NOT processed because The value NEW for field FTEXT MULT LABEL in FTEXT MULT SUB FIELD in file TEST is not valid PLEASE KEEP THIS FOR FUTURE REFERENCE The following is a list of recommended steps to take when an exception report is printed 1 Finish the active extract activity by purging or canceling 2 Determine the problem with the source entry and fix it 3 If there are several entries on the exception report start another extract activity Your SEARCH SORT template can be reused to use
291. rties of the field as shown below Field 68 in File 100 FIELD LABEL RELEASE DATE TIME DATA TYPE DATE Seer See aa a EE 1 EARLIEST DATE NENHEENENEEEEEEEEN AU LATEST DATE CAN DATE BE IMPRECISE NO CAN TIME OF DAY BE ENTERED YES CAN SECONDS BE ENTERED YES IS TIME REQUIRED YES IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Enter the Date time this order was release4d to the service XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert March 2013 145 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value DATE TIME type fields do not have any required entries You can accept all the default values within the popup window simply by closing the window by pressing the F1 C keys NOTE To delete the entire field enter an at sign at the FIELD LABEL prompt SET OF CODES Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the FLAGGED field 4 61 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of SET OF CODES Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD FLAGGED You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as sho
292. s Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual S test value test value expression is an expression that can be evaluated as True or False not zero or zero value is any expression that can yield a value Parameters S TORAGE Each value is associated with the test from which it is separated by a colon The function returns the evaluation of the value associated with the first test that evaluates as true i e not equal to zero Any number of test value pairs can be used however one of the tests must evaluate as true To assure that one test will always evaluate as true the last test is usually the literal 1 S SIX FMPROVIDER Ph D M D He is a medical doctor 1 He is not a medical doctor gt He is not a medical doctor S OCCURRENCES 3 Chronic Condition OCCUR RENCES 0 Non Chronic Condition 1 No Occurrences Recorded gt Chronic Condition Here the contents of the OCCURRENCES field is being tested If the first test 23 is true as in this example the result of the second test 20 is not relevant Eme KC i system variable returns the number of bytes of free space available for use Its meaning varies with the M implementation X March 2013 117 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Rma KC system variable returns the current X coordinate column location of the cursor or print head If the application that moved the cursor did not update the
293. s Committee This Committee is responsible for maintaining the SAC A graph in which occurrences of two fields are displayed on an X Y coordinate grid to aid in data analysis The saved results of a search operation Usually the actual entries found are stored in addition to the criteria used to select those entries The purpose of Security Keys is to set a layer of protection on the range of computing capabilities available with a particular software package The availability of options is based on the level of system access granted to each user 319 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Glossary SENSITIVE PATIENT SEPG SET OF CODES SIMPLE EXTENDED POINTERS SOFTWARE PACKAGE 320 Patient whose record contains certain information which may be deemed sensitive by a facility such as political figures employees patients with a particular eligibility or medical condition If a shared patient is flagged as sensitive at one of the treating sites a bulletin is sent to the DG SENSITIVITY mail group at each subscribing site telling where when and by whom the flag was set Each site can then review whether the circumstances meet the local criteria for sensitivity flagging Software Engineering Process Group SEPG renamed the Engineering Process Group EPG A DATA TYPE field value where a short character string is defined to represent a longer value An extended pointer that uses a pre existing pointer relations
294. screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD ORDER TEXT You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 01 in Sub File 772 02 of File 772 FIELD LABEL MESSAGE TEX DATA TYPE WORD PROCESSING A O a SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE YES A SHALL CHARACTERS IN THIS TEXT BE TREATED LIKE ANY OTHER CHARACTERS NO WRITE ACCESS SOURCE March 2013 149 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT The text of the incoming messages for this transmission XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With WORD PROCESSING type fields Fileman asks two questions in the popup window SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE If you answer YES to this question text is automatically wrapped at word boundaries to fit in the column in which it is being printed Yes is the default SHALL ud CHARACTERS IN THIS TEXT BE TREATED LIKE ANY OTHER CHARACTERS
295. se from 1 TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES 2 COMPARE MERGE FILE ENTRIES March 2013 245 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries 3 NAMESPACE COMPARE Select TRANSFER OPTION 3 NAMESPACE COMPARE UCI home dev1 g db gld START WITH What File LANGUAGE 533 entries GO TO What File LANGUAGE lt Enter gt 533 entries Compare to what UCI home sample emptyENV g mumps gld Select one of the following 1 DATA DICTIONARY ONLY 2 FILE ENTRIES ONLY 3 DATA DICTIONARY AND FILE ENTRIES Enter response 3 lt Enter gt DATA DICTIONARY AND FILE ENTRIES DISPLAY COMPARISON ON DEVICE HOME lt Enter gt TELNET MAR 13 2013 FILEMAN MUMPS ORG UCI home dev1 g db gld UCI home sample emptyENV g mumps gld DATA DICTIONARY 85 LANGUAGE INDEX B Regular new style B Index ENTRIES IN FILE 85 LANGUAGE LANGUAGE FRENCH 4 DATE INPUT QO LANGUAGE 8 ABKHAZ LANGUAGE 9 ACHINESE LANGUAGE 13 ACOLI LANGUAGE 14 ADANGME LANGUAGE 15 ADYGHE LANGUAGE 16 AFAR LANGUAGE 17 AFRIHILI LANGUAGE 19 AFRIKAANS P Type Enter to continue or to exit o You cannot compare a GT M database against a Cache database eo Under GT M your Global Directory file must contain only absolute path references to use the Namespace Compare option If you Global 246 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Directory uses relative paths or environmental
296. ss REF For a full description of archiving in Fileman see the Error Reference source not found section Using Filegrams Here is a summary of the basic steps needed to send and install a filegram 1 The filegram sender creates a FILEGRAM type template for a specified file Create Edit Filegram Template option The Display Filegram Template option can be used to review the template 2 The sender can optionally designate specifiers with the Specifiers option These are used for matching existing entries with filegrams 3 The sender then generates a filegram for a specific entry Generate Filegram option The filegram is placed into a MailMan message The filegram sender sends this message to an individual or individuals at a remote or local destination 4 The recipient receives the Filegram with MailMan reading the mail message containing the filegram and forwarding it to S DIFG SRV March 2013 269 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 13 Filegrams HISTORY This is a special server that loads the message into the recipient s FILEGRAM HISTORY file 11 12 and sets up the interface between Fileman and MailMan on the target system 5 If you want to install the filegram on a system other than the one where you received it instead of immediately forwarding to the S DIFG SRV HISTORY server forward the message to an individual on the ultimate target system who in turn forwards it to their S DIFG SRV HISTORY server
297. t Fileman is it is probably best to begin with what Fileman isn t Fileman isn t a clinical package like Laboratory or Pharmacy and it isn t an administrative package like IFCAP Fileman is an infrastructure package meaning it is part of what makes VISTA run Programmers use the features in Fileman when creating those other packages Lab and Pharmacy and IFCAP and so on Because the same infrastructure packages and tools are used throughout VISTA similar commands keystrokes and shortcuts can be used in all of them In learning to use the features in Fileman you are learning to use features in all of the other packages Fileman is the shorter more informal name of the package File Manager is its formal name As you may have guessed from the name the specific part of the infrastructure that File Manager handles is files That is Fileman manages VISTA s massive database Fileman commands are all about data entering it editing it retrieving it sorting it printing it making it into reports Although Fileman was written for VISTA it does not need to be used with VISTA It can be installed as a standalone database management system 4 March 2013 Getting Started II Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Getting Started II Chapter 1 Templates Revisited The Template Edit option available on the Fileman Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY is used to edit each of the three types of Fileman templates INPUT PRINT SORT For each t
298. t help prompt or change it using the Replace With syntax d NOTE This help information is displayed when the user inputs a single question mark when editing this field 158 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities Various file utilities are provided as options on Fileman s Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY e NOTE Some additional functionality for modifying files is contained in the separate Modify File Attributes option which is on the main Fileman menu Verify Fields Located on the Utility Functions menu the Verify Fields option uses a field s definition to verify the data stored in a file After invoking this option you identify the file you want to examine Then at the VERIFY WHICH FIELD prompt you can ask for values of a specific field to be checked or you can ask that all fields be verified by entering ALL at the prompt The Verify Fields option will report if the value stored in the file is not a valid value based on the field s data type and input transform For example Adate field must contain a valid Fileman date The code of a set of codes field must be one of the specified codes Anumber must be a number within the specified range A pointer or variable pointer value must point to an existing entry in the pointed to file Ifthe field has an input transform the value will be checked against that transform and if necessary it wil
299. t will go into the merged entry enter that field s number The following example shows the initial defaults in brackets and the response to switching the value for the SSN field COMPARISON OF SCHOLAR FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 1 March 2013 241 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 1 NAME FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 2 SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 3 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY 4 DATE OF BIRTH 1872 Default is enclosed in brackets e g FMPATIENT 23 A Enter 1 4 to change a default value to exit report RETURN to continue 2 COMPARISON OF SCHOLAR FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 1 SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 1 NAME FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 2 SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 3 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY 4 DATE OF BIRTH 1872 Default is enclosed in brackets e g FMPATIENT 23 A Enter 1 4 to change a default value to exit report RETURN to continue Enter e NOTE The DATE OF BIRTH field from FMPATIENT 23 H is bracketed because the default entry has no value for that field it is null When the default merged to entry has no data in a field data will always be brought over from the merged from entry You have no control over this aspect of the merging Even if you attempt to switch the data val
300. ta dictionary listings is the key to displaying changing and deleting the data in individual file entries Indexes and Cross references Only The Indexes and Cross References Only format shows the Traditional cross references and New Style indexes that are defined on a file Here is a sample Indexes and Cross References Only data dictionary listing INDEX AND CROSS REFERENCE LIST FILE 16026 12 24 98 PAGE 1 File 16026 Traditional Cross References B REGULAR Field NAME 16026 01 Description Automatically created regular x ref used to look up and sort entries based on the value in the 01 NAME field 1 S DIZ 16026 B SE X 1 30 DA 2 K DIZ 16026 B E X 1 30 DA New Style Indexes KEYA 6 RECORD REGULAR IR LOOKUP amp SORTING Unique for Key A 5 File 16026 Short Descr Uniqueness Index for Key A of File 16026 46 March 2013 Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Set Logic S DIZ 16026 KEYA X 1 X 2 DA Kill Logic K DIZ 16026 KEYA X 1 X 2 DA Whole Kill K DIZ 16026 KEYA X 1 NAME 16026 01 Subscr 1 X 2 SSN 16026 6 Subscr 2 Subfile 16026 04 Traditional Cross References B REGULAR Field DIAGNOSIS 16026 04 01 1 S DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B E X 1 30 DA 2 K DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B E X 1 30 DA Keys Only The Keys Only format shows the keys that are defined on a file Here is a sample K
301. ta is overriding Therefore you can use the MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH field to specify how long a physical record will be For field delimited as opposed to fixed length exports this record length can be larger than the traditional M data limit of 255 characters Put a number from 0 through 9999 into this field The default record length is 80 If you want the user to be prompted for a record length at the time that an EXPORT template is being created put 0 zero into this field 220 March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Regardless of the length of the maximum record a carriage return will be written after each record is output e NOTE The length of a record cannot exceed 255 characters when using a fixed length format CAUTION When sending exports to a Host file on a DSM for OpenVMS e g VAX system you must add a parameter to the OPEN command if any of your exported records are longer than 512 characters See the Export Data section for details NEED FOREIGN FIELD NAMES If this field is answered YES the user is prompted for a field name for each exported field when the EXPORT template is created The field names are stored in the NAME OF FOREIGN FIELD field in the EXPORT FIELD Multiple in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 1 4 REF For one way to use this information see the discussion in the FILE HEADER section QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS When importing data Fileman wi
302. tcannot have any set or kill conditions e t must consist of only field type cross reference values all of which are used as subscripts that is it can contain no computed values No subscripts can have transforms Create a Key To create a key proceed in the following manner Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILITY OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT Enter Select Subfile Enter There are no Keys defined on file 716026 Want to create a new Key for this file No YES Enter a Name for the new Key A Enter Creating new Key A You will then be taken into Screen Mode i e Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the key Enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt for additional help Number 5 EDIT A KEY Page 1 of 1 File 16026 0 Name A Priority PRIMARY KEY FIELDS Field _ Seq No File Field Name Uniqueness Index Index Details 184 March 2013 Chapter 9 File Utilities Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert On this screen in the KEY FIELDS section you can select the fields you wish to include in this key and assign each field a sequence number The sequence number determines the order in which the fields appear as subscripts in the Uniqueness Index If you select the key fields in this manner leave the Uniqueness Index field blank When you
303. th Sometimes users may mistype and answer a field prompt with same key as or some other meaningless punctuation character A PATTERN MATCH check such as X 1P E will keep that kind of mistake out of your database Carets in a FREE TEXT Field If you are going to have carets in a FREE TEXT field it is advisable to create the field on a node by itself You should create the field as usual but when Fileman asks for the PIECE POSITION reply with E1 maximum length as shown below Select FIELD SPECIAL SITUATION Are you adding SPECIAL SITUATION as a new FIELD the 3RD No X FIELD NUMBER 11 50 148 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual DATA TYPE OF SPECIAL SITUATION FREE TEXT MINIMUM LENGTH 3 MAXIMUM LENGTH 200 OPTIONAL PATTERN MATCH IN X WILL MY TRY FIELD BE MULTIPLE No The E1 200 means that the field occupies positions 1 through 200 of the node SUBSCRIPT 0 50 PIECE POSITION 1 E1 200 IS MY TRY ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter HELP PROMPT Answer must be 3 200 characters in length Replace Enter XECUTABLE HELP DESCRIPTION No existing text Edit NO WORD PROCESSING Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the ORDER TEXT field 4 11 in the ORDER file 2100 has a value of WORD PROCESSING Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the
304. that contain only punctuation are always printed as is Thus if you 302 March 2013 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual put a single space on a line the previous line will not be filled and the subsequent line will begin in column one eo NOTE The editor s line numbers are meaningful only when editing Since word processing data is usually printed in a wraparound mode what is internally line three might be printed as lines five and six Tabs Tabs can be meaningful wherever they occur in a line e NOTE If you insert a tab by typing the special Tab key on the keyboard or lt Ctrl I gt on terminals without a Tab key a Tabl will be inserted in the text instead When editing a tab is recognized as Tabl not as five blank spaces Formatting Text with Word Processing Windows Frames Expressions framed by vertical bars are known as word processing windows or frames and are evaluated as computed expression at print time and will be printed as evaluated MailMan does not typically evaluate expressions within vertical bars neither does the Inquire to File Entries option or the CAPTIONED PRINT template For example TODAY 1 will print out tomorrow s date You can use word processing windows to insert one of the following into the text of a WORD PROCESSINC type field when that WORD PROCESSING type field is printed A Field Name A Computed Expression Text Formatting Expressi
305. that is associated with the name of a set to identify a particular subset or element In M a numeric or string value that is enclosed in parentheses is appended to the name of a local or global variable and identifies a specific node within an array 321 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Glossary SUPPORTED REFERENCE INTEGRATION AGREEMENT TASK MANAGER TEMPLATE TRIGGER UCI UPLOAD 322 This applies where any VISTA application may use the attributes functions defined by the IA these are also called Public An example is an IA that describes a standard API such as DIE or VADPT The package that creates maintains the Supported Reference must ensure it is recorded as a Supported Reference in the IA database There is no need for other VISTA packages to request an IA to use these references they are open to all by default Kernel module that schedules and processes background tasks also called TaskMan Means of storing report formats data entry formats and sorted entry sequences A template is a permanent place to store selected fields for use at a later time Edit sequences are stored in the INPUT TEMPLATE file 4 402 print specifications are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 4 and search or sort specifications are stored in the SORT TEMPLATE file 1 401 A type of Fileman cross reference Often used to update values in the database given certain conditions as specified in the trigger logic Fo
306. the Edit File option to Edit the Name of a File Edit the file name at the FILE NAME prompt Delete a File If you enter an at sign at the FILE NAME prompt you are given the choice of deleting the entire file and its data attribute dictionary including all of its templates and file definitions or just deleting the current individual entries in the file However you cannot delete a file that is pointed to by another file Enter or Edit the Description of a File You can enter or edit the word processing text description for documenting the file at the DESCRIPTION prompt This description appears in the Standard Modified Standard and Global Map format data dictionary listings Enter or Edit the Application Group You can enter or edit the Application Group at the Select APPLICATION GROUP prompt Enter a namespace from two to four characters indicating a package accessing this file Enter or Edit the Developer s Name You can enter or edit the name of the package developer at the DEVELOPER prompt Entering two question marks lets you choose from a list of names Enter or Edit the File Access Parameters You can enter or edit the security access to a file by making entries at the DATA DICTIONARY ACCESS READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS DELETE ACCESS LAYGO ACCESS and or AUDIT ACCESS prompts March 2013 179 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 9 File Utilities 180 Ask Do Not
307. the FOREIGN FORMAT file 1 44 targeted towards specific foreign applications These include 194 Word Data File Comma Excel Comma Excel Tab 1 2 3 Import Numbers March 2013 Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual e 1 2 3 Data Parse Oracle Delimited Keep in mind that applications are often updated A format that worked for one version may not work for a different version or a more efficient simpler format might be possible for a different version REF The full details of the export parameters that can be set up for exporting are described in the FOREIGN FORMAT File Attributes Reference section In many cases you will be able to use an existing FOREIGN FORMAT file 44 entry for your export If you need to create a new FOREIGN FORMAT file entry rather than using an existing entry set up the new entry with the Define Foreign File Format option Select Fields for Export Option In the previous step you determined the data format for your export and made sure there was a corresponding FOREIGN FORMAT file 44 entry The next step is to choose what file and field data to export Do this using the Select Fields for Export Option this creates a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template The process of creating a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template is very similar to the way you choose fields for printing with the Print File Entries option Qo REF For details on selecting fields see t
308. the field label indicate the entries contain different data in those fields This simple report compares the data in each field in the two entries Merging Entries You can use the Compare Merge File Entries option to merge entries To do this 1 Identify a file 2 Identify the two entries to be compared 3 At the MERGE THESE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM prompt answer YES 4 Choose which entry will supply the default values Choose to retain or delete the merge from record Optionally adjust field by field which entry supplies the default value 7 Choose to proceed with the merge summarize before merging or re edit the merge criteria ON O1 The Merge process is described in detail via an example below MERGE THESE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM NO YES 1 FMPATIENT 23 A 2 FMPATIENT 23 H After choosing a file and two entries to compare enter YES at the MERGE THESE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM NO prompt to merge the entries as well as compare them You now specify which of the two entries will be used to supply the default values The entry you choose will be the merge to entry that will contain the merged data 240 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual NOTE Records will be merged into the entry selected for the default WHICH ENTRY SHOULD BE USED FOR DEFAULT VALUES 1 OR 2 1 Records will be merged into FMPATIENT 23 A
309. tion you will again be shown the values in both entries with your current selections in brackets and will have the opportunity to switch the data going into the merge to entry Namespace Compare Option The Namespace Compare option allows you to compare data dictionary and file contents across VISTA instances You select the UCI that you want to compare to your UCI Then you select the file or range of files you want to compare Finally you specify whether you want the data dictionary the file contents or both to be compared The following example shows the comparison of both Data Dictionary and File Entries for the Language file The current UCI is identified You select the file to be compared the target UCI and the scope of the comparison The report has two columns one for each UCI It first lists differences between the Data Dictionaries In this case the target UCI does not have a B Index Then File Entries are compared When a difference is identified the value of the entry s 01 field and its IEN is shown as a heading followed by fields containing different values along with their values Here the DATE INPUT field has a value of Q in the home UCI and no value in the target UCI Finally this example lists entries that exist in the home UCI but are missing in the target UCI Sample Namespace Compare Session Select OPTION TRANSFER ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION Answer with TRANSFER OPTION NUMBER or NAME Choo
310. tiple pointer result type Select OPTION MODIFY FILE ATTRIBUTES Do you want to use the screen mode version YES NO Modify what File ZZD TEST FILE1 6 entries Select FIELD TESTERS Are you adding TESTERS as a new FIELD the 13TH No Y FIELD NUMBER 12 DATA TYPE OF TESTERS COMPUTED COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION NEW PERSON NAME By NEW PERSON do you mean the NEW PERSON File pointing via its ZZD TEST FILE POINTER field ZZD Cross reference Yes Enter Yes TRANSLATES TO THE FOLLOWING CODE S Y 999991 12 80 G DO X DD 999991 12 9 4 S X S D0 Y 999991 12 80 FIELD IS MULTIPLE VALUED TYPE OF RESULT MULTIPLE POINTER Enter POINT TO WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter Example Defining a Computed Multiple Pointer Field Once the field is defined it can be used to retrieve the NAME field from the New Person file of entries that point to an entry in the ZZD Test Filel file Following is an example of its use in the Inquiry to File Entries option 68 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Select OPTION INQUIRE TO FILE ENTRIES Output from what File NEW PERSON ZZD TEST FILE1 6 entries Select ZZD TEST FILE1 NAME SECOND ENTRY Another one Enter Standard Captioned Output Yes NO No First Print FIELD NAME Then Print FIELD TESTERS Then Print FIELD Heading S C ZZD TEST FILE1 List Enter DEVICE HOME Enter TE
311. tivity March 2013 295 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving Archiving activities are selectable only within the Archiving options When you are doing an inquire on the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file the word ARCHIVING will appear for all archiving activities 296 March 2013 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Field Value Stuffing You can make the editing process quicker easier and more accurate by stuffing field values when appropriate The amount of data that needs to be entered from the keyboard can be reduced by providing responses that can be verified by pressing the Enter key or that are automatically put into the file Unvalidated Stuffs 4 If you have programmer access you can define a default that does not go through the INPUT transform by using four slashes If you use this kind of default you must show the internally stored value of the field For example the SEX field has a DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES where m stands for MALE and f stands for FEMALE you could define a four slash stuff like this EDIT WHICH FIELD SEX m Variable Stuffs An even more powerful kind of default is the variable default In this mode you specify not a literal value like the word MALE but rather a field name from which to calculate the default value for each entry being edited One example of the
312. tput produced by these print specifications PATIENT LIST OCT 1 1996 15 12 PAGE 1 NAME EXAM DATE FMPATIENT 13 DEC 22 1995 FMPATIENT 14 FMPATIENT 15 1995 1993 FMPATIENT 10 SEP 29 1995 JUN 22 1996 The resulting output is a two column report containing names from the PATIENT file and corresponding examination dates from the RADIOLOGY EXAM file Since there may be several RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries for 62 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual a given patient this report is an example of a Multiple valued Multiline result being returned eo REF For more information on Multiline results being returned see the Multiline Return Values section You can use Backwards Extended Pointers in the following places in Fileman EDIT WHICH FIELD prompt Enter or Edit File Entries option SEARCH FOR FIELD prompt Search File Entries option SORT BY prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option PRINT FIELD prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option Join Extended Pointer You can establish an extended pointer link even if there is no pre existing pointer relationship between the two files You use a value from one file to do a lookup in a second file Suppose you store in the PAY FACTOR file a list of factors for calculating taxes Each entry in this file corresponds to a different pay scale In the PERSONNEL file you have a field called
313. treat 267 274 275 Fileeranp Mentis ssec ioe weed erdt PE du ei uu IER 278 285 FILEGRAM type Templates 268 269 270 271 273 278 279 285 286 BUS STAINS PCM E 267 278 284 285 UE Eet E EE 268 Bn c 276 Display Filegram Template ODHOTL ui eet rino este e ete ne ots its 271 Generate Filegtam ODDO oie tette dt bre s enar theses teen 273 Install Verify Filegram Option ecco teles rre eror 276 art 268 Receiving Filegrams with MailMan seen 274 Kee DER e Nc E 2 2 DLO PS eM E E 269 E E 267 Bur CR 268 View Filegram EE EE 275 ELE EE 190 203 204 208 Creating Examples vedete lean obo diye sh oes EE 143 March 2013 329 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Index data POD CI eot tete terae t redde i tiep etie d amen POEM 20 data dictonary entry enee ee eee Daci eit n qudd 20 DEVICE 3 5 EE 204 Edit ee EE 177 file descripti ON iaaa nr vinnie EAT A ies aan ates 20 file El 19 21 FOREIGN FORMAT LHCE 194 217 jio EE 204 215 e EE RE EE 153 214 ORDER T00 c aie tero epe oo 144 146 147 149 150 152 153 156 PRINT TEMPEATE P Ahiria an a ceva cles een nietos 207 221 PRINT TEMPLATE Pile 4 sgios tute o N E 197 REEIGION CSS ecco AEA Epl uda bee CH Per boe GN utu ud 197 Bi irc ERN 159 bij M aa era eases 204 Find Archived Entries ODUOD 6 eel oet eode nen 280 290 292 Find Archived Records Opp
314. tries Between Files You can use the Transfer File Entries option to move all or a group of entries from one file to an entirely separate file To do this 1 Answer the INPUT TO WHAT FILE prompt and the TRANSFER FROM FILE prompt with different file names 2 Specify whether transferred entries should be added all as new or whether they should be merged with existing entries 3 Specify whether transferred entries should be deleted in the original file 4 Specify which entries to transfer by entering sort criteria For transfer to occur the NAME fields 4 01 of both files must have matching LABEL fields and DATA TYPE fields In this way Fileman can March 2013 235 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries identify corresponding entries Values of the fields can then be transferred Only those fields where the LABEL and DATA TYPE fields match will be transferred Before the transfer is done you are told which fields will have their data transferred The dialogue presented when transferring entries to another file is presented below In this instance you are transferring the contents of the SCHOLAR file to the NEW SCHOLAR file The NEW SCHOLAR file already exists and it does have some entries whose NAME field matches those in the SCHOLAR file Select OPTION TRANSFER ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE NEW SCHOLAR TRANSFER FROM FILE NEW SCHOLAR
315. tter case independence is preserved Thus for example if you define COMPUTED Field 2 in terms of COMPUTED Field 1 and then decide to redefine Field 1 Field 2 will 80 March 2013 Chapter 6 Computed Expressions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual automatically use the new Field 1 calculation If you try to delete a field that is referenced by a COMPUTED type field you will be warned Where to Use Computed Expressions On the Fly On the Fly Computed Expressions In addition to permanently storing a computed expression in a data dictionary there are several places within Fileman s dialogue where you can use a computed expression on the fly PRINT FIELD Prompt SEARCH FOR FIELD Prompt SORT BY Prompt Field Value Stuffing OUTPUT Transforms Word Processing Windows 1 PRINT FIELD Prompt Whenever you are within the Print or Search File Entries options you are asked FIRST PRINT FIELD OR THEN PRINT FIELD You can answer with a computed expression For example FIRST PRINT FIELD SEX_ RELIGION L33 This computed expression will return the contents of the SEX and RELIGION fields separated by a space Notice that you can follow the computed expression with print qualifiers to suppress the column March 2013 81 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 6 Computed Expressions heading and L33 to indicate that the COMPUTED field length can be 33 c
316. turn looking for the string the user entered To specify a file the user enters the file abbreviation set up for the variable pointer field followed by a period followed by the search string For example if a variable pointer pointed to the PATIENT file among others a user might enter PFMUSER to search for a specific record in that file In this example the P abbreviation is a property of the variable pointer field not of the PATIENT file The PATIENT file doesn t know that it is P A different variable pointer field might have a different way of specifying the PATIENT file for example PT The file abbreviation can also be used to get help on that specific file The user can of course obtain general help at the prompt by typing a question mark They can obtain help on a specific file by typing the abbreviation followed by the period and question mark for example P If a user has LAYGO access they can add a record at a variable pointer prompt When adding a record however the user must specify which file it 30 March 2013 Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual goes in It wouldn t be fair to make Fileman guess Fileman is awfully smart but in the end it s just a computer program As we mentioned earlier pointers and variable pointers have different internal and external values For pointers the internal value is the record number For variable pointers the internal value is the re
317. tus of your archiving activity after using this option is ARCHIVED PERMANENT In the example below the archiving activity is identified by file name CHANGE It is going to be archived to the specified tape Select ARCHIVE OPTION MOVE ARCHIVED DATA TO PERMANENT STORAGE Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY CHANGE Enter 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 ARCHIVED TEMPORARY SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING NOTE This option will 1 print an archive activity report to specified PRINTER DEVICE and 2 will move archive data to permanent storage to specified ARCHIVE STORAGE DEVICE Select some type of SEQUENTIAL storage media such as SDP TAPE or DISK FILE HFS for archival storage PRINTER DEVICE PRINTER ARCHIVE STORAGE DEVICE MAGTAPE Parameter CAVL 0 2048 DO YOU WANT YOUR OUTPUT QUEUED NO YES Requested Start Time NOW Enter ARCHIVE DEVICE LABEL ISC6V3 MUA0 ARCHIVE 083092 3 Enter If the archive storage device is tape an archive device label is generated for you as depicted in the previous example You can override this label by entering your own device label information 290 March 2013 Chapter 14 Archiving Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual If you select an archive storage device that is non sequential a warning is issued You are then given the option to continue the archiving process CAUTION If you specify a device that can be overwritten e g SDP or that does not electronically store data
318. u will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 7 in File 100 FIELD LABEL WHO ENTERED DATA TYPE VARIABLE POINTER p 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 VARIABLE POINTER FILE 1 OPTION ORDER 1 March 2013 153 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields VARIABLE POINTER FILE 2 LAB TEST ORDER 2 AU VARIABLE POINTER FILE 3 ORDER VARIABLE POINTER FILE 4 ORDER VARIABLE POINTER FILE 5 ORDER VARIABLE POINTER FILE 76 ORDER EE c mU cL ccr 1 VARIABLE POINTER 1 D MESSAGE igueyejeor PREFIX MISC SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY NO SCREEN EXPLANATION OF SCREEN Ri SSeS Se e Eege eg COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With VARIABLE POINTER type fields Fileman asks you to enter the pointed to file name and its order in the first popup window In this case the first VARIABLE POINTER file entered was the OPTION file which would already have to exist The ORDER was also set to one When you press the Enter key at the ORDER prompt for each VARIABLE POINTER there is an additional popup window i e a popup
319. ue becomes the first line of the word processing text Also you can stuff many lines of text into a DATA TYPE field of WORD PROCESSING by use of a computed expression that has a Multiline value e g another WORD PROCESSING type field Alternatively you can automatically append data to a DATA TYPE field of WORD PROCESSING by following the or with a sign This means add on the following text to whatever may already be on file Let s 298 March 2013 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual take the example of our WORD PROCESSING type HISTORY field data in the PATIENT file 200 EDIT WHICH FIELD DIAGNOSIS EDIT WHICH DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD HISTORY This case is essentially normal The text string following the is appended automatically to any HISTORY field text that already exists for the chosen patient and diagnosis If no HISTORY field text existed the string would become Line 1 of the HISTORY field text When editing the entry you see the text with the addition and can edit it in the usual way If you use three slashes instead of two the addition is made and you are not presented with the text to edit INPUT Templates Branching Within INPUT Templates Sometimes you want to dynamically control editing based on the responses given for a particular entry or on other aspects of the editing session By using a technique called branching the designer of a
320. ue to the null value and remove the brackets the data will still be brought into the merged to field 242 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual If there is more than one screen of field information Fileman will display additional screens In this case there is one field that is a Multiple The Compare Merge File Entries option neither displays data from WORD PROCESSING or Multiple fields nor allows the selection of data for the final merge to entry The number of subentries in the Multiples of the two fields is displayed COMPARISON OF PATIENT FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 2 SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H NOTE Multiples will be merged into the target record 1 TOPICS 5 entries 4 entries Enter RETURN to continue Enter The merging of data for a WORD PROCESSING field or for a Multiple and its subfields is done in the same way that the Transfer File Entries option does it Although Fileman is ready to perform the merge at this time you are prompted with other options just in case you are not ready In order to cancel the merge enter the caret at the ACTION prompt to exit OK I M READY TO DO THE MERGE Select one of the following P PROCEED to merge the data S SUMMARIZE the modifications before proceeding E EDIT the data again before proceeding ACTION These three options are P PROCEED to merge the data
321. un delet 258 Utility Le e 37 ORDER TH c Soca tete Sen ru opu cA minor aedi 122 143 178 ORDER File 4100 144 146 147 149 150 152 153 154 156 Other Options Metis ete i veo d dete md 253 280 OUTPUT e PR 267 Output Transform Op Hon ass itctacatet aero et tote ney takes es net dees 181 PACKAGE EE dree EE 48 Parentheses e EE 70 PATIENTEil C200 EE 196 297 lai 56 PREFIX PC ed 132 133 PRIMARY KEY E 137 173 285 286 March 2013 333 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Index Print File Entries Option 6 8 11 57 59 63 65 74 78 79 81 82 139 193 195 198 203 Print Format Documentation EEN 217 225 PrintOoualiliefS a i esae COP Co Lo o ved 11 12 81 196 286 Print Selected Entities Ee EE 257 284 PRINT TEMPLATE E 224 225 259 267 268 286 PRINT TEMPLATE File 95 nii oorr ENE ONA 197 207 221 PRINT Templates 6 7 8 44 84 197 200 207 248 259 268 269 271 279 286 REEL Ls ea utate rs e uU 243 PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE Eield is iecit bte 205 221 222 PROVIDER Bil Gist sic trees ieee ntn nmt Feast E T 132 133 Durge Extracted Entries Options o Cnt ur rrien RA EI ic es br fons 248 Purge Stored Entries OpEHOTLon ss eei e the eph ve 264 280 287 290 291 QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS Field o e tette retro 221 Quoted Fields in Delimited Format 192 Re Index File e EE 167 168 175 176 El PCC CSS MORENO 5 231 RECORD DEDINITEERCEIOI WEE 218 RECORD L
322. used within Fileman code when Kernel is unavailable It closes the specified device SITENUMBER Te argumentless function returns your site s identifying number that was entered during Fileman initialization and stored in DD SITE 1 Do not use this function to retrieve a VA Institution Station Number SITENUMBER gt 99 USER USER attribute Parameters attribute is one of these codes user s DUZ value the user s number N user s name I user s initials T user s title NN user s nickname W NOTE These codes must be surrounded by quotes within the function This function returns information about the currently logged on user The information comes from the NEW PERSON file 200 W NOTE This function will not work if you are using Fileman without a NEW PERSON file in VA 200 March 2013 97 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions File and File Data Functions COUNT Format COUNT fname COUNT fname field In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname Parameters DUPLICATED This function counts the number of entries in a file or in a Multiple You can count the lines in a word processing field by using the first format with the word processing field name as the fname If the sec
323. variables this option will not work properly March 2013 247 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 12 Extract Tool Chapter 12 Extract Tool Using the Extract Tool you can move or copy data from logical records in Fileman files to a new Fileman file This new file may either permit users to modify its contents or prevent users from modifying its contents and can be available for online inquiries and print processes If this new file is used to store archived data any options and utilities that create new entries or update existing entries are restricted Options and utilities that update the data dictionary are also restricted Extract Overview The following is an overview of the process of using the Extract Tool to extract entries from a file 1 Identify the files and fields from which to extract data by using information in the data dictionary listings 2 Build a destination file by creating a new field for each field in the source file 3 Select the source file entries from which data will be extracted by creating a SEARCH SORT template 4 Select the fields from which data will be extracted by creating an EXTRACT template 5 Move the extracted data to the destination file by using the Update Destination File option 6 Purge the selected entries from the active database Important Items to Note Before beginning the extract process consider each of the following important facts about the Extract Tool e An
324. ve is to send the data to a file on the host system for example to a VMS file if you are using DSM Another advantage to sending data to a Host file is that only the exported data will be in the file Often screen captures will unavoidably contain extraneous parts of the user s dialogue prior to or after the export To export your data to a file at the DEVICE prompt send your export output to an HFS type device Your IRM should be able to help you if you are not sure how to use HFS devices The Kernel Systems Manual also describes how to send output to Host files including how to set up and use HFS type devices When a Host file is created you must move that ASCII file to the computer on which the importing application resides A file transfer protocol such as KERMIT or XMODEM can be used to move this file The export can be queued if it is not sent to the screen Queuing the export is recommended for large files and for complex sorts of the data o NOTE On HFS Device Setup on OpenVMS Systems DSM for OpenVMS requires that you add a command parameter to the OPEN command if you export records longer than 512 characters to a Host file The parameter is RECORDSIZE nnnn where nnnn is greater than the longest record that you are exporting If you are using Kernel s DEVICE file 43 5 the OPEN PARAMETER field for the HFS device you are using should be edited to look like NEW RECORDSIZE nnnn 204 March 2013 Chapter 10 Imp
325. ve medium contains all the information intended to be archived The Purge Stored Entries option completely deletes data from the file being archived and from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file You cannot purge archived entries until you have moved selected entries to permanent storage Thus you need not worry about losing entries before they are archived You cannot start a second archive from a file until you purge or cancel the existing archiving activity on that file Archiving Process including Archiving Options 1 9 The order of the options on the Archiving submenu reflects the sequence of steps in which you ordinarily do archiving Access the Archiving submenu from the Other Options submenu 1 Wo 00 120Y Ul Gs CO PO Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS Select OTHER OPTION ARCHIVING Select ARCHIVE OPTION ANSWER WITH ARCHIVE OPTION NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM SELECT ENTRIES TO ARCHIVE ADD DELETE SELECTED ENTRIES PRINT SELECTED ENTRIES CREATE FILEGRAM ARCHIVING TEMPLATE WRITE ENTRIES TO TEMPORARY STORAGE MOVE ARCHIVED DATA TO PERMANENT STORAGE PURGE STORED ENTRIES CANCEL ARCHIVAL SELECTION FIND ARCHIVED ENTRIES March 2013 281 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 14 Archiving Select Entries to Archive The Select Entries to Archive option creates the archiving activity It is used similarly to the Search File Entries option The Select Entries to Archive option is the first step in developing an archivi
326. with a non null value is returned 2ND DIAGNOSIS Angina Pectoris the second entry in the DIAGNOSIS Multiple 10TH ADMISSION ADMISSION DATE gt JAN 2 1990 ADMISSION DATE associated with the tenth ADMISSION Format NEXT Parameters field is a field s number preceded by a or a field s label from the current file or Multiple This function returns the value for the field identified by field in the next entry The next entry is determined by internal entry number No analysis of the value of entries is done If there are no more entries the function returns null Example NEXT AGE AT ONSET gt 56 the value of AGE AT ONSET for the next entry in the Subfile PREVIOUS March 2013 103 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions PREVIOUS field Parameters field is a field s number preceded by a or a field s label from the current file or Multiple This function returns the value for the field identified by field in the previous entry The previous entry is determined by internal entry number No analysis of the value of entries is done If there is no prior entry the function returns null Example PREVIOUS AGE AT ONSET gt 29 the value of AGE AT ONSET for the prior entry in the Subfile TOTAL Format TOTAL fname TOTAL fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple valued field in your current file In the second format
327. wn below Field 61 in File 100 FIELD LABEL FLAGGED DATA TYPE SET eege CODE QJ WILL STAND FOR NO CODE 1 WILL STAND FOR YES AUDIT CODE WILL STAND FOR R CODE WILL STAND FOR DEL CODE WILL STAND FOR WR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR DESC CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR HE CODE WILL STAND FOR 146 March 2013 Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual cation XECUTL 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 J COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value SET OF CODES type fields require input of all the allowable Internal values i e CODE prompt and their External equivalents i e WILL STAND FOR prompt Using the lt ArrowUp gt and lt ArrowDown gt keys makes it easy to edit the codes It is permissible to leave a blank row but every Internal Code De CODE on the left must have a corresponding External Code WILL STAND FOR on the right and vice versa FREE TEXT Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the REASON FOR FLAG field 67 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of FREE TEXT Select OPTION MODif
328. won t know until you ask Record Numbers Every record in a Fileman file has a record number sometimes called an Internal Entry Number or IEN The record number is created and assigned automatically each time a new record is added to the file A lot of users once they hear about the record number picture it as another field one they never see They think of each record in the file having a record number field which is automatically filled in by Fileman This is a perfectly adequate level of understanding for the average user but it is not correct And as a super user you need to know how it really works The record number is not a field it is part of the structure of the file A particular record number is associated with a record but it is not part of the record You might think of record numbers as hooks on a coat rack You can hang a coat on a hook and the coat is associated with the hook but the hook is not part of the coat Similarly a record number is associated with a record but is not part of it The record number is a guaranteed method for uniquely identifying a particular record And until keys become more widely used it is the only guaranteed method that will work for any file Therefore when Fileman March 2013 25 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 3 Fileman File Structure chooses a record for some internal process it always chooses by record number never by name or anything else Similarly programm
329. xported data and if that communication program automatically changes lt TAB gt s into a certain number of spaces to align text the exported data will be corrupted and the import will fail You should be familiar with your importing or exporting application and with any communications programs that you are using Knowledge of all the applications involved starting with Fileman and its Import and Export Tools increases the likelihood of a successful transfer of data Data Formats Delimited Data Format Suppose you have a record with LASTNAME FMPATIENT FIRSTNAME ONE AGE 36 In delimited data format you choose a delimiter character to place between field values Let s use a comma as the delimiter character A comma is then inserted between each of a record s fields to delimit them The resulting record exported in comma delimited format would look like FMPATIENT ONE 36 Groups of records are exported line by line one line after another A file of records in comma delimited format might look like FMPATIENT TWO 1 GREEN LANE Amherst NH 03012 FMPATIENT THREE 30 Plaza Court San Francisco CA 94105 FMPATIENT FOUR 90 123rd St San Francisco CA 94112 In order to use delimited data format both applications the exporting March 2013 191 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 10 Import and Export Tools application and the importing application must be able to recognize the
330. xpression it will produce output in Fileman s external date format DATE OF BIRTH JUL 13 1991 You can perform certain arithmetic operations with DATA TYPE field values of DATE TIME that directly yield useful results If you subtract a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME from another DATE TIME valued field the result is the number of days the two differ If you add a number to or subtract a number from a DATE TIME valued field the result is a new date For example if the DOB field has the value JUL 20 1969 then the value of the computed expression DOB 30 is AUG 19 1969 WORD PROCESSING Data Type DATA TYPE fields with a value of WORD PROCESSING can be manipulated only with the contains operator e g a valid computed expression within the DIAGNOSIS Multiple of our sample PATIENT file 200 is HISTORY poverty This Boolean expression is true if the DIAGNOSIS in question has HISTORY text that contains the string poverty Also you cannot concatenate WORD PROCESSINC type fields with other values using the concatenation operator Using Functions as Elements in Computed Expressions You can use recognized functions as an element in any COMPUTED field expression A function performs an operation that returns a value These functions are available to all users Functions can also be added by making entries in the FUNCTION file 4 5 If you examine this file you will know all of the functions available to you
331. xpression containing the character s in string that will be replaced newstring is a string expression containing the character s that will replace those in oldstring 108 March 2013 Chapter 7 Fileman Functions Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual This function returns the input string with all occurrences of the oldstring changed to the newstring The oldstring and newstring can be any length They do not have to be equal in length REPLACE abracadabra ab gt racad ra REPLACE Name is XXX XXX NAME gt Name is FMPATIENT 21 REVERSE REVERSE string This function returns the characters in string in reverse order REVERSE NAME gt neB nilknarF STRIPBLANKS STRIPBLANKS string Use This function removes leading and trailing spaces from string Example STRIPBLANKS Waste no space gt Waste no space no leading or trailing spaces TRANSLATE TRANSLATKE string oldchar newchar Parameters string is a string expression to be changed oldchar are the character s to be translated newchar are the character s to replace the oldchar March 2013 109 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 7 Fileman Functions This function alters string by changing each character in oldchar into the character in the corresponding position in newchar The translation is one character for one character TRANSLATE 08261991 123 ABC gt 08B6A99A TRANSLATE NAME F f
332. xt NAME Field 01 has been created TRANSFER FROM FILE SCHOLAR DO YOU WANT TO TRANSFER THE SCHOLAR DATA DICTIONARY INTO YOUR NEW FILE YES NOTE You are asked the global reference question only if you have programmer access Answering YES copies or clones the data definitions of the old file Then if the old file has had any templates created you will be asked DO YOU WANT TO COPY SCHOLAR TEMPLATES INTO YOUR NEW FILE Once you have created a new file with identical field and template descriptions you can transfer entries into it This is a method of copying a file Compare Merge File Entries Option The Compare Merge File Entries option allows you to compare the data value of two entries before merging them into one entry Furthermore this option provides you with an opportunity to identify the data values from either entry that will be used to create the final merged entry Both of the entries involved must be in the same file to use this option Comparing Entries You can use the Compare Merge File Entries option as a simple tool to compare entries To do this 1 Identify a file 2 Identify the two entries to be compared 238 March 2013 Chapter 11 Transferring File Entries Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual 3 Answer NO to the MERGE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM prompt In this example below two similar entries in the SCHOLAR file are used Select TRANSFER OPTION COMPAR
333. xtended pointer to navigate to the DOCTOR file Then during an interactive editing session you can specify the fields you want to edit for each patient In this case after you edit the patient s name you can edit that patient s physician s name and nickname Backward Extended Pointer Simple extended pointers let you retrieve information from an entry in another file that the current entry explicitly points to through a POINTER TO A FILE field What if you wanted to go the other way retrieve 60 March 2013 Chapter 5 Relational Navigation Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual information from an entry in another file that points to not from the current entry Radiology Exam File 53993 FMPATIENT 11 53994 LTMDATTITNT 19 53995 Examinee FMPATIENT 10 Exam Date 6 22 96 Exam Results XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Patient File Current File DOB 07 03 56 Social Security Marital Status Race Occupation Date Entered Provider Report printed from Patient File PAGE 1 PATIENT LIST OCT 1 1996 15 12 FMPATIENT 10 6 22 96 Suppose you have selected the PATIENT file and you want to list dates of radiology exams for certain patients If the pointer is from the RADIOLOGY EXAM file to the PATIENT file not the other way around you can list the radiology exam dates using a Backward Extended Pointer The POINTER TO A FILE fiel
334. y File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES lt Enter gt MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER lt Enter gt Select FIELD REASON FOR FLAG You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 67 in File 100 FIELD LABEL REASON FOR FLAG DATA TYPE FREE TEXT MINIMUM LENGTH MAXIMUM LENGTH 80 AUDIT C PATTERN MATCH IN X X 1P E REA March 2013 147 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 8 Creating Files and Fields DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Enter the reason for the flag XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value FREE TEXT type fields require input for the MINIMUM and MAXIMUM lengths of the field In this example users must enter from 1 to 80 characters for this field If included the PATTERN MATCH must be written in M For example you can insure that the data value will not start with a punctuation character by entering a PATTERN MATCH of X 1P E This is a good check to make on a field that is allowed to be just one character in leng
335. y entries pointing to a file using the Find Pointers into a File Option This option helps you analyze relationships between files and their entries It is accessed from the Data Dictionary Utility menu After selecting the file to be analyzed you have three choices Find all of the entries in other files that point to a particular entry in your file Find all of the entries in other files that point to any entry in your file This choice will also find entries in other files that point to a non existent entry in your file dangling pointers to your file Find all entries in other files that point to a non existent entry in your file dangling pointers to your file You can send the output of this option to the device of your choosing The following sample dialogue shows how you can use the Find Pointers into a File Option to identify all entries in other files that point to the German entry in the Language file The resulting output identifies the three files that have pointers to the German entry in the Language file For each entry it lists the IEN value of the 01 field and the Field Name in the March 2013 51 Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Chapter 4 Data Dictionary Utilities pointing file If you asked for either all the pointers into the file or only the non existent pointers similar reports would be created Select OPTION DATA DICTIONARY UTILITIES Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION FIND POINTERS INTO A FI

Fileman 22.2 Advanced User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents